October 2013
Second Printing
Owner’s Manual
Lincoln MKZ Hybrid
Litho in U.S.A.
EH6J 19A321 EA
Owner’s Manual
2014 MKZ Hybrid
Owner’s Manual
2014 MKZ Hybrid
lincolnowner.com lincolncanada.com
y
brid
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2013
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 20130919162930
Introduction
About This Manual........................................7
Symbols Glossary..........................................7
Data Recording..............................................9
California Proposition 65............................11
Perchlorate.....................................................11
Lincoln Credit................................................11
Replacement Parts
Recommendation....................................12
Special Notices............................................12
Mobile Communications
Equipment.................................................13
Export Unique Options..............................13
Child Safety
General Information....................................14
Installing Child Seats..................................16
Booster Seats..............................................24
Child Seat Positioning...............................26
Child Safety Locks.....................................28
Safety Belts
Principle of Operation...............................29
Fastening the Safety Belts.......................30
Safety Belt Height Adjustment................34
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime........................................................35
Safety Belt Minder......................................35
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance............................................37
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™..........................38
Supplementary Restraints
System
Principle of Operation...............................39
Driver and Passenger Airbags................40
Front Passenger Sensing System...........41
Side Airbags.................................................43
Driver Knee Airbag....................................45
Side Curtain Airbags..................................45
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator....................................................46
Airbag Disposal...........................................47
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio
Frequencies.............................................48
Remote Control...........................................48
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control......................................................52
MyKey™
Principle of Operation...............................53
Creating a MyKey.......................................54
Clearing All MyKeys...................................54
Checking MyKey System Status.............55
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems....................................................55
MyKey Troubleshooting............................55
Locks
Locking and Unlocking.............................58
Keyless Entry...............................................63
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release.....................................................65
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System........................67
1
MKZ (CC9)
Table of Contents
Anti-Theft Alarm..........................................68
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.................70
Audio Control...............................................71
Voice Control...............................................72
Cruise Control.............................................72
Information Display Control.....................72
Heated Steering Wheel.............................73
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers......................................74
Autowipers...................................................74
Windshield Washers..................................75
Lighting
Lighting Control...........................................77
Autolamps.....................................................77
Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................78
Headlamp Exit Delay.................................78
Daytime Running Lamps...........................79
Automatic High Beam Control................79
Front Fog Lamps........................................80
Adaptive Headlamps.................................80
Direction Indicators.....................................81
Interior Lamps..............................................81
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows..........................................83
Global Opening and Closing...................84
Exterior Mirrors............................................84
Interior Mirror...............................................86
Sun Visors....................................................86
Sun Shades..................................................86
Moonroof......................................................87
Instrument Cluster
Gauges..........................................................89
Warning Lamps and Indicators................91
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........95
Information Displays
General Information...................................97
Information Messages.............................109
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control.....................124
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate....................................................125
Heated Windows and Mirrors................126
Cabin Air Filter...........................................126
Remote Start...............................................127
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position................129
Head Restraints.........................................129
Power Seats................................................131
Memory Function......................................133
Rear Seats...................................................135
Heated Seats.............................................135
Ventilated Seats.........................................137
Rear Seat Armrest.....................................137
Universal Garage Door
Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener............139
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points.............................144
2
MKZ (CC9)
Table of Contents
Storage Compartments
Center Console.........................................146
Overhead Console...................................146
Starting and Stopping the
Engine
General Information..................................147
Keyless Starting.........................................147
Starting a Gasoline Engine.....................148
Engine Block Heater................................150
Unique Driving Character-
istics
Hybrid Electric Vehicle............................152
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions....................................158
Fuel Quality................................................159
Running Out of Fuel.................................159
Refueling......................................................161
Fuel Consumption....................................163
Emission Control System........................164
High Voltage Battery
General Information..................................167
High Voltage Battery Cut-Off
Switch......................................................169
Transmission
Automatic Transmission..........................170
Brakes
General Information..................................174
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes......................................................175
Electric Parking Brake..............................175
Hill Start Assist...........................................177
Traction Control
Principle of Operation..............................179
Using Traction Control.............................179
Stability Control
Principle of Operation.............................180
Using Stability Control..............................181
Parking Aids
Parking Aid.................................................182
Active Park Assist.....................................184
Rear View Camera....................................188
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation...............................191
Using Cruise Control.................................191
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............192
Driving Aids
Driver Alert.................................................199
Lane Keeping System.............................200
Blind Spot Information System.............205
Steering......................................................209
Collision Warning System.......................210
Drive Control..............................................212
Load Carrying
Load Limit....................................................214
Towing
Towing a Trailer.........................................221
Transporting the Vehicle.........................221
3
MKZ (CC9)
Table of Contents
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels...................................................222
Driving Hints
Breaking-In................................................223
Economical Driving..................................223
Driving Through Water...........................223
Floor Mats..................................................224
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance...............................225
Hazard Warning Flashers......................226
Fuel Shutoff...............................................226
Jump-Starting the Vehicle.....................226
Collision, Damage or Fire Event..........229
Post-Crash Alert System.........................231
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need............232
In California (U.S. Only)...........................233
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)....................234
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)......................235
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada...................................................235
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature................................................237
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)........................................................237
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)........................................................238
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart........................239
Changing a Fuse......................................249
Maintenance
General Information.................................251
Opening and Closing the Hood...........252
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
Hybrid.....................................................252
Engine Oil Dipstick..................................254
Engine Oil Check.....................................254
Oil Change Indicator Reset...................254
Engine Coolant Check...........................255
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.....................................................259
Brake Fluid Check...................................260
Power Steering Fluid Check.................260
Washer Fluid Check................................260
Fuel Filter...................................................260
Changing the 12V Battery.....................260
Checking the Wiper Blades..................262
Changing the Wiper Blades..................262
Adjusting the Headlamps......................263
Changing a Bulb......................................264
Bulb Specification Chart........................265
Changing the Engine Air Filter.............267
Vehicle Care
General Information................................268
Cleaning Products...................................268
Cleaning the Exterior..............................268
Waxing........................................................269
Cleaning the Engine...............................269
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.....................................................270
Cleaning the Interior...............................270
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens......................271
Cleaning Leather Seats..........................272
4
MKZ (CC9)
Table of Contents
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.............272
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels....................272
Vehicle Storage........................................273
Wheels and Tires
Temporary Mobility Kit............................276
Tire Care....................................................282
Using Snow Chains.................................296
Tire Pressure Monitoring System........296
Technical Specifications..........................301
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications.............................302
Motorcraft Parts........................................303
Vehicle Identification Number..............304
Vehicle Certification Label....................305
Transmission Code Designation..........305
Technical Specifications.........................306
Audio System
General Information................................309
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..............................................310
Media Hub...................................................311
MyLincoln Touch™
General Information.................................313
Settings.......................................................323
Entertainment............................................334
Phone..........................................................355
Electric Vehicle Information...................361
Information................................................365
Climate........................................................376
Navigation..................................................379
Accessories
Accessories...............................................389
Appendices
End User License Agreement...............391
Ford Extended Service Plan
(ESP)
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)......409
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information........412
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..........................................416
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........417
Scheduled Maintenance Record.........420
5
MKZ (CC9)
Table of Contents
6
MKZ (CC9)
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about it,
the greater the safety and pleasure you
will get from driving it.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available.
It may describe options not fitted to your
vehicle.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may be used for different models,
so may appear different to you on your
vehicle. However, the essential
information in the illustrations is always
correct.
Note: Always use and operate your
vehicle in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of the
vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand sideA
Left-hand sideB
Protecting the Environment
You must play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
7
MKZ (CC9)
Introduction
E162384
Air conditioning system
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
Fasten safety belt
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard warning flashers
Heated rear window
E91392
Heated windshield
8
MKZ (CC9)
Introduction
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
Service engine soon
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
Stability control
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, when your vehicle is in for
service or repair, Ford Motor Company,
Ford of Canada, and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
data for vehicle improvement purposes.
For U.S. only (if equipped), if you choose
to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report,
you consent that certain diagnostic
9
MKZ (CC9)
Introduction
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used
for any purpose. See MyLincoln Touch™
(page 313).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle; this data will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The event data
recorder is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety
systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less.
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have such
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to the
vehicle or the event data recorder. Ford
Motor Company and Ford of Canada do
not access event data recorder
information without obtaining consent,
unless pursuant to court order or where
required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the
information independently of Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada.
10
MKZ (CC9)
Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See MyLincoln Touch™
(page 313).
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS
technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches that you
request. If you do not want Ford or its
vendors to receive this information, do
not activate the service. Ford Motor
Company and the vendors it uses to
provide you with this information do not
store your vehicle travel information. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 313).
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
Some constituents of engine
exhaust, certain vehicle components,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, safety belt
pretensioners and remote control batteries
may contain perchlorate material. Special
handling may apply for service or vehicle
end of life disposal. For more information
visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate
LINCOLN CREDIT
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
offers a full range of financing and lease
plans to help you acquire your vehicle. If
you have financed or leased your vehicle
through Lincoln Automotive Financial
Services, thank you for your business.
For your convenience we offer a number
of ways to contact us, as well as help
manage your account.
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
11
MKZ (CC9)
Introduction
For more information regarding Lincoln
Automotive Financial Services, as well as
access Account Manager, please go to
www.LincolnAFS.com.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
Your vehicle has been built to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this
Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate these
parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be
covered by the Ford Warranty. For
additional information, refer to the terms
and conditions of the Ford Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
refer to the Warranty Manual that is
provided to you along with your Owner’s
Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNINGS
Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury. See
Supplementary Restraints System (page
39).
12
MKZ (CC9)
Introduction
WARNINGS
Front seat mounted rear-facing child
or infant seats should NEVER be
placed in front of an active passenger
airbag.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security
when appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features
and options that are different from the
features and options that are described in
this Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for Export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required information
and warnings.
13
MKZ (CC9)
Introduction
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNINGS
Always make sure your child is
secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
All children are shaped differently.
The recommendations for safety
restraints are based on probable child
height, age and weight thresholds from
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and other safety
organizations, or are the minimum
requirements of law. Ford recommends
WARNINGS
checking with a NHTSA Certified Child
Passenger Safety Technician (CPST) and
consult your pediatrician to make sure
your child seat is appropriate for your
child, and is compatible with and properly
installed in your vehicle. To locate a child
seat fitting station and CPST, contact the
NHTSA toll free at 1-888-327-4236 or go
to http://www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a CPST or for further
information, contact your provincial
ministry of transportation, locate your local
St. John Ambulance office by searching
for St. John Ambulance on the internet, or
Transport Canada at 1-800-333-0371
(http://www.tc.gc.ca). Failure to properly
restrain children in safety seats made
especially for their height, age, and weight
may result in an increased risk of serious
injury or death to your child.
14
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an infant
carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).
Infants or
toddlers
Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (gener-
ally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four and
less than age 12, and between 40 lb (18
kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100
lb (45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle safety belt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seat back
upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80
lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recom-
mended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
15
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly
use safety seats for infants and
toddlers in the United States and
Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 pounds (36 kilograms).
Check your local and state or
provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 41).
INSTALLING CHILD SEATS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for infants, toddlers, or
children weighing 40 pounds (18
kilograms) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct safety belt buckle for
that seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel
it latch. Make sure the tongue is
securely fastened in the buckle.
16
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
• Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the
child seat and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child seat will be installed in the upright
position.
• Put the safety belt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child seat with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child seat illustrated
is a forward facing child seat, the steps
are the same for installing a rear facing
child seat.
Standard safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
17
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until all of the belt is pulled out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will provide extra
help to remove remaining slack from
the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
18
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check this,
grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be
no more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters)
of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Inflatable safety belts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp
the shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child seat according to the
child seat manufacturer's instructions.
Be sure the belt webbing is not
twisted.
19
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage.
Make sure the tongue is latched
securely by pulling on it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the grasp the lap
portion of the inflatable safety belt and
pull upward until all of the belt is pulled
out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard safety belt, the
inflatable safety belt's unique lap portion
locks the child seat for installation. The
ability for the shoulder portion of the belt
to move freely is normal, even after the
lap belt has been put into the automatic
locking mode.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt will click as it retracts
to indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that will exist once the extra
weight of the child is added to the child
20
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
restraint. It also helps to achieve the
proper snugness of the child seat to
your vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child seat
is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is
securely held in place. To check this,
grab the seat at the belt path and
attempt to move it side to side and
forward and back. There should be
no more than 1 inch (2.5 centimeters)
of movement for proper installation.
Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with your local St. John Ambulance
office for referral to a Certified Passenger
Seat Technician.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)
WARNINGS
Never attach two child safety seats
to the same anchor. In a collision,
one anchor may not be strong enough to
hold two child safety seat attachments and
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Depending on where you secure a
child restraint, and depending on the
child restraint design, you may block
access to certain safety belt buckle
assemblies or LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, occupants
should only use seating positions where
they are able to be properly restrained.
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
located where seat back and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor located behind that seating
position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at
the LATCH equipped seating positions in
your vehicle. This type of attachment
method eliminates the need to use safety
belts to attach the child seat, however the
safety belt can still be used to attach the
child seat. For forward-facing child seats,
the top tether strap must also be attached
to the proper top tether anchor, if a top
tether strap has been provided with your
child seat.
21
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child seat installation at the seating
positions marked with the child seat
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are located at the rear
section of the rear seat between the
cushion and seat back below the symbols
as shown. Follow the child seat
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child seat with LATCH
attachments. Follow the instructions on
attaching child safety seats with tether
straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child seat only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)
WARNING
The standardized spacing for LATCH
lower anchors is 11 inches (28
centimeters) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child seat
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 inches
(46 centimeters) apart. A child seat with
rigid LATCH attachments cannot be
installed at the center seating position.
LATCH compatible child seats (with
attachments on belt webbing) can only be
used at this seating position provided that
the child seat manufacturer's instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child seat to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached
to that anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child seat from side to
side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than one inch when you do this
for a proper installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
22
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
Combining Safety Belt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors
may be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
seat.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
seat for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once the child safety seat has been
installed using either the safety belt, the
lower anchors of the LATCH system, or
both, you can attach the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:
Note: If you install a child seat with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child seat
off your vehicle seat cushion when the
child is seated in it. Keep the tether strap
just snug without lifting the front of the
child seat. Keeping the child seat just
touching your vehicle seat gives the best
protection in a severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For outboard
seating positions, route the tether strap
under the head restraint and between
the head restraint posts. For the center
seating positions, route the tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, the head restraints can also
be removed.
E144274
23
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position, then open
the tether anchor cover.
E144275
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system is equipped
with a tether strap, and the child restraint
manufacturer recommends its use, Ford
also recommends its use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING
Never place, or allow a child to
place, the shoulder belt under a
child's arm or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a collision.
Note: Some booster seat safety belt
guides may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable safety
belt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches
(1.45 meters) tall, are greater than age four
(4) and less than age twelve (12), and
between 40 pounds (18 kilograms) and 80
pounds (36 kilograms) and upward to 100
pounds (45 kilograms) if recommended by
your child restraint manufacturer). Many
state and provincial laws require that
children use approved booster seats until
they reach age eight, a height of 4 feet 9
inches (1.45 meters) tall, or 80 pounds (36
kilograms).
Booster seats should be used until you
can answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat back with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?
24
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
back or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat back
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back
booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size
and shape. Choose a booster that keeps
the lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across
the child's hips.
25
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
E142596
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing
a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD SEAT POSITIONING
WARNINGS
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the vehicle seat upon
which the child seat is installed all the way
WARNINGS
back. When possible, all children age 12
and under should be properly restrained
in a rear seating position. If all children
cannot be seated and restrained properly
in a rear seating position, properly restrain
the largest child in the front seat.
Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided
by the manufacturer of any child restraint
to determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
26
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
WARNINGS
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap while your vehicle
is moving. The passenger cannot protect
the child from injury in a crash, which may
result in serious injury or death.
Never use pillows, books, or towels
to boost a child. They can slide
around and increase the likelihood of
injury or death in a crash.
WARNINGS
Always restrain an unoccupied child
seat or booster seat. These objects
may become projectiles in a crash or
sudden stop, which may increase the risk
of serious injury.
Never place, or allow a child to
place, the shoulder belt under a
child's arm or behind the back because it
reduces the protection for the upper part
of the body and may increase the risk of
injury or death in a crash.
To avoid risk of injury, do not leave
children or pets unattended in your
vehicle.
Use any attachment method as indicated below by XCombined
child and
seat weight
Restraint
Type
Safety belt
only
Safety belt
and LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
Safety belt
and top
tether
anchor
LATCH
(lower
anchors
only)
LATCH
(lower
anchors
and top
tether
anchor)
XXUp to 65 lb
(29 kg)
Rear
facing
child seat
XOver 65 lb
(29 kg)
Rear
facing
child seat
XXXUp to 65 lb
(29 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
XXOver 65 lb
(29 kg)
Forward
facing
child seat
27
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
Note: The child seat must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats
(page 129).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.
28
MKZ (CC9)
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Always drive and ride with your seat
back upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
To reduce the risk of injury, make
sure children sit where they can be
properly restrained.
Never let a passenger hold a child
on his or her lap while your vehicle
is moving. The passenger cannot protect
the child from injury in a crash.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in
a cargo area, inside or outside of a
vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed. Do not allow people to
ride in any area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and safety belts. Be
sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a safety belt properly.
In a rollover crash, an unbelted
person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a safety belt.
WARNINGS
Each seating position in your vehicle
has a specific safety belt assembly
which is made up of one buckle and one
tongue that are designed to be used as a
pair. 1) Use the shoulder belt on the
outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing the safety belt around your neck
over the inside shoulder. 3) Never use a
single belt for more than one person.
When possible, all children 12 years
old and under should be properly
restrained in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Safety belts and seats can become
hot in a vehicle that has been closed
up in sunny weather; they could burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
Front and rear seat occupants,
including pregnant women, should
wear safety belts for optimum protection
in an accident.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder safety belts. All
occupants of the vehicle should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided.
The safety belt system consists of:
• lap and shoulder safety belts.
• shoulder safety belt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver safety
belt).
29
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
• height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• safety belt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.
• Safety belt warning light and chime.
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The safety belt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten
the safety belts when activated. In frontal
and near-frontal crashes, the safety belt
pretensioners may be activated alone or,
if the crash is of sufficient severity,
together with the front airbags. The
pretensioners may also activate when a
side curtain airbag is deployed.
FASTENING THE SAFETY BELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.
30
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
Restraint of Pregnant Women
WARNING
Always ride and drive with your
seatback upright and the safety belt
properly fastened. The lap portion of the
safety belt should fit snug and be
positioned low across the hips. The
shoulder portion of the safety belt should
be positioned across the chest. Pregnant
women should also follow this practice.
See the following figure.
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
safety belt. The lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt should
be positioned low across the hips below
the belly and worn as tight as comfort will
allow. The shoulder belt should be
positioned to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.
Safety Belt Locking Modes
WARNINGS
After any vehicle crash, the safety
belt system at all passenger seating
positions must be checked by an
authorized dealer to verify that the
automatic locking retractor feature for child
seats is still functioning properly. In
addition, all safety belts should be
checked for proper function.
Belt and retractor assembly must be
replaced if the safety belt assembly
automatic locking retractor feature or any
other safety belt function is not operating
properly when checked by an authorized
dealer. Failure to replace the belt and
retractor assembly could increase the risk
of injury in crashes.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver safety belt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seat safety belts have
both the vehicle sensitive locking mode
and the automatic locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of approximately 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination safety
belts will lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
31
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
In addition, the retractor is designed to
lock if the webbing is pulled out too
quickly. If this occurs, let the belt retract
slightly and pull webbing out again in a
slow and controlled manner.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder
belt. The automatic locking mode is not
available on the driver safety belt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
This mode should be used any time a child
safety seat, except a booster, is installed
in passenger front or rear seating
positions. Children 12 years old and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position whenever possible. See
Child Safety (page 14).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Non-inflatable safety belts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire belt is pulled
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
safety belt is now in the automatic
locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable safety belts
(second row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until the entire belt is
pulled out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the safety belt is now in
the automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
32
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the rear inflatable safety belt.
The rear inflatable safety belts are fitted
in the shoulder portion of the safety belts
of the second-row outboard seating
positions.
Note: The rear inflatable safety belts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning
booster seats when properly installed. This
is because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the safety
belt remains cool to the touch.
The rear inflatable safety belt consists of
the following:
• An inflatable bag located in the
shoulder safety belt webbing.
• Lap safety belt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front safety belts.
• Impact sensors located in various parts
of the vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable safety belt
system work?
The rear inflatable safety belts will function
like standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt will inflate from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body
than regular safety belts. This helps reduce
pressure on the chest and helps control
head and neck motion for passengers.
WARNING
If the rear inflatable safety belt has
deployed, it will not function again.
The rear inflatable safety belt system must
be replaced by an authorized dealer.
33
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
The rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal
crashes and some side impact crashes.
The fact that the rear inflatable safety belt
did not inflate in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.
Safety Belt Extension Assembly
WARNINGS
Do not use extensions to change the
fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
Do not use extensions with an
inflatable safety belt.
If the safety belt is too short when fully
extended, a safety belt extension
assembly can be obtained from an
authorized dealer.
Use only extensions manufactured by the
same supplier as the safety belt.
Manufacturer identification is located at
the end of the webbing on the label. A
safety belt extension is not available for
the inflatable safety belt. Also, use the
safety belt extension only if the safety belt
is too short for you when fully extended.
SAFETY BELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
WARNING
Position the safety belt height
adjusters so that the belt rests
across the middle of your shoulder. Failure
to adjust the safety belt properly could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
and increase the risk of injury in a crash.
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so
the belt rests across the middle of your
shoulder.
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on
the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.
34
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
SAFETY BELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver's safety belt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.
Conditions of operation
Then...If...
The safety belt warning light illuminates 1-
2 minutes and the warning chime sounds
4-8 seconds.
The driver's safety belt is not buckled
before the ignition switch is turned to the
on position...
The safety belt warning light and warning
chime turn off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...
The safety belt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The driver's safety belt is buckled before
the ignition switch is turned to the on
position...
SAFETY BELT MINDER
Belt-Minder®
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders by intermittently sounding a
chime and illuminating the safety belt
warning light when the driver seat or front
passenger seat is occupied and the safety
belt is unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine
if a front seat passenger is present and
therefore potentially in need of a warning.
To avoid activating the Belt-Minder feature
for objects placed in the front passenger
seat, warnings will only be given to front
seat occupants as determined by the front
passenger sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings have expired
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
occupant (driver or front passenger), the
other occupant can still activate the
Belt-Minder feature.
35
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.The driver's and front passenger's safety
belts are buckled before the ignition is
turned on or less than 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition has been turned
on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and the
warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver's or front passenger's safety belt
is not buckled when the vehicle has
reached at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2
minutes have elapsed since the ignition
has been turned on...
The Belt-Minder feature is activated - the
safety belt warning light illuminates and the
warning chime sounds for six seconds
every 25 seconds, repeating for about five
minutes or until the safety belts are
buckled.
The driver's or front passenger's safety belt
becomes unbuckled for about one minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1-2 minutes have
elapsed since the ignition has been turned
on...
Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature
WARNING
While the system allows you to
deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system
activated for yourself and others who may
use the vehicle. To reduce the risk of
injury, do not deactivate or activate the
system while driving the vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warning are deactivated and activated
independently. When deactivating or
activating one seating position, do not
buckle the other position as this will
terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
36
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
1. Turn the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional five seconds
before proceeding with Step 3. Once
Step 3 is started, the procedure must
be completed within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position being
disabled, buckle then unbuckle the
safety belt three times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the safety belt warning
light will turn on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is
on, buckle and then unbuckle the
safety belt. After Step 4, the safety belt
warning light will flash for confirmation.
• This will disable the feature for that
seating position if it is currently
enabled.
• This will enable the feature for that
seating position if it is currently
disabled.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SAFETY
BELT MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child
safety seat systems periodically to make
sure they work properly and are not
damaged. Inspect the vehicle and child
seat safety belts to make sure there are
no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle safety belt
assemblies, including retractors, buckles,
front safety belt buckle assemblies, buckle
support assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seat
back (if equipped), rear inflatable safety
belts (if equipped), child safety seat LATCH
and tether anchors, and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after a
collision. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles
involved in a collision be replaced.
However, if the collision was minor and an
authorized dealer finds that the belts do
not show damage and continue to operate
properly, they do not need to be replaced.
Safety belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
Properly care for safety belts. See Vehicle
Care (page 268).
37
MKZ (CC9)
Safety Belts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk
of airbag-related injuries. The system is
able to analyze different occupant
conditions and crash severity before
activating the appropriate safety devices
to help better protect a range of occupants
in a variety of frontal crash situations.
Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage
airbag supplemental restraints.
• Front outboard safety belts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only), and safety
belt usage sensors.
• Driver’s seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
backup tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensor(s), safety belt
pretensioners, front safety belt usage
sensors, driver seat position sensor,
front passenger sensing system, and
indicator lights.
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of your vehicle’s
safety devices according to crash severity
and occupant conditions. A collection of
crash and occupant sensors provides
information to the restraints control
module. During a crash, the restraints
control module may activate the safety
belt pretensioners and may activate either
one or both stages of the dual-stage
airbag supplemental restraints based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
38
MKZ (CC9)
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Airbags do not inflate slowly or
gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.
All occupants of your vehicle,
including the driver, should always
properly wear their safety belts, even
when an airbag supplemental restraint
system is provided. Failure to properly
wear your safety belt could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
Always transport children 12 years
old and under in the back seat and
always properly use appropriate child
restraints. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or
death.
Never place your arm over the
airbag module as a deploying airbag
can result in serious arm fractures or other
injuries.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag supplemental
restraint systems or its fuses as you could
be seriously injured or killed. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Several airbag system components
get hot after inflation. To reduce the
risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
WARNINGS
If the airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again and
must be replaced immediately. If the
airbag is not replaced, the unrepaired area
will increase the risk of injury in a crash.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
safety belts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see
a cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like,
powdery residue or smell the burnt
propellant. This may consist of cornstarch,
talcum powder (to lubricate the bag) or
sodium compounds (for example, baking
soda) that result from the combustion
process that inflates the airbag. Small
amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and
eyes, but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk
of death or serious injuries such as
fractures, facial and eye injuries or internal
injuries, particularly to occupants who are
39
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
not properly restrained or are otherwise
out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as
far away from the airbag module as
possible while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Never place your arm or any objects
over an airbag module. Placing your
arm over a deploying airbag can result in
serious arm fractures or other injuries.
Objects placed on or over the airbag
inflation area may cause those objects to
be propelled by the airbag into your face
and torso causing serious injury.
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags
will deploy during significant frontal and
near frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• driver and passenger airbag modules.
• front passenger sensing system.
· crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 46).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 inches (25 centimeters) between
an occupant’ s chest and the driver airbag
module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as
you can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit properly.
A properly seated occupant sits upright,
leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
40
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING
Airbags can kill or injure a child in a
child seat. Never place a rear-facing
child seat in front of an active airbag. If you
must use a forward-facing child seat in the
front seat, move the seat upon which the
child seat is installed all the way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in the front seating position. Failure
to follow these instructions may increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Even with Advanced Restraints
Systems, children 12 and under
should be properly restrained in a rear
seating position. Failure to follow this
could seriously increase the risk of injury
or death.
Sitting improperly out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far
can take off weight from the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the front
passenger sensing system, resulting in
serious injury or death in a crash. Always
sit upright against your seat back, with
your feet on the floor.
Any alteration or modification to the
front passenger seat may affect the
performance of the front passenger
sensing system which could seriously
increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger’s seat and
safety belt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger’s frontal airbag
should be enabled (may inflate) or not.
E151849
41
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
will illuminate indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is located in the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status
indicator OFF and ON indicator lamps will
illuminate for a short period of time when
the ignition is first turned on to confirm it
is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger's frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to always
properly restrain children in the rear seat.
The sensor also turns off the passenger
front airbag and seat-mounted side airbag
when the passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the OFF lamp and stay lit to
remind you that the front passenger
frontal airbag is disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status
indicator illuminates the ON lamp, then
turn the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint following the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger's frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the
passenger airbag status indicator will
illuminate the ON lamp and remain
illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the
front passenger’s seat, but the airbag off
indicator lamp is lit, it is possible that the
person isn’t sitting properly in the seat. If
this happens:
• Turn the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seat back in the full
upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the
person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system
to detect that person and enable the
passenger’s frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit
even after this, the person should be
advised to ride in the rear seat.
42
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
Passenger airbagPassenger airbag status
indicator
Occupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
Note: When the passenger airbag status
indicator OFF light is illuminated, the
passenger (seat mounted) side airbag may
be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag
deployment injuries.
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on safety belts, it is very
important that they continue to sit properly.
A properly seated occupant sits upright,
leaning against the seat back, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
The conditions listed above may cause
the weight of a properly seated occupant
to be incorrectly interpreted by the front
passenger sensing system. The person in
the front passenger seat may appear
heavier or lighter due to the conditions
described in the list above.
To know if the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly, See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 46).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page 232).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
43
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNINGS
Do not use accessory seat covers.
The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in
an accident.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side airbag could injure you as
it deploys from the side of the seatback.
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the airbag, its fuses or the
seat cover on a seat containing an airbag
as you could be seriously injured or killed.
Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
If the side airbag has deployed, the
airbag will not function again. The
side airbag system (including the seat)
must be inspected and serviced by an
authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact
crashes.
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.
·Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 46).
Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty
passenger seat.
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.
44
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
DRIVER KNEE AIRBAG
A driver’s and passenger’s knee airbag is
located under or within the instrument
panel. During a crash, the restraints control
module may activate the driver’s and
passenger’s knee airbag (individually or
both) based on crash severity and
respective occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
driver’ s and passenger’s knee airbag may
deploy (individually or both) but the
corresponding front airbag may not
activate. As with front and side airbags, it
is important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or
serious injury.
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 46).
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAGS
WARNINGS
Do not place objects or mount
equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying side curtain airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
Do not lean your head on the door.
The side curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNINGS
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the side curtain airbags, its
fuses, the A, B, or C pillar trim, or the
headliner on a vehicle containing side
curtain airbags. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
All occupants of the vehicle
including the driver should always
wear their safety belts even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system and
side curtain airbag is provided.
To reduce risk of injury, do not
obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the side curtain airbag.
If the side curtain airbags have
deployed, the side curtain airbags
will not function again. The side curtain
airbags (including the A, B and C pillar trim
and headliner) must be inspected and
serviced by an authorized dealer. If the
side curtain airbag is not replaced, the
unrepaired area will increase the risk of
injury in a crash.
The side curtain airbags will deploy during
significant side crashes. The side curtain
airbags are mounted to the roof side-rail
sheet metal, behind the headliner, above
each row of seats. In certain sideways
crashes, the side curtain airbag on the
impacted side of the vehicle will be
activated. The side curtain airbags are
designed to inflate between the side
window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side
impact crashes.
The system consists of the following:
45
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
E75004
• Side curtain airbags located above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow side air curtain
deployment.
Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 46).
Children 12 years old and under should
always be properly restrained in the back
seats. The side curtain airbags will not
interfere with children restrained using a
properly installed child or booster seat
because it is designed to inflate downward
from the headliner above the doors along
the side window opening.
The design and development of the side
curtain airbags included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
curtain airbags.
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING
Modifying or adding equipment to
the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system,
increasing the risk of injury. Do not modify
the front end of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front safety belt
pretensioners, driver airbag, passenger
airbag, knee airbag(s), seat mounted side
airbags, side curtain airbags and optional
rear inflatable safety belts. Based on the
type of crash (frontal impact or side
impact), the restraints control module will
deploy the appropriate safety devices.
The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
46
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard.
The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem, the light
or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The safety belt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.
The fact that the safety belt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The safety belt pretensioners and
optional rear inflatable safety belts are
designed to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
• The design of the side airbags and
side curtain airbags is to inflate in
certain side impact crashes. Side
airbags and side curtain airbags may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible. Airbags must be disposed of
by qualified personnel.
47
MKZ (CC9)
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 feet (10
meters). Vehicles with the remote start
feature will have a greater range. One of
the following could cause a decrease in
operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other short
distance radio transmissions, for example
amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems. If the frequencies are
jammed, you will not be able to use your
remote control. You can lock and unlock
the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle
before leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote
control will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of the front
exterior door handle.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote Control
(page 48).
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
E144506
48
MKZ (CC9)
Keys and Remote Controls
Your intelligent access keys to operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to activate
the push-button start system.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable mechanical key blade that you
can use to unlock the driver door.
E151796
Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off to
access the key blade.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle’s backup keys came
with a security tag that provides important
vehicle key cut information. Keep the tag
in a safe place for future reference.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface
of the circuit board.
Note: Replacing the battery will not delete
the transmitter from the vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message will appear in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
109).
Intelligent Access Transmitter
The remote control uses two coin-type
three-volt lithium batteries CR2025 or
equivalent.
E151796
1. Slide the release on the back of the
remote control and pivot the cover off.
E153890
49
MKZ (CC9)
Keys and Remote Controls
2. Insert a coin into the slot and twist to
separate the housing.
E153891
3. Remove the batteries.
4. Install new batteries with the + facing
each other.
Note: Make sure to replace the label
between the two batteries.
5. Reinstall the housing and cover.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn will
sound and the turn signals will
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.
Sounding a Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm will only operate
when the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to activate the
alarm. Press the button again or
switch the ignition on to
deactivate.
Remote Start
WARNING
To avoid exhaust fumes, do not use
remote start if your vehicle is parked
indoors or areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your
vehicle is low on fuel.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from outside the vehicle. The
transmitter has an extended operating
range.
Vehicles with automatic climate control
can be configured to operate when the
vehicle is remote started. See Climate
Control (page 124). A manual climate
control system will run at the setting it was
set to when you switched the vehicle off.
Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.
The remote start system will not work if:
• the ignition is on
• the alarm system is triggered
• you disable the feature
• the hood is open
• the transmission is not in P
• the vehicle battery voltage is too low
• the service engine soon light is on.
50
MKZ (CC9)
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Control Feedback
An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.
StatusLED
Remote start or
extension
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful; engine
off
Solid red
Remote start or
stop failed
Blinking red
Waiting for status
update
Blinking green
Remote Starting the Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. Your vehicle
will not remote start if you do not follow
this sequence.
E138626
The tag with your transmitter details the
starting procedure.
To remote start your vehicle:
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps will flash twice.
The horn will sound if the system fails to
start, unless quiet start is on. Quiet start
will run the blower fan at a slower speed
to reduce noise. It can be switched on or
off in the information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Note: If the vehicle has been remote
started with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must switch the ignition
on before driving your vehicle. With an
intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the START/STOP button on the
instrument panel once while applying the
brake pedal before driving your vehicle.
The power windows will not work during
the remote start and the radio will not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps will remain on and the
vehicle will run for 5, 10, or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Vehicle Run Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start duration. If you programmed
the duration to last 10 minutes, the second
10 minutes will begin after what is left of
the first activation time. For example, if the
vehicle had been running from the first
remote start for five minutes, the vehicle
will continue to run now for a total of 15
minutes. You can extend the remote start
up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after a vehicle shutdown.
51
MKZ (CC9)
Keys and Remote Controls
Turning the Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. The
parking lamps will turn off.
You may have to be closer to
the vehicle than when starting due to
ground reflection and the added noise of
the running vehicle.
You can disable or enable the remote start
system through the information display.
See General Information (page 97).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 67).
To re-program the passive anti-theft
system see an authorized dealer.
52
MKZ (CC9)
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. All but one of the keys
programmed to the vehicle can be
activated with these restricted modes.
Any keys that have not been programmed
are referred to as administrator keys or
admin keys. These can be used to:
• create a MyKey
• program configurable MyKey settings
• clear all MyKey features.
When you have programmed a MyKey,
you can access the following information
using the information display:
• How many admin keys and MyKeys
are programmed to your vehicle.
• The total distance your vehicle has
traveled using a MyKey.
Note: All MyKeys are programmed to the
same settings. You cannot program them
individually.
Note: For vehicles with intelligent access
with push-button start, when both a MyKey
and an admin intelligent access key fob
are present, the admin fob will be
recognized by the vehicle while switching
the ignition on to start the vehicle.
Non-configurable Settings
The following settings cannot be changed
by an admin key user:
• Belt-Minder. You cannot disable this
feature. The audio system will mute
when the front seat occupants’ safety
belts are not fastened.
• Early low fuel. The low-fuel warning
activates earlier, giving the MyKey user
more time to refuel.
• Driver assist features, if equipped on
your vehicle, are forced on: parking
aid, blind spot information system
(BLIS) with cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning and forward
collision warning system.
Configurable Settings
With an admin key, you can configure
certain MyKey settings when you first
create a MyKey and before you recycle
the key or restart the vehicle. You can also
change the settings afterward with an
admin key.
• A vehicle speed limit can be set.
Warnings will be shown in the display
followed by an audible tone when your
vehicle reaches the set speed. You
cannot override the set speed by fully
depressing the accelerator pedal or
by setting cruise control.
• Vehicle speed minders of 45, 55 or 65
mph (75, 90 or 105 km/h). Once you
select a speed, it will be shown in the
display, followed by an audible tone
when the preselected vehicle speed
is exceeded.
53
MKZ (CC9)
MyKey™
• Audio system maximum volume of
45%. A message will be shown in the
display when you attempt to exceed
the limited volume. Also, the
speed-sensitive or compensated
automatic volume control will be
disabled.
• Always on setting. When this is
selected, you will not be able to turn
off Advance Trac (if your vehicle is
equipped with this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. If your vehicle is equipped
with a push-button start, place the
intelligent access key fob into the backup
slot. The location of your backup slot is in
another chapter. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 147).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
Settings then MyKey by pressing OK or
the > button.
4. Press OK or the > button to select
Create MyKey.
5. When prompted, hold the OK button
until you see a message informing you to
label this key as a MyKey. The key will be
restricted at the next start.
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from
the admin keys.
You can also program configurable
settings for the key(s). See
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings.
Programming/Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key or fob.
2. Access the main menu on the
information display controls, and select
Settings, then MyKey by pressing OK
or > button.
3. Use the arrow buttons to get to a
feature.
4. Press OK or > to make a selection.
Note: You can clear or change your
MyKey settings at any time during the
same key cycle as you created the MyKey.
Once you have switched the vehicle off,
however, you will need an admin key to
change or clear your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
You can clear all MyKeys within the same
key cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch your ignition off, however, you will
need to use an admin key to clear your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all
MyKeys to their original admin key status
at once.
54
MKZ (CC9)
MyKey™
To clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings,
use the information display to do the
following:
1. Access the main menu and select
Settings, then MyKey.
2. Scroll to Clear MyKey and press the
OK button.
3. Hold the OK button until ALL MYKEYS
CLEARED displays.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display.
MYKEY DISTANCE
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear your MyKey. If the distance
does not accumulate as expected, then
the intended user is not using the MyKey,
or an admin key user recently cleared and
then recreated a MyKey.
NUMBER OF MYKEY(S)
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
a MyKey has been deleted.
NUMBER OF ADMIN KEY(S)
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many
unrestricted keys you have for your
vehicle, and detect if an additional MyKey
has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
· The key or fob used to start the vehicle does
not have admin privileges.
I cannot create a MyKey.
· The key or fob used to start the vehicle is the
only admin key (there always has to be at least
one admin key).
55
MKZ (CC9)
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
· Vehicles with push-button start: The intelli-
gent access key fob is not positioned correctly
next to the steering column. See Keyless
Starting (page 147).
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with admin
privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote
Start Systems (page 55).
· The key or fob used to start your vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
I cannot program the configurable
settings.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 54).
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with admin
privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote
Start Systems (page 55).
· The key or fob used to start your vehicle
does not have admin privileges.
I cannot clear the MyKeys.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 54).
· The vehicle has been started using a remote
start system that is not programmed with admin
privileges. See Using MyKey With Remote
Start Systems (page 55).
Purchase a new key from your authorized
dealer.
I lost the only admin key.
Program a spare key. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 67).
I lost a key
· The vehicle has a remote start system that
is recognized as an admin key. Clear all
MyKeys by using the remote start. See Using
MyKey With Remote Start Systems (page 55).
I accidentally programmed all keys as
MyKeys.
· The vehicle's system does not recognize any
programmed MyKeys. See Creating a MyKey
(page 54).
56
MKZ (CC9)
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
· An unknown key or fob has been created as
a MyKey.
MyKey total includes one additional
key.
· The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
(page 55).
· An unknown key or fob has been
programmed to the vehicle as an admin key.
Admin key total includes one additional
key.
· The vehicle has a remote start system. See
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
(page 55).
· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.MyKey distances do not accumulate.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and
created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.
· An admin fob is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the Intelligent
Access key. · No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 54).
57
MKZ (CC9)
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the
driver and front passenger door panels.
E138628
UnlockA
LockB
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim will light
when you lock the door. It will remain lit
for up to 10 minutes after you switch off
the ignition.
Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch and interior
trunk release switch will no longer operate
after 20 seconds. You must unlock your
vehicle with the remote control or keyless
keypad, or switch the ignition on, to
restore function to these switches. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door release handle twice
to unlock and open the rear door. The first
pull unlocks the door and the second pull
will unlatch the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any
time. The luggage compartment release
button only works when your vehicle
speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The turn
signals will flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door
or all doors unlock mode. The turn signals
will flash twice to indicate a change to the
unlocking mode. Driver door unlock mode
will only unlock the driver door when the
unlock button is pressed once. All door
unlock mode unlocks all doors with one
press of the unlock button. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access. You can also change the mode in
the information display. See General
Information (page 97).
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all the
doors. The turn signals will
illuminate.
58
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the turn signals will
illuminate if all the doors and the luggage
compartment are closed.
Mislock
If any door or the luggage compartment
is open, or if the hood is open on vehicles
with an anti-theft alarm or remote start, the
horn will sound twice and the lamps will
not flash. You can enable or disable this
feature in the information display. See
General Information (page 97).
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage
compartment.
Make sure to close and latch the luggage
compartment before driving your vehicle.
An unlatched luggage compartment may
cause objects to fall out or block your
view.
Activating Intelligent Access
You must have the intelligent access key
within 3 feet (1 meter) of your vehicle.
At a Door
Pull an exterior door handle to unlock and
open the door. Make sure not to touch the
lock sensor on top of the handle.
E146044
Touch the top of the door handle to lock
your vehicle. There will be a brief delay
before you can unlock your vehicle again.
Note: Keep the door handle surface clean
to avoid issues with operation.
At the Luggage Compartment
E164806
Press the exterior release button hidden
above the license plate.
Smart Unlocks
This feature helps to prevent you from
unintentionally locking your intelligent
access key inside your vehicle’s passenger
compartment or rear cargo area.
59
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
When you electronically lock your vehicle
(with any door open, vehicle in park and
ignition off), your vehicle will search for an
intelligent access key in the passenger
compartment after you close the last door.
If your vehicle finds a key, all of the doors
will immediately unlock and the horn will
sound twice, indicating that a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle. To do this, lock
your vehicle after you have closed all the
doors by:
• using the keyless entry keypad
• pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key
• touching the locking area on the
handle with another intelligent access
key in your hand.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door
lock control, all doors will lock then unlock
if:
• the ignition is on, or
• the ignition is off and your vehicle is
not in P.
Auto Relock
If you press the unlock button on the
remote control and do not open a door
within 45 seconds, your vehicle will lock
and the alarm will arm. You can enable or
disable this feature in the information
display. See General Information (page
97).
Autolock Feature
The autolock feature will lock all the doors
when:
• all doors are closed,
• the ignition is on,
• you shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion, and
• your vehicle attains a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
The autolock feature repeats when:
• you open then close any door while
the ignition is on and your vehicle
speed is 9 mph (15 km/h) or lower, and
• your vehicle then attains a speed
greater than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock Feature
The autounlock feature will unlock all the
doors when:
• the ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been in
motion at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h);
• your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to accessory;
and
• you open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
60
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
Enabling or Disabling
Note: You can enable or disable the
autolock and autounlock features
independently of each other.
You can enable or disable these features
in the information display or your
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 97).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote entry system.
The illuminated entry system will turn off
the lights if:
• the ignition is on,
• you press the remote control lock
button, or
• after 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights will not turn off if:
• you turn them on with the lamp control,
or
• any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and select exterior
lamps will illuminate when all doors are
closed and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps will turn off if all the doors
remain closed and:
• 25 seconds elapse
• you press the START/STOP button.
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, dome
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
will shut them off 10 minutes after you
switch the ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave your vehicle in the run ignition
state, it will shut off once it detects a
certain amount of battery drain or after 45
minutes.
Luggage Compartment
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel to unlatch the
trunk.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to unlatch the trunk.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E164806
61
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
Press the release button above the license
plate to unlatch the trunk. Your vehicle
must be unlocked or have an intelligent
access transmitter within 3 feet (1 meter)
of the trunk.
Power Decklid (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Make sure all persons are clear of
the power decklid area before using
the power decklid control.
Keep keys out of the reach of
children. Do not allow children to
operate the power decklid, or to play near
to an open or moving power decklid.
Note: Do not drive with the decklid open
unless you disable the power feature.
Make sure you secure the decklid to you
vehicle.
You can enable or disable the power
decklid using the information display. The
remote control and instrument panel
button will still operate the decklid
regardless of the setting.
Opening and Closing the Power Decklid
Note: You can reverse the decklid
movement. Press the instrument panel or
decklid button again, or press the remote
control button twice.
The decklid will only operate with your
vehicle in P.
If the decklid reverses or starts to close
after an open request, you will hear a fast
continuous chime. This indicates excessive
load on the decklid or a possible torsion
bar failure. See your authorized dealer if
you still have a fast chime after you
remove the load.
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
Press the button on the
instrument panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press twice within three
seconds.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E164806
Press the control button located above the
license plate. Your vehicle must be
unlocked or have the intelligent access
transmitter within 3 feet (1 meter) of the
decklid to open it.
Note: Let the power system operate the
decklid after pressing the control. Pushing
or pulling the decklid may activate the
obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation.
62
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
With the Decklid Close Button
E173217
Press the button inside the
decklid on the left side.
Obstacle Detection
The decklid will reverse to full open if it
detects an obstacle while closing. Three
chimes will sound as the decklid begins
to reopen. Remove the obstacle to close
the decklid.
Note: Before driving off, check the
instrument cluster for a trunk ajar or door
ajar message or warning indicator. Failure
to do this could result in unintentionally
leaving the decklid open while driving.
The decklid will stop and three chimes will
sound if it detects an obstacle while
opening. Remove the obstacle to operate
the decklid.
Resetting the Power Decklid
The decklid may not operate properly and
you may need to reset it if:
• the battery is dead or has low voltage
• you disconnect the battery
• you manually close the decklid and
leave it unlatched.
To reset the power decklid:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds
then reconnect the battery.
2. Manually close and fully latch the
decklid.
3. Power open the decklid using the
remote control or instrument panel
button.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until touched and
then it lights up so you can see and touch
the appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may
not work. Re-enter your entry code more
slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• lock or unlock the doors
• recall memory seat and mirror
positions
• program and erase personal entry
codes
• arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm
• release the trunk.
Note: The keypad will not operate a
power decklid.
63
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set 5-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an
authorized dealer. You can also create up
to five of your own 5-digit personal entry
codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.
The doors will lock then unlock to confirm
that programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry
code through the MyLincoln Touch system.
See Settings (page 323).
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code will work even if
you have set your own personal code.
Recalling Memory Positions
The programmed entry codes will recall
driver memory positions as follows:
• Entry code 1 will recall driver 1 memory
positions.
• Entry code 2 will recall driver 2
memory positions.
• Entry code 3 will recall driver 3
memory positions.
Note: Personal entry codes 4 and 5 will
not recall memory positions.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing Step 2.
All personal codes are now erased and
only the factory-set 5–digit code will work.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad will go into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times
(35 consecutive button presses). This
mode disables the keypad for one minute
and the keypad lamp will flash.
The anti-scan feature will turn off after:
• one minute of keypad inactivity
• pressing the unlock button on the
remote control
• switching the ignition on
• unlocking your vehicle using intelligent
access.
64
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps will illuminate.
Note: All doors will unlock if you enable
the all-door unlocking mode. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 58).
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same
time (with the driver door closed). You do
not need to enter the keypad code first.
To Release the Trunk
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 5·6 within five seconds.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You will need to have two
programmed intelligent access keys for
this procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
E155835
1. Remove the rubber covering (A) in the
cupholder. Place the first programmed
key in the backup slot (B) at the bottom
of the cupholder.
2. Press the START/STOP button once
and wait a few seconds.
3. Press the START/STOP button again
and remove the key.
4. Insert the second programmed key
into the backup slot, then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory-set code will appear in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNINGS
Keep vehicle doors and luggage
compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a child’s
reach. Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
65
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
WARNINGS
Do not leave children, unreliable
adults, or animals unattended in the
vehicle. On hot days, the temperature in
the trunk or vehicle interior can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious
heat-related injuries, including brain
damage. Small children are particularly at
risk.
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape
for children and adults if they become
locked inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with
the operation and location of the release
handle.
E144403
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail
lamps. It is composed of a material that
will glow for hours in darkness following
brief exposure to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the
luggage compartment door (lid) to open
from within the luggage compartment.
66
MKZ (CC9)
Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start
systems. Use of these systems may result
in vehicle starting problems and a loss of
security protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when
starting your vehicle. Prevent these
objects from touching the coded key while
starting your vehicle. Switch the ignition
off, move all objects on the key chain
away from the coded key and restart your
vehicle if a problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock
The system helps prevent your vehicle
from starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with
a correctly coded key, it is not operating
properly. A message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after
switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms your vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost
or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
You must have two previously
programmed intelligent access keys inside
your vehicle and the new unprogrammed
intelligent access keys readily accessible.
See an authorized dealer to have the
spare key programmed if two previously
programmed keys are not available.
67
MKZ (CC9)
Security
Make sure that your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that
you close all the doors before beginning
and that they remain closed throughout
the procedure. Perform all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop
and wait for at least one minute before
starting again if you perform any steps out
of sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E155835
1. Remove the rubber covering (A) from
the cupholder. Place the first
programmed key in the backup slot (B)
at the bottom of the cupholder, then
press the push button ignition switch.
2. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
3. Remove the intelligent access key.
4. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in
the backup slot. Press the push button
ignition switch.
5. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
6. Remove the intelligent access key.
7. Place the unprogrammed intelligent
access key in the backup slot and
press the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent
access key.
If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in the ignition. Electronically lock
the vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
68
MKZ (CC9)
Security
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
• Switch the ignition on or start the
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver’ s door to unlock
the vehicle, then switch the ignition on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and
signal indicators, but will not disarm the
system.
69
MKZ (CC9)
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the
Correct Position (page 129).
2
2
1
E157083
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the
desired position.
E157084
3. Lock the steering column.
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the
Correct Position (page 129).
E161834
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• tilt: press the top or bottom of the
control
• telescope: press the front or rear of the
control.
70
MKZ (CC9)
Steering Wheel
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
When you switch the ignition off, the
steering column will move to the full up
position to allow extra room to exit your
vehicle. The column will return to the
previous setting when you switch the
ignition on. You can enable or disable this
feature in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 97).
Memory Feature
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 133).
Pressing the adjustment control during
memory recall cancels the operation. The
column responds to the adjustment
control.
The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if
the steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Press the steering column control
again after encountering the new
stopping position.
2. Continue pressing the control until it
reaches the end of the column
position.
A new stopping position is set. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it will stop just short of the end of
the column position.
AUDIO CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
You can operate the following functions
with the control:
E145979
Volume upA
Volume downB
Seek up or nextC
Seek down or previousD
MuteE
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset
• play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band
• seek through a track.
71
MKZ (CC9)
Steering Wheel
VOICE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
E145980
Voice recognitionA
End a callB
Answer a callC
See MyLincoln Touch™ (page 313).
CRUISE CONTROL
Type 1
E145976
Type 2
E145977
See Cruise Control (page 191).
INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL
E145981
See Information Displays (page 97).
Cluster Display Control Features
E145982
72
MKZ (CC9)
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the
wiper motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
D
C
B
E169313
A
Single wipeA
Intermittent wipeB
Normal wipeC
High speed wipeD
Intermittent Wipe
C
B
A
E169314
Shortest wipe intervalA
Intermittent wipeB
Longest wipe intervalC
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes will decrease.
AUTOWIPERS (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
switching on the windshield wipers.
Note: Make sure you switch off the
windshield wipers before entering a car
wash.
Note: Clean the windshield and wiper
blades if they begin to leave streaks or
smears. If that does not resolve the issue,
install new wiper blades.
74
MKZ (CC9)
Wipers and Washers
Note: If you switch autolamps on in
conjunction with autowipers, your low
beam headlamps will illuminate
automatically when the rain sensor
activates the windshield wipers
continuously.
Note: Wet or winter driving conditions with
ice, snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
In these conditions, you can do the
following to help keep your windshield
clear:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch the autowipers off.
A
C
B
E169315
Highest sensitivityA
OnB
Lowest sensitivityC
The autowipers feature uses a rain sensor.
You will find it in the area around the
interior mirror. The rain sensor monitors
the amount of moisture on the windshield
and automatically turns on the wipers. It
will adjust the wiper speed by the amount
of moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield. You can turn this feature on
and off in the information display. See
General Information (page 97).
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the rain sensor. Set the
control to low sensitivity, and the wipers
will turn on when the rain sensor detects
a large amount of moisture on the
windshield. Set the control to high
sensitivity, and the wipers will turn on
when the rain sensor detects a small
amount of moisture on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive. If the area
around the mirror is dirty, then the wipers
may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit the
windshield.
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.
E169316
75
MKZ (CC9)
Wipers and Washers
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
OffA
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
tail lamps
B
HeadlampsC
High Beams
E162679
Push the lever forward to switch the high
beams on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.
Headlamp Flasher
E162680
Pull the lever toward you slightly and
release it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
E142451
The headlamps will switch on and off
automatically in low light situations or
during inclement weather.
The headlamps will remain on for a period
of time after you switch the ignition off.
Use the information display controls to
adjust the period of time that the
headlamps will remain on. See
Information Displays (page 97).
77
MKZ (CC9)
Lighting
When the headlamp switch is in the
Autolamps position, the windshield wiper
activated exterior lamps will turn on within
10 seconds when you switch the
windshield wipers on. The exterior lamps
will turn off approximately 60 seconds
after you switch the windshield wipers off.
This feature does not turn on the exterior
lamps:
• during a mist wipe
• while the wipers are on to clear washer
fluid during a wash condition
• if the wipers are in automatic or
intermittent modes.
Note: If you have autolamps and
autowipers switched on the low beam
headlamps will turn on automatically when
the windshield wipers operate
continuously.
Note: You may have to manually switch
the headlamps on in severe weather
conditions.
Note: If you have autolamps switched on
you can only switch the high beam
headlamps on once the system has turned
the headlamps on.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect and connect the
battery, or fully discharge and charge the
battery, the illuminated components will
switch to the maximum setting.
A B
E165337
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press and
hold to brighten.
B
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
After you switch the ignition off, you can
switch the headlamps on by pulling the
direction indicator lever toward you. You
will hear a short tone. The headlamps will
switch off automatically after three minutes
with any door open or 30 seconds after
the last door has been closed. You can
cancel this feature by pulling the direction
indicator toward you again or switching
the ignition on.
78
MKZ (CC9)
Lighting
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (IF
EQUIPPED)
WARNING
Always remember to switch your
headlamps on in low light situations
or during inclement weather. The system
does not activate the tail lamps and may
not provide adequate lighting during these
conditions. Failure to activate your
headlamps under these conditions may
result in a collision.
The system switches the signature lamps
on in day light conditions.
To switch the system on, switch the
ignition on, and switch the lighting control
to the off, autolamp, or parking lamp
position.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
The system will automatically turn on your
high beams if it is dark enough and no
other traffic is present. When it detects the
headlights of an approaching vehicle, the
tail lamps of the preceding vehicle or
street lighting, the system will turn off the
high beams before they distract other
drivers. The low beams remain on.
Note: If it appears that automatic control
of the high beams is not functioning
properly, check the windshield in front of
the camera for a blockage. A clear view
of the road is required for proper system
operation. Have any windshield damage
in the area of the camera’s field-of-view
repaired.
Note: If the system detects a blockage
such as bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, and you do not observe changes,
the system will go into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message
may also appear in the instrument cluster
display noting the front camera is blocked.
Note: Typical road dust, dirt and water
spots will not affect the performance of
the automatic high beam system .
However, in cold or inclement weather
conditions, you will notice a decrease in
the availability of the high beam system,
especially at start up. If you want to
change the beam state independently of
the system, you may switch the high
beams on or off using the multifunction
switch. Automatic control will resume
when conditions are correct.
Note: Modification of the vehicle ride
height such as using much larger tires,
may degrade feature performance.
A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to decide
when to switch the high beams off and on.
Once the system is active, the high beams
will switch on if:
• the ambient light level is low enough
• there is no traffic in front of the vehicle
• the vehicle speed is greater than
25 mph (40 km/h)
The high beams will switch off if:
• the system detects the headlamps of
an approaching vehicle or the tail
lamps of a preceding vehicle.
• vehicle speed falls below 16 mph
(25 km/h)
79
MKZ (CC9)
Lighting
• the ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required
• the system detects severe rain, snow
or fog
• the camera is blocked
Activating the System
Switch on the system using the information
display and autolamps. See Information
Displays (page 97). See Autolamps
(page 77).
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position.
Manually Overriding the System
E169254
When the automatic control has activated
the high beams, pushing or pulling the
stalk will provide a temporary override to
low beam.
Use the information display menu to
permanently deactivate the system, or turn
the lighting control switch from autolamps
to headlamps.
FRONT FOG LAMPS (IF EQUIPPED)
E142453
Press the control to switch the fog lamps
on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
Off and the high beams are not on.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This
provides more visibility when driving
around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps
B. With adaptive headlamps
80
MKZ (CC9)
Lighting
E161714
B
A
The system will only work with the lighting
control switch in the autolamp position.
E142451
Note: There is a delay of two to five
seconds before the system will operate
when the vehicle is driven.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system has a power-up movement
check feature. When the vehicle is started,
the lamps track left to right, then back to
center to alert the driver that the system
is working properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E162681
Push the lever up or down to use the
direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make
the direction indicators flash three times
to indicate a lane change.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps will switch on when one of the
following conditions have been met:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You touch switch A on the front interior
lamp.
81
MKZ (CC9)
Lighting
Front Interior Lamp
Note: The front interior lamp switches are
on the overhead console. The exact
location of each switch on the overhead
console depends upon which roof,
sunroof, and window shade features are
equipped on the vehicle.
Note: Touch switch C to switch the door
function off when you open any door. The
indicator lamp will illuminate amber when
the door function is off. When the door
function is off and you open a door, the
courtesy and door lamps will stay off.
Touch switch C again to switch the door
function back on. The indicator lamp will
illuminate white when the door function is
on. When the door function is on and you
open a door, the courtesy and door lamps
will switch on.
E167127
A
B C D
D
All lamps on switchA
Door function switchB
All lamps off switchC
Map lamp switchesD
Rear Interior Lamp
E150100
The rear interior lamps are hidden in the
headliner. You can switch individual rear
interior lamps on independently by waving
your hand near the small white light in the
headliner.
82
MKZ (CC9)
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNINGS
Do not leave children unattended in
your vehicle and do not let them play
with the power windows. They may
seriously injure themselves.
When closing the power windows,
you should verify they are free of
obstructions and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
window openings.
Note: Window operation may stop or
delay during low battery conditions and
engine re-cranking. It will resume after the
engine starts.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows are open. Lower
the opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It will reverse some distance if
there is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING
When you override the bounce-back
feature, the window will not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal
injury or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within
two seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window will
travel up with no bounce-back protection.
The window will stop if you release the
switch before the window closes fully.
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It will illuminate when
you lock the rear window controls.
83
MKZ (CC9)
Windows and Mirrors
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND
CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this
feature in the information display or see
an authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 97).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows and
vent the moonroof. Release the button
once movement starts. Press the lock or
unlock button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING
When closing the windows and
moonroof, you should verify they are
free of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof, press
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors when your
vehicle is moving.
E144073
Left-hand mirrorA
Adjustment controlB
Right-hand mirrorC
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control will illuminate.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.
84
MKZ (CC9)
Windows and Mirrors
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to
its original position.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
126).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 133).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver’s exterior mirror will
automatically dim when the interior
auto-dimming mirror is activated.
Signal Indicator Mirrors
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing will blink when the turn signal is
activated.
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING
Objects in the blind spot mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They are
designed to increase your visibility along
the side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you intend
to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear and
carefully change lanes.
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image will
transition from the main mirror and begin
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle will
transition to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).
85
MKZ (CC9)
Windows and Mirrors
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
205).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirror when your
vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass
of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or
other petroleum or ammonia-based
cleaning products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a
second pivot point. This lets you move the
mirror head up or down and from side to
side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the
front and back of the mirror. Mirror
performance may be affected. A rear
center passenger or raised rear center
head restraint may also block light from
reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a
clear view when backing up.
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
SUN SHADES (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: Do not try to move the sun shade
manually.
The power rear sun shade covers the rear
window of the vehicle.
86
MKZ (CC9)
Windows and Mirrors
E145986
The control is in the overhead console.
The sun shade has a one-touch up and
down feature. Press and release the
control to move the sun shade. To stop
motion, press the control a second time.
The sun shade automatically retracts when
you shift the transmission into R (Reverse).
MOONROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Do not let children play with the
moonroof or leave them unattended
in the vehicle. They may seriously hurt
themselves.
When closing the moonroof, you
should verify that it is free of
obstructions and make sure that children
and pets are not in the proximity of the
roof opening.
You can open the sliding shade manually
when the moonroof is in its closed
position. Pull the shade toward the front
of the vehicle to close it.
The moonroof controls are on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop the
motion during a one-touch operation,
touch the control a second time.
E144499
OpenA
VentB
CloseC
Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Touch (A) to open the moonroof. It will stop
short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Touch (A) again
to fully open the moonroof.
Touch (C) to close the moonroof.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof will stop automatically and
reverse some distance if an obstacle is
detected while closing.
Touch and hold (C) within two seconds of
a bounce-back event to override this
function.
Venting the Moonroof
Touch (B) to vent the moonroof. Touch (C)
to close it.
87
MKZ (CC9)
Windows and Mirrors
Retractable Panoramic Roof (If Equipped)
The moonroof controls on the overhead
console operate the same except the
moonroof will open fully when you touch
the open control.
Automatic Glass Movement
When the retractable panoramic roof is
open, it will automatically move to a
position less than full open under certain
vehicle conditions. This helps to reduce
wind noise. If the glass is between this
position and full open and your vehicle
reaches a high speed, the glass will
automatically move to the defined position.
You can override automatic movement by
touching the moonroof open or close
control. The feature will remain overridden
until you switch the ignition off and then
back on.
Power Sunscreen
The power sunscreen covers the
panoramic roof glass. The sunscreen
control is in the overhead console.
E173113
The sunscreen has a one-touch open and
close feature. Push the control to move
the sunscreen. To stop motion, press the
control a second time.
The sunscreen must be open before
opening the moonroof. If you press the
control while the sunscreen is in its closed
position, the sunscreen will open first
followed by the moonroof. If both the
sunscreen and moonroof are open and
you touch the moonroof close control, the
moonroof will close first followed by the
sunscreen.
88
MKZ (CC9)
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E151261
Left Information DisplayA
SpeedometerB
Right Information Display See General Information (page 313).C
Left Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. It registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.
Fuel Economy
See Common Displays below. For
additional menu options. See General
Information (page 97).
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 97).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 97).
89
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
Right Information Display
Efficiency Leaves
Efficiency leaves indicate short term
driving efficiency. The more leaves and
vines that are displayed, the better your
fuel economy. Leaves and vines will
occasionally appear and disappear to
indicate a change in driving efficiency.
Note: The efficiency leaves display can
be impacted by your use of brakes,
accelerator and accessories, as well as
environmental conditions such as hills and
weather.
Flowers
Flowers appear on the efficiency leaves
screen in addition to the leaves and vines.
The flowers indicate long term driving
efficiency. The more flowers that are
displayed, the more efficiently you have
driven. Once earned, the flowers will
remain unless reset. The flowers can be
reset through the information display. See
General Information (page 97).
Common Displays
Fuel Economy Displays:
Displays your average and instantaneous
fuel economy on most Display Mode
screens.
Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls. Average fuel economy cannot
be reset while on the MyView screen.
• Average Fuel Economy - is
continuously averaged since the last
reset. You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the
OK button on the left hand steering
wheel controls.
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy - If your
instantaneous fuel economy is greater
than the maximum value displayed, a
+ sign will be shown next to the
maximum scale number. When the
vehicle is operating on battery power
only, EV is displayed and the gauge fill
is shown in blue.
Battery Gauge:
Note: Battery gauge information can be
individually selected on or off through
Battery Display in the Options sub-menu.
From any main display a right arrow press
on the steering wheel controls will take
you to the options sub-menu.
The high-voltage battery gauge appears
on the right side of the left information
display screen. This provides Charge Fill
(State of Charge), Charge Assist and
Regen Display.
Charge Fill
The fill level, or State of Charge indicates
the amount of energy stored in the
high-voltage battery as a percent of total
energy capacity. The level will increase or
decrease as the battery charges and
discharges during normal operation.
90
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
Charge Assist
The up and down arrows provide
information about the energy going into
and out of the high-voltage battery. The
up arrow above the battery indicates
battery charging such as from regenerative
braking. The down arrow below the battery
indicates battery discharging to provide
power for propulsion or vehicle
accessories.
Regen Display
When stepping on the brake pedal, a
circular arrow symbol appears in the
center of the Battery Gauge when energy
is being recaptured through the
regenerative braking system.
Fuel Gauge:
The fuel gauge will indicate approximately
how much fuel is left in the fuel tank. The
fuel gauge may vary slightly when your
vehicle is moving or on a gradient. The
arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol
indicates on which side of the vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
Brake Coach Display:
The Brake Coach appears after the vehicle
has come to a stop. It coaches you to
brake in a manner which maximizes the
amount of energy returned through the
regenerative braking system. The percent
displayed is an indication of the
regenerative braking efficiency with 100%
representing the maximum amount of
energy recovery.
Trip Summary:
Trip Summary is displayed upon shutting
off your vehicle. The data is calculated
over the last on and off cycle.
• Distance - The total distance traveled,
distance traveled on battery power
only (EV distance) and Regen distance
are displayed. Regen distance is the
estimated range gained from energy
recaptured through regenerative
braking.
• Fuel Use - The average fuel economy
and total fuel used are displayed.
• Brake Score - The average percentage
of braking energy recaptured and
returned to the high voltage battery
through regenerative braking.
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and
indicators will alert you to a vehicle
condition that may become serious. Some
lamps light when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp but do not light
when you start your vehicle.
91
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in: See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 192).
On (white light): Lights when you turn the
adaptive cruise control system on. Turns
off when you turn the speed control
system off.
Engaged (green light): Lights when the
adaptive cruise control system engages.
Turns off when the speed control system
disengages.
Anti-Lock Braking System
If it lights when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. You
will continue to have the normal
braking system (without Anti-lock braking
system) unless the brake system warning
lamp also lights. Have an authorized dealer
check the system.
Battery
If it lights while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have an authorized dealer
check the system immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
Lights when you switch this
feature off or with a blind spot
message. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 192). See
Information Messages (page 109).
Brake System
E144522
Lights when you engage the
parking brake with the ignition
on.
If it lights when you are driving, check that
the parking brake is not on. If the parking
brake is not on, this Brake System lamp
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have an authorized
dealer check the system immediately.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle with the warning
lamp on is dangerous. A significant
decrease in braking performance may
occur. It will take you longer to stop your
vehicle. Have an authorized dealer check
the system immediately. Driving extended
distances with the parking brake engaged
can cause brake failure and the risk of
personal injury.
Cruise Control (If Equipped)
E71340
Lights when you switch on
cruise control.
Direction Indicator
Lights when the left or right turn
signal or the hazard warning
flasher is switched on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for
a burned-out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 264).
Door Ajar
Lights when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
92
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
Electric Park Brake
E146190
Lights or flashes when the
electric parking brake
malfunctions.
Engine or Motor Coolant
Temperature
Lights when the engine or motor
cooling system is overheating.
Stop your vehicle in a safe place
and have an authorized dealer check the
system.
Engine Oil
If it lights with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction. Stop
your vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so
and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 254).
Note: Do not resume your trip if it lights,
even if the oil level is correct. Have an
authorized dealer check the system
immediately.
Fasten Safety Belt
Lights and a chime sounds to
remind you to fasten your safety
belt. See Safety Belt Minder
(page 35).
Front Airbag
Lights when you start your
vehicle. If it continues to flash or
remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have an authorized dealer
check the system.
Grade Assist (If Equipped)
E144523
Lights when you switch on the
grade assist function.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights appears on
the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. To make sure the display works,
it will also appear momentarily when you
start your vehicle .
High Beam
Lights when you switch on the
high-beam headlamps. Flashes
when you use the headlamp
flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Lights when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)
E144813
Lights when you activate the
lane keeping system.
Low Fuel Level
Lights when the fuel level is low
or the fuel tank is nearly empty.
Refuel as soon as possible.
93
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
Low Tire Pressure Warning
Lights when your tire pressure
is low. If the lamp remains on
with the engine running or when
driving, check your tire pressure as soon
as possible.
To confirm the lamp is working, it will also
light momentarily when you switch on the
ignition. If it does not light when you switch
the ignition on, or it begins to flash at any
time, have an authorized dealer check the
system.
Low Washer Fluid
E132353
Lights when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
Parking Lamps
Lights when you switch on the
parking lamps.
Powertrain Fault
Lights when your vehicle detects
a powertrain fault. Contact an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Note: If your vehicle detects certain faults,
it will not allow you to operate the
accelerator pedal. If this happens, press
the brake pedal and release it. This will
activate limp home vehicle operation. In
limp home vehicle operation, your vehicle
will accelerate in a controlled manner up
to a maximum speed of 35 mph (56 km/h)
on a flat surface. If you apply the brake
pedal or move the transmission to neutral
(N) you can override your vehicle’s
acceleration.
Ready to Drive
E144692
Lights when you switch on your
vehicle and it is ready to drive.
A corresponding message may
display stating ready to drive, or if you
have not entered a charge point, you may
get a message regarding budget.
Service Engine Soon
If the service engine soon
indicator light stays illuminated
after the engine is started, it
indicates that the On Board Diagnostics
system (OBD) has detected a malfunction
of the vehicle emissions control system.
Refer to On board diagnostics (OBD) in the
Fuel and Refueling chapter for more
information about servicing your vehicle.
See Emission Control System (page 164).
If the light is blinking, the engine is
misfiring. This could damage your catalytic
converter. Drive in a moderate fashion
(avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
serviced immediately.
94
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
Note: If your engine is misfiring, excessive
exhaust temperatures could damage the
catalytic converter or other vehicle
components.
The service engine soon indicator lights
when the you first switch on your vehicle,
prior to engine start, to check the bulb and
to indicate whether the vehicle is ready
for inspection maintenance testing.
Normally, the service engine soon light
will stay on until the engine cranks, then
turn itself off if no malfunctions are
present. However, if after 15 seconds the
service engine soon light blinks eight
times, it means that the vehicle is not
ready for inspection maintenance testing.
See Emission Control System (page 164).
Stability Control
E138639
Flashes when the system is
active. If it stays lit or does not
light when you switch on the
ignition, this indicates a malfunction.
During a malfunction the system will switch
off. Have an authorized dealer check the
system immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 181).
Stability Control Off
Lights when you switch the
system off. It will go out when
you switch the system back on
or when you switch off the ignition. See
Using Stability Control (page 181).
Stop Safely
E144693
Lights if your vehicle has an
electrical component fault or
failure that will cause your
vehicle to shutdown or enter into a limited
operating mode. You may also see a
message.
Trunk Ajar
E159323
Lights when the ignition is on
and the trunk is not completely
closed.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime
Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition
with it in the off or accessory position.
Keyless Warning Alert (If Equipped)
Sounds the horn twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key,
after the last door is closed and your
keyless vehicle is in RUN, indicating your
vehicle is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from
the ignition and open the driver's door and
you have left the headlamps or parking
lamps on.
95
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer
immediately.
96
MKZ (CC9)
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving
Various systems on your vehicle can be
controlled using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information is displayed in
the information display.
Information Display Controls
E146303
• Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
E144639
Display Mode
E138660
Trip 1 & 2
E144640
Fuel Economy
E144642
Information
E100023
Settings
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories, and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category.
Press the left arrow key as needed to exit
back to the main menu.
97
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Display Mode
E144639
Use the up or down arrow
buttons to choose between the
following display options.
Note: The cluster will remember the menu
level 2 state when the individual key state
is changed from the RUN position to the
OFF position.
Display Mode
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
——Instantaneous FuelVehicle Range
(Estimated Range +
Battery Gauge + Fuel
Gauge)
Apply to all screens?
Yes / No
Regen ActiveBattery Display
Charge Assist
Charge Level
Help
——Help
——Instantaneous FuelInform
(Avg Fuel Economy +
Battery Gauge + Fuel
Gauge)
Apply to all screens?
Yes / No
Regen ActiveBattery Display
Charge Assist
Charge Level
Help
——Help
——Instantaneous FuelEnlighten
(Power + Avg Fuel
Economy + Battery
Gauge + Fuel Gauge)
Apply to all screens?
Yes / No
Regen ActiveBattery Display
Charge Assist
Charge Level
Help
——Help
——Instantaneous FuelEngage
98
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Display Mode
(Split Power + Avg Fuel
Economy + Battery
Gauge + Fuel Gauge)
Apply to all screens?
Yes / No
Regen ActiveBattery Display
Charge Assist
Charge Level
Help
——Help
——Instantaneous FuelEmpower
(Power (with engine
on/off threshold) + Avg
Fuel Economy +
Battery Gauge + Fuel
Gauge)
Apply to all screens?
Yes / No
Regen ActiveBattery Display
Charge Assist
Charge Level
Help
——Help
Vehicle RangeVehicle RangeChange MyViewMyView
(MyView + Battery
Gauge + Fuel Gauge)
Avg FuelAvg Fuel
Inst. FuelPower
Coolant TempSplit Power
Accessory PowerPower + Threshold
Trip 1Tach rpm x 1000
Trip 2Accessory Power
Fuel HistoryTrip 1
CoachTrip 2
Average SpeedFuel History
99
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Display Mode (cont'd)
BlankCoachChange MyView
(cont'd)
MyView (cont'd)
(MyView + Battery Gauge
+ Fuel Gauge)
—Blank
Apply to all
screens?
Regen ActiveBattery Display
Charge Assist
Yes / No
Charge Level
Help
——Help
Vehicle Range
Indicates the estimated distance the
vehicle will travel with the energy currently
available. For Hybrid, the vehicle range
estimate is based on the fuel remaining in
the gasoline tank. For Energi, the total
estimated range equals the range
available in Hybrid Mode fueled by
gasoline, plus the electric range available
in Plug-in Power Mode. Changes in driving
pattern may cause the values to vary.
Inform
Inform shows the fuel level, battery display
and average fuel economy, with options
available for the Battery Display and an
Instantaneous Fuel Economy gauge. When
the vehicle is operating on battery power
only with the engine off, EV is displayed.
Enlighten
Enlighten displays power demand in
addition to the typical information and
options from Inform. The Instantaneous
Fuel Economy gauge will be displayed by
default. When the vehicle is operating on
battery power only with the engine off, EV
is displayed and the gauge fill is shown in
blue. When both the engine and high
voltage battery are providing power the
gauge fill is white.
Engage
Engage replaces the power demand
gauge from Enlighten with separate
gauges for engine power and high voltage
battery power. The engine power gauge
fill is white and the high voltage battery
power gauge fill is blue. When the vehicle
is operating on battery power only with
the engine off, EV is displayed.
100
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Empower
Empower adds an engine on/off threshold
to the power demand gauge from
Enlighten. The threshold is shown as a
blue double outline. The gauge is
designed to show you how close you are
to the gasoline engine on/off threshold
and how much power you are requesting
based on how far you press the
accelerator pedal.
When power demand is below the
threshold the vehicle is operating on
battery power only with the engine off, EV
is displayed and the gauge fill is shown in
blue.
When power demand exceeds the
threshold both the engine and the high
voltage battery provide power and the
gauge fill is white.
When power demand surpasses the amber
indicator, this level of demand and
associated fuel economy are shown in
amber.
Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls.
MyView
You can choose what to display in this
view. Selecting Change MyView in the
options menu allows you to scroll through
two columns of content choices.
• Press the up or down arrow to view
content.
• Use the right and left arrows to move
between the left column content and
the middle column content.
• The right column is reserved for the
Battery Gauge and the Fuel Gauge.
Once you have your desired content
showing in each column then press OK to
save. This becomes your new MyView
screen.
Unique content available in MyView:
• Accessory Power— Indicates electrical
power demands from your vehicle’s
accessory systems. Accessories use
power but do not contribute to
propelling the vehicle. The gauge
separately displays power demand in
kilowatts (kW) for climate and other
accessories.
Climate includes the power being used by
high voltage climate control components
such as the electric A/C compressor and
the electric heater (Energi vehicles only)
Other includes all power being used by
the low voltage accessories (cabin fans,
headlights, heated seats, etc.).
• Coolant Temp – Indicates engine
coolant temperature. At normal
operating temperature, the level
indicator will be white and will be in
the normal range (between H and C).
If the engine coolant temperature
exceeds the normal range, the level
indicator will change to red to indicate
that the engine is overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible,
turn off the vehicle and let the engine
cool.
101
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
The thermometer indicator next to the
gauge will illuminate in blue or white to
indicate the following:
• Blue thermometer - This indicates that
the hybrid system is not warm enough
to allow EV operation. The gasoline
engine will typically run continuously
when the indicator is blue.
Note: During silent key start mode, the
thermometer indicator will be blue, but the
gasoline engine will not run. This is the
result of the vehicle computer allowing the
engine to be cooler during the silent key
start period. This is normal operation and
does not indicate a problem with your
vehicle. After the first engine start the
indicator will turn white when the gasoline
engine is warm enough to turn off.
• White thermometer - This indicates that
the hybrid system is warm enough to
allow EV operation. If the vehicle
operates on battery power long
enough, it is possible that the gasoline
engine may need to run to keep the
system warm. In this case, the
thermometer indicator will revert back
to blue.
• Tach rpm x 1000 — When the gasoline
engine is running, the tachometer
gauge displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (RPM). When
the vehicle is operating on battery
power only with the engine off, EV is
displayed and the tachometer is
greyed out.
Note: The trip data, and average fuel
economy cannot be reset in MyView.
Trip 1 & 2
E138660
Use the arrow buttons to choose
between the following.
Note: Pressing OK resets the trip data.
Trip 1 & 2
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
——StandardTrip 1 & Trip 2: Trip
Data+Battery
Gauge+Fuel Gauge
——
——
——Enhanced
——
Apply to all screens?Regen ActiveBattery Display-
Yes / No
Charge Assist
102
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2
Charge Level
Help
——Help
Standard - Elapsed trip time, Trip distance and EV distance
• Elapsed trip time — timer stops when the vehicle is turned off and restarts when the
vehicle is restarted.
• Trip distance — shows the accumulated trip distance.
• EV distance — shows the distance traveled while operating on battery power only
with the engine off.
Enhanced - Standard options plus, Average fuel economy, Estimated amount of fuel
consumed
• Average fuel economy — shows the average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Estimated amount of fuel consumed — shows the amount of fuel used for a given
trip.
Fuel Economy
E144640
Use the arrow buttons to choose
the desired energy display.
Fuel Economy
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
—1, 2, 6 min. IntervalsInterval TimeFuel History
(Instantaneous Fuel
Economy + Fuel
Economy History +
Avg Fuel Economy +
Battery Gauge +
Fuel Gauge)
Apply to all screens?
Yes / No
Regen ActiveBattery Display
Charge Assist
Charge Level
Help
——Help
Apply to all screens?Regen ActiveBattery DisplayCoach
103
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Fuel Economy
(Coach + Battery
Gauge+ Fuel Gauge)
Charge Assist Yes / No
Charge Level
Help
——Help
• Fuel History: This view from left to right starts with the instantaneous fuel economy
gauge and adds historical fuel economy data. The data is represented as an average
for time intervals of either 1, 2 or 6 minutes, with the left most interval being the most
recent. Total time for the 5 intervals is shown at the bottom of the view. Intervals
shown in grey color are from the previous drive.
Note: You can reset your average fuel economy by pressing and holding the OK button
on the left hand steering wheel controls.
• Coach: This view provides a comparison of your recent Acceleration, Braking and
Cruising behavior to what is recommended for most efficient use of energy under
present conditions. The horizontal bars fill from left to right with best behavior (and
Blue color) shown as at least half full. When the bars are less than half full, the color
is Amber, suggesting that a change in behavior is needed to achieve better energy
efficiency.
Note: Fuel economy is not always a measure of appropriate driving behavior. For
example, when driving uphill and maintaining an appropriate speed, your instant fuel
economy may not be good (losing leaves) but the Coach may show a blue bar for
Acceleration or Cruising.
Info
E144642
In this mode, you can view
different vehicle system
information and perform a
system check.
104
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Information
Displays a number of different system tutorials. Use
the up or down arrows to scroll through the tutorials.
Then press OK to view.
TutorialWarnings
Displays the associated driver alert graphic.Driver Alert
MyKeys (Number of MyKeys programmed)MyKey
MyKey Miles (km) (Distance traveled using a
programmed MyKey)
Admin Keys (Number of admin keys)
All active warnings will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different based upon
equipment options and current vehicle status. Use the
up or down arrow buttons to scroll through the list.
System
Check
Settings
E100023
In this mode, you can configure
different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.
Settings
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
—On or OffTraction ControlDriver Assist
—Sport, Normal or ComfortDrive Control
—On (default on key cycle)
or Off
Blindspot
High, Normal or
Low
SensitivityCollision Warn
—Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
—On (default on key cycle)
or Off
Cross Traffic
105
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
—On or OffECO CruiseDriver Assist
(cont’d)
—On or OffDriver Alert
Alert, Aid or Alert +
Aid
ModeLane keeping Sys
High, Normal or
Low
Intensity
—On or OffEV + Mode
—On (default on key cycle)
or Off
Front Park Aid
—On (default on key cycle)
or Off
Rear Park Aid
—On (default on key cycle)
or Off
Auto Engine OffVehicle
—On or OffEasy Entry / Exit
On or OffAdaptive HeadlampsLighting
On or OffAuto Highbeam
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
On or OffDRL
Settings (cont’d)
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
On or OffAutolockLocksVehicle (cont’d)
On or OffAutounlock
On or OffMislock
106
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
All doors or Driver
door
Remote Unlocking
Hold Ok to InitializeNeutral Tow
Set to XXX %Oil Life Reset
Enable switch or Disable switchPower Deck Lid
Settings (cont’d)
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
Auto or Last
Settings
Heater – A/CClimate
Control
Remote StartVehicle
(cont’d)
Auto or OffSteering Wheel
Auto or OffFront Defrost
Auto or OffRear Defrost
Auto or OffDriver Seat
Auto or OffPassenger Seat
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
On or OffQuiet Start
Enable or DisableSystem
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Settings (cont’d)
Menu level 5Menu level 4Menu level 3Menu level 2
—On or OffSwitch InhibitVehicle (cont’d)
—Select number of yearsTire Mobility Kit
On or OffRemote OpenWindows
107
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Settings (cont’d)
On or OffRemote Close
On or OffCourtesy WipeWipers
On or OffRain Sensing
—Hold OK to Create
MyKey
Create MyKeyMyKey
—Always On or User
Selectable
911 Assist
—Always On or User
Selectable
Traction Control
—Choose desired speed
or off
Max Speed
—Choose desired speed
or off
Speed Minder
—On or OffVolume Limiter
—On or OffDo Not Disturb
—Hold OK to Clear All
MyKeys
Clear MyKeys
—Select the desired
language
LanguageDisplay
Select the desired
units of measure
DistanceUnits
Fahrenheit (°F) or
Celsius (°C)
Temperature
—On or OffBrake Coach
Display
—Hold OK to ResetDriving History
108
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E145981
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages will
be removed automatically after a short
time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Active Park Fault
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page
192).
Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction
Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise
cannot function properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 192).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available
Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar
visibility due to bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar.
Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using
Adaptive Cruise Control (page 192).
Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.Cruise Control Auto-
matic Braking Turned Off
109
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC
from engaging.
Front Sensor Not
Aligned
Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls
to the driver.
Adaptive Cruise - Driver
Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the
adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Speed
Too Low to Activate
Displays when the vehicle speed is getting too low for
adaptive cruise.
Adaptive Cruise Shift
Down
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Service AdvanceTrac
Displayed when the traction control has been disabled or
enabled by the driver.
AdvanceTrac Off On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a
blocked sensor.
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger
Seat
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthor-
ized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm (page 68).
Vehicle Alarm to Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle
110
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds
Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase fuel
economy.
Engine Shut Off for Fuel
Economy
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off. You
can press OK on the left steering wheel button to override
the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds Press Ok to
Override
Battery and Charging System (12 volt)
ActionMessage
Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
Displayed when the battery management system detects an
extended low-voltage condition. Various vehicle features will
be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many
of the electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system
voltage. If the system voltage has recovered, the disabled
features will operate again as normal
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off
Displayed when the battery management system determines
that the battery is at a low state of charge. Turn the ignition
off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message
will clear once the vehicle has been started and the battery
state of charge has recovered. Turning off unnecessary
electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge
recovery.
Turn Power Off to Save
Battery
Battery and Charging System (High Voltage)
ActionMessage
Displays when the vehicle is ready to drive.Ready to Drive
111
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 205).
Blindspot Not Available
Sensor Blocked See
Manual
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 205).
Cross Traffic Vehicle
Coming From X
Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. See Blind
Spot Information System (page 205).
Cross Traffic Not Avail-
able Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Cross Traffic System
Fault
Collision Warning System
ActionMessage
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli-
sion warning system. The system will be disabled. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning
Malfunction
Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked
because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/
mud/water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the colli-
sion warning system. The system will be disabled. Contact
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Collision Warning Not
Available
112
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and
the vehicle is moving.
X Door Ajar
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely
closed.
Trunk Ajar
Displays when the hood is not completely closed.Hood ajar
Displays when the door switches have been disabled.Switches Inhibited
Security Mode
Displays when there is a system malfunction with the child
locks. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Child Lock Malfunction
Service Required
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been
reset. See Keyless Entry (page 63).
Factory Keypad Code
XXXXX
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning
Rest Now
Take a rest break soon.Driver Alert Warning
Rest Suggested
Fuel
ActionMessage
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
113
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your
authorized dealer. See Hill Start Assist (page 177).
Hill Start Assist Not
Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the
vehicle.
Press Brake to START
Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See Using
Adaptive Cruise Control (page 192).
No Key Detected
Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off
the engine and an Intelligent Access key is not detected
inside the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is
Needed
Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
This message is displayed when there is a problem with your
vehicle’s starting system. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Starting System Fault
Displayed during spare key programming, when an Intelligent
Access key is programmed to the system.
Key Program Successful
Displayed during spare key programming, when an Intelligent
Access key has failed to be programmed.
Key Program Failure
Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum
number of keys have been programmed.
Max Number of Keys
Learned
Displayed during spare key programming when not enough
keys have been programmed.
Not Enough Keys
Learned
114
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as
soon as possible.
Key Battery Low Replace
Soon
Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key
using two existing MyKeys.
Could Not Program
Integrated Key
Displayed as a reminder that the engine is on.Engine On
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.
Front Camera Tempor-
arily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the wind-
shield to be cleaned to operate properly.
Front Camera Low
Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Front Camera Malfunc-
tion Service Required
Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their
hands on the steering wheel.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel
115
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on with your engine running, contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
LOW Engine Oil Pres-
sure
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 255).
Change Engine Oil Soon
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 255).
Oil Change Required
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system
should be inspected immediately. See Brake Fluid Check
(page 260).
Brake Fluid Level LOW
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the
vehicle in a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively
high. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Overtem-
perature
Displays when the motor electronics are overheating. Stop
the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the vehicle
and let it cool. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Motor Coolant Overtem-
perature
Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to
help reduce high coolant temperatures.
Power Reduced to
Lower Engine Temp
Displayed when the kit needs service. See your authorized
dealer.
Service Tire Mobility Kit
Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport or
Factory mode. This may not allow some features to operate
properly. See your authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory
Mode
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to
a powertrain malfunction.
See Manual
116
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be
programmed.
MyKey Not Created
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive
Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and
the MyKey speed limit is on.
Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit
is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/
h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit
is reached.
Vehicle at Top Speed of
MyKey Setting
Displays when MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive
Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is activ-
ated.
AdvanceTrac On -
MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is
activated.
Traction Control On -
MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated.MyKey Park Aid Cannot
Be Deactivated
Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey
settings.
Lane Keeping Alert On
MyKey Setting
117
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Parking
Aid (page 182).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays when the system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact your authorized dealer. See Parking
Aid (page 182).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
Displays when the parking brake is set, the engine is running
and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the
warning stays on after the parking brake is released, contact
your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Engaged
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition
that requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction
Service Now
Displays when the electric parking brake is not set.Park Brake Not Applied
Displays when the electric parking brake is running a
diagnostic check.
Park Brake Maintenance
Mode
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not
been released.
Park Brake Use Switch
to Release
Displays when the electric parking brake is set but has not
been released and the vehicle is moving.
Press Brake to Release
Park Brake and switch
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that
requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited
Function Service
Required
Displays when the electric parking brake was not released
causing it to overheat.
Park Brake System
Overheated
118
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the electric parking brake is set and the vehicle
is started.
Release Park Brake
Displays when the electric parking brake is set.Park Brake Applied
Displays when the electric parking brake is released.Park Brake Released
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. See your authorized dealer.
Steering Fault Service
Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle
a safe place. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Loss Stop
Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault
Service Required
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to turn the key on to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.
To Drive: Turn Key to On
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and the gear shift
button to drive the vehicle after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button
Seats
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available
while driving.
Memory Recall Not
Permitted While Driving
Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.Memory X Saved
119
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the
brake.
Press Brake to Start
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in
attempting to start the vehicle.
Cranking Time
Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending
Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low
tire pressure. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page
296).
LOW Tire Pressure
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is
malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or continues to come
on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 296).
Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or
your spare tire is in use. For more information on how the
system operates under these conditions, See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 296). If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault
120
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays when the traction control system has been switched
off or on. See Using Traction Control (page 179).
Traction Control Off / On
Displays when a spinout has occurred and the hazard are
activated.
Spinout Detected
Hazards Activated
Transmission
ActionMessage
See your authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunc-
tion Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in
a safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Over-
heating Stop Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in
a safe place as soon as it’s possible.
Transmission Overtem-
perature Stop Safely
See your authorized dealer.Transmission Service
Required
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake
Displays when the transmission has overheated and has
limited functionality. See Automatic Transmission (page 170).
Transmission Limited
Function See Manual
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you
drive.
Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait
Displays as a reminder to shift into park.Transmission Not in Park
Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift
strategy.
Transmission Adjusted
Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission Adapt
Mode
Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and
unable to select gears.
Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup On
121
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and
free to select gears.
Transmission Indicate
Mode Lockup Off
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
Displays to request the operator to apply the brake as needed
by the transmission.
Press Brake Pedal
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to
enable the transmission to shift from park.
Depress Brake to Shift
from Park
Displays when the neutral button N needs to be pressed
again to enter neutral hold. See Automatic Transmission
(page 170).
Press N again to Enter
Stay in Neutral Mode
Displays when neutral hold is active. See Automatic Trans-
mission (page 170).
Stay in Neutral Mode
Engaged
Displays when neutral hold is active. See General Information
(page 97).
Stay in Neutral Tow
Engaged See Manual to
Disable
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake
needs to be depressed before exiting the vehicle. See your
authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the
Vehicle
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake
needs to be depressed before exiting the vehicle. See your
authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Cannot Shift Trans Use
Park Brake to Secure
Vehicle
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Service Required
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is
shifting to park. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is
shifting to reverse. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT
Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
122
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
ActionMessage
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive
Unavailable Select L for
Drive Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT
Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Low
Unavailable Service
Required
Displays when neutral tow is active and the ignition needs
to be turned off. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels
(page 222).
Neutral Tow Engaged
Turn Ignition Off for
Towing
Displays while attempting to exit neutral tow. The brake pedal
needs to be depressed and park button selected to deac-
tivate. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 222).
Neutral Tow Engaged
Depress Brake and
Select Park to Exit
Neutral Tow
Displays when neutral tow is active and the park brake needs
to be released. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels
(page 222).
Neutral Tow Remove
Park Brake for Towing
Displays when neutral tow has been deactivated.Neutral Tow Disengaged
123
MKZ (CC9)
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 323).
E146320
Driver temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air
temperature for the driver side of the vehicle. This control also adjusts the
passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged.
A
Fan speed control: Press on either side of the fan icon to increase or decrease
the volume of air circulated in your vehicle.
B
Passenger temperature controls: Press + or - to increase or decrease the air
temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle.
C
Power: Press to turn the system on and off. When the system is off, outside air
cannot enter the vehicle.
D
Recirculated air: Press the button to switch between outside air and recirculated
air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates and the air currently
in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce the time needed
to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off automatically in all airflow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of fogging.
E
A/C: Press the button to turn on or turn off the air conditioning system. To
improve air conditioning when starting your vehicle, drive with the windows
slightly open for two to three minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and efficiency.
F
124
MKZ (CC9)
Climate Control
MAX A/C: Press the button to switch on. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning automatically adjusts to the highest
speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool position. This re-cooling
of the interior is more economical and efficient.
G
AUTO: Press the button to switch on. Recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning automatically adjusts to the highest
speed and the temperature dial returns to the full cool position. This re-cooling
of the interior is more economical and efficient.
H
Heated rear window: Turns the heated rear window on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page 126).
I
Defrost: Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents and de-mister
vents. You can also use this setting to defog and clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.
J
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air
may cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of
the air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves
from the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Do not adjust the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold.
The system automatically adjusts to the
previously stored settings. For the system
to function efficiently, the instrument panel
and side air vents should be fully open.
Note: At low ambient temperatures with
AUTO selected, the system directs air
toward the windshield and side windows
for as long as the engine remains cold.
Note: When you switch the system off,
outside air cannot enter your vehicle.
Note: When the system is in AUTO mode,
and the interior and exterior temperatures
are high, the system automatically selects
recirculated air to maximize cooling of the
interior. When the system reaches the
selected air temperature, it automatically
switches to outside air.
125
MKZ (CC9)
Climate Control
Note: When you select windshield
defrosting and defogging, the instrument
panel and footwell level functions
automatically switch off and air
conditioning switches on. Outside air flows
into your vehicle.
Heating the Interior Quickly
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Cooling the Interior Quickly
1. Press the MAX A/C button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Adjust the temperature to a
comfortable setting.
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather
1. Press the defrost button.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.
HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Heated Rear Window
Note: You must switch the ignition on to
use this feature.
Press the button to clear the rear window
of thin ice and fog. Press the button again
within 10 minutes to switch it off. It
switches off automatically after 10 minutes,
or when you switch the ignition off.
Do not use razor blades or other sharp
objects to clean the inside of the rear
window or to remove decals from the
inside of the rear window. This may
cause damage to the heated grid lines,
which your warranty does not cover.
Heated Exterior Mirror
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or attempt to readjust the
mirror glass if it has frozen in place. These
actions could cause damage to the glass
and mirrors.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass
of any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or
other petroleum-based cleaning products.
Both heated mirrors remove ice, mist and
fog when you switch on the heated rear
window.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter. It is located behind the glove box.
126
MKZ (CC9)
Climate Control
The particulate filtration system reduces
the concentration of airborne particles
such as dust, spores and pollen in the air
supplied to the interior of your vehicle.
Note: To prevent foreign objects from
entering the system, make sure the cabin
air is in place at all times. Running the
system without a filter in place could result
in degradation or damage to the system.
The particulate filtration system gives you
and your passengers the following
benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 412).
For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.
REMOTE START
The climate control system adjusts the
cabin temperature during remote start.
You cannot adjust the system during
remote start operation. Turn the ignition
on to return the system to its previous
settings. You can now make adjustments.
You need to turn certain
vehicle-dependent features back on, such
as:
• heated seats
• cooled seats
• heated steering wheel
• heated mirrors
• heated rear window.
You can adjust the settings using the
information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 97).
Automatic Settings
You can set the climate control to operate
in AUTO mode through the information
display setting: Remote Start > Climate
Control > Heater-A/C > Auto. The climate
control system automatically sets the
interior temperature to 72°F (22°C).
In hot weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). Cooled seats are set to high (if
available, and selected to AUTO in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated/cooled seats do not
automatically turn on.
In cold weather, the system is set to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats and heated
steering wheel are set to high (if available,
and selected to AUTO in the information
display). The rear defroster and heated
mirrors automatically turn on.
Last Settings
You can set the climate control to operate
using the last climate control settings
through the information display setting:
Remote Start > Climate Control >
Heater–A/C > Last Settings. The climate
control system automatically uses the
settings last selected before turning off
the vehicle.
127
MKZ (CC9)
Climate Control
Heated and Cooled Devices
The climate control system controls other
heated and cooled devices inside the
vehicle. These devices (if available and
selected to AUTO in the information
displays) may switch on during remote
start. Heated devices typically switch on
during cold weather, and cooled devices
during hot weather.
128
MKZ (CC9)
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNINGS
Sitting improperly, out of position or
with the seat back reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always
sit upright against your seat back, with
your feet on the floor.
Do not recline the seat back as this
can cause the occupant to slide
under the safety belt, resulting in serious
injury in the event of a crash.
Do not place objects higher than the
seat back to reduce the risk of
serious injury in the event of a crash or
during heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and air bags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seat back more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 inches
(25 centimeters) between your
breastbone and the air bag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNINGS
Fully adjust the head restraint before
you sit in or operate your vehicle.
This will help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. Do not adjust
the head restraint when your vehicle is
moving.
129
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
WARNINGS
The head restraint is a safety device.
Whenever possible it should be
installed and properly adjusted when the
seat is occupied.
Install the head restraint properly to
help minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible. Make
sure that you remain comfortable. If you
are extremely tall, adjust the head
restraint to its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
Rear seat outboard head restraints
E153105
Rear center head restraint
E138645
The head restraints consist of:
an energy absorbing head
restraint
A
two steel stemsB
guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button
C
guide sleeve unlock and remove
button
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
130
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide
sleeves and push the head restraint down
until it locks.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front head restraints have a tilting
feature for extra comfort. To tilt the head
restraint, do the following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it
forward again will then release it to the
rearward, untilted position.
POWER SEATS
WARNINGS
Do not adjust the front seat or seat
back when your vehicle is moving.
Do not place cargo or any objects
behind the seat back before
returning it to the original position.
131
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
E144632
Power Lumbar
E165608
Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The massage system will turn off
after 20 minutes.
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any
selection to activate. The seatback and
cushion massage cannot function at the
same time.
E156301
132
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
Lumbar and bolster modeMassage mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity
adjustment
A
Lumbar decreaseMassage intensity decrease
and off
1
B
Lower lumbar
2
Cushion massage intensity
adjustment
C
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
1
The massage feature will default to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster feature will default to the
middle lumbar mode.
2
Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through
the touch screen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function. To access and
make adjustments to the lumbar setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Lo or Hi.
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNINGS
Before activating the seat memory,
make sure that the area immediately
surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.
Do not use the memory function
when your vehicle is moving.
This feature will automatically recall the
position of the driver's seat, power mirrors
and optional power steering column. The
memory control is located on the driver’s
door.
133
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
E142554
Saving a Pre-Set Position
1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the seat, exterior mirrors and
power steering column to your desired
position.
3. Press and hold the desired pre-set
button until you hear a single chime.
Up to three pre-set memory positions may
be saved. A memory pre-set may be saved
at any time.
Recalling a Pre-Set Position
Press and release the pre-set button
associated with your desired driving
position. The seat, mirrors and steering
column will move to the position stored
for that pre-set.
Note: A pre-set memory position can only
be recalled when the ignition is off, or
when the transmission selector lever is in
position P or N (and your vehicle is not
moving) if the ignition is on.
A pre-set memory position can also be
recalled by pressing the unlock button on
your remote control or intelligent access
key if it is linked to a pre-set position.
Linking a Pre-Set Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key
Your vehicle can save the pre-set memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
1. With the ignition on, move the memory
positions to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired pre-set
button for about five seconds. A chime
will sound after about two seconds.
Continue holding until a second chime
is heard.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: To stop seat movement during a
recall, press any driver seat adjustment
control, any of the memory buttons, or any
mirror control switch.
Seat movement will also stop if you move
your vehicle.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or IA key is in range, the memory
function will move to the settings of the
first key stored.
Easy Entry and Exit Function
If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to five
centimeters when the transmission
selector lever is in position P and you
remove the key or the keyless start ignition
is turned off.
134
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
The driver seat will return to the previous
position when you put the key in the
ignition or the keyless start ignition is
activated.
You can turn off the easy entry and exit
feature by using the driver information
display.
REAR SEATS
Note: Your vehicle may have split
seatbacks that you must fold individually.
Note: Make sure the center safety belt is
unbuckled before folding the seatback.
To lower the seat back(s) from inside the
vehicle, do the following:
E144634
1. Pull the handle to release the
seatback.
2. Push the seatback forward.
E164098
3. Stow the safety belt in the stowage
clip. This will prevent the safety belt
from getting caught in the seat latch.
When raising the seat back(s), make sure
you hear the seat latch into place.
HEATED SEATS
Front Seats
135
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
WARNING
People who are unable to feel pain
to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the heated seat. The
heated seat may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion. This may cause
the heated seat to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles or
other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
Warmer settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
Rear Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING
Persons who are unable to feel pain
to the skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or cushion, because this may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles, or
other pointed objects because this may
damage the heating element which may
cause the seat heater to overheat. An
overheated seat may cause serious
personal injury.
Note: Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
The heated seats only operate when the
ignition is on.
E146322
136
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
• Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and
off. Warmer settings are indicated by
more indicator lights.
• Press again to deactivate.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch
to enable heating mode. When activated,
they will turn off automatically when you
turn the engine off.
VENTILATED SEATS (IF EQUIPPED)
The ventilated seats will only function
when the engine is running.
E146309
To operate the ventilated seats:
Press the ventilated seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and
off. Cooler settings are indicated by more
indicator lights.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while
the ventilated seats are on, the feature will
turn itself off and you will need to
reactivate it.
Heated and ventilated seat air filter
replacement (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is
not needed.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder. To open the storage lid,
pull up on the latch located between the
cupholders.
Armrest pass-through
Note: Do not exceed 80 pounds (36
kilograms) of weight on the pass-through
door.
137
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
E152622
Release the latch, then pull down on the
door located in the back of the armrest.
You can store cargo of a longer length
such as skis or lumber.
138
MKZ (CC9)
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
(If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not use the system with any
garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not
program the system with the vehicle in the
garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons
for security reasons. See Erasing the
function button codes later in this section.
Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any
of the three devices after it has been
initially programmed, you must first erase
the current settings. See Erasing the
function button codes later in this section.
E142657
The universal garage door opener
replaces the common hand-held garage
door opener with a three-button
transmitter that is integrated into the
driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. As well as being programmed for
garage doors, the system transmitter can
be programmed to operate entry gate
operators, security systems, entry door
locks and home or office lighting.
Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-vehicle programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
139
MKZ (CC9)
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of
the garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 inches (2–8
centimeters) away from the HomeLink
button you want to program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously,
press and hold the desired HomeLink
button and the hand-held transmitter
button. DO NOT release either one
until the HomeLink indicator light
flashes slowly and then rapidly. When
the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapid
flashing indicates successful training.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for five seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage
door does not operate, watch the
HomeLink indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. See
Programming your garage door motor
later in this section.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed
yet. Do the following:
Press and hold the HomeLink button while
you press and release the hand-held
transmitter button every 2 seconds. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly once the HomeLink
function button recognizes and accepts
the hand-held transmitter’s radio
frequency signal.
After programming the HomeLink button,
begin programming your garage door
opener motor.
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the
cover or lamp lens on your garage door
opener.
E142659
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming your garage door opener
motor
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
140
MKZ (CC9)
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 20 seconds until the
indicator lights above the buttons flash
rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons
are erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously
trained button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash
after 20 seconds. Without releasing
the button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the
transmitter into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on
the hand-held transmitter for 10
seconds. The indicator light will
change from green to red and green.
141
MKZ (CC9)
Universal Garage Door Opener
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 inches
(2–8 centimeters) of the button on the
visor you want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the
visor will flash rapidly when the
programming is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit
for up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does
not program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again.
If the Genie transmitter indicator light
displays green and red, release the button
until the indicator light turns off before
pressing the button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must
be changed out of program mode. To do
this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds.
The indicator light will change from red
to red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the
indicator light will turn green.
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access
the garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until
both blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will
flash.
Note: The next two steps must be
completed in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator
lights on the garage door opener
motor unit should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
142
MKZ (CC9)
Universal Garage Door Opener
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at
which time both buttons should be
released. Programming has now been
erased, and the indicator light should blink
slowly to indicate the device is in train
mode when any of the three HomeLink
buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device
not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’ s authority to operate the equipment.
143
MKZ (CC9)
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING
Do not plug optional electrical
accessories into the cigar lighter
socket (if equipped). Improper use of the
lighter can cause damage not covered by
your warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will discharge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
Note: Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
will damage the outlet and blow the fuse.
Note: Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts
or a fuse may blow.
Note: Do not use the power point for
operating a cigar lighter element.
Note: Improper use of the power point can
cause damage not covered by your
warranty.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point. To prevent the battery from
discharging accidentally:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your
vehicle for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• in the front of the center console
• inside the center console storage bin
• on the rear of the center console.
110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)
WARNING
Do not keep electrical devices
plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt
AC power point, since it will defeat the
safety protection design. Doing so my
cause the power point to overload due to
powering multiple devices that can reach
beyond the 150 watt load limit and could
result in fire or serious injury.
Note: Keep the vehicle running to use the
power point.
E143941
You can use the power point for powering
electrical devices that require up to 150
watts. It is on the rear of the center
console.
144
MKZ (CC9)
Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light, located on the
power point, is:
• on — power point is ready to supply
power.
• off — power point power supply is off;
ignition is not on.
• flashing — power point is in fault mode.
The power point temporarily turns off
power if it exceeds the 150 watt limit. It
can also switch to a fault mode if it detects
overloading, overheating, or shorting
conditions. For overloading and shorting
conditions, unplug your device and switch
the ignition off then on. For an overheating
condition, let the system cool off first.
Switch the ignition off then on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode ray tube type televisions
• Motor loads, for example vacuum
cleaners, electric saws and other
electric power tools, or
compressor-driven refrigerators
• Measuring devices which process
precise data, for example medical
equipment or measuring equipment
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply, for
example microcomputer-controlled
electric blankets or touch sensor lamps
145
MKZ (CC9)
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cupholder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or collisions,
including hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E146582
Front storage bin with auxiliary
power point
A
CupholdersB
Storage compartment with
auxiliary power point and media
hub
C
Auxiliary power point, 110 volt
AC power point
D
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E75193
Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.
146
MKZ (CC9)
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNINGS
Extended idling at high engine
speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
Do not park, idle or drive your
vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
Do not start the engine in a closed
garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the
engine.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 miles
(8 kilometers) after you reconnect it. This
is because the engine management
system must realign itself with the engine.
You can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.
Ignition Modes
E164319
147
MKZ (CC9)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
• Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode,
or when the engine is running but
the vehicle is not moving.
• On: All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
• Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine
may not start when the vehicle starts.
• Press the brake pedal, and then
press the button for any length of
time. An indicator light on the
button illuminates when then
ignition is on and when the engine
starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When the engine starts for the first time
on your drive, the idle speed increases,
this helps to warm up the engine. If the
engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked
by an authorized dealer.
Before starting the vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in P .
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
Note: The green ready indicator
illuminates letting you know that the
vehicle is ready for driving. Since your
vehicle is equipped with a silent key start,
the engine may not start at the time of the
vehicle start. See Hybrid Electric Vehicle
(page 152).
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do
the following:
E155835
1. Remove the rubber covering (A) in the
cupholder. Place the remote in the
backup slot (B) at the bottom of the
cupholder.
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the START button to
switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
148
MKZ (CC9)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart the engine within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if a valid key is not
present.
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired,
you can no longer restart the vehicle
without the key present inside your
vehicle.
Once the vehicle has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If
you open and close a door while the
vehicle is running, the system searches
for a valid key. You cannot restart the
engine if the system does not detect a
valid key within 20 seconds.
Automatic Shutdown
This feature automatically shuts down the
vehicle if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before the vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, the
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that the vehicle has shut down
in order to save fuel. Start your vehicle as
you normally do.
Automatic Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at
the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of
the following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on (for the current ignition cycle
only). Use the information display to
do so. See Information Displays
(page 97).
• During the countdown before
shutdown, you are prompted to press
OK or RESET (depending on your type
of information display) to temporarily
switch the feature off (for the current
ignition cycle only).
Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is
Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
149
MKZ (CC9)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is
Moving
WARNING
Switching off the engine when the
vehicle is still moving will result in a
loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, warning lamps
and indicators may also be off.
1. Put the transmission in position N and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to
a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, put
the transmission in position P.
3. Press and hold the button for one
second, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING
If you smell exhaust fumes inside
your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and the leave the
engine idling for long periods of time, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 inch (2.5
centimeters)
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Failure to follow engine block heater
instructions could result in property
damage or serious personal injury.
Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.
150
MKZ (CC9)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension
cord that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association (CSA).
This extension cord must be suitable
for use outdoors, in cold temperatures,
and be clearly marked Suitable for Use
with Outdoor Appliances. Do not use
an indoor extension cord outdoors.
This could result in an electric shock
or become a fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged
and properly stowed before driving
your vehicle. Make sure the protective
cover seals the prongs of the block
heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system
does not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after approximately
three hours of operation. Using the heater
longer than three hours does not improve
system performance and unnecessarily
uses electricity.
151
MKZ (CC9)
Starting and Stopping the Engine
HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE
This hybrid vehicle combines electric and
gasoline propulsion to provide
performance and efficiency. It requires no
special fuels and you never have to plug
it in.
Note: You may notice higher engine
speeds upon start-up. This temporary
condition is normal and necessary to heat
up the cabin and minimize emissions.
E144692
Starting: Switch the ignition on
while your transmission selector
is in position P. The green ready
indicator light will appear in the instrument
cluster, letting you know that the vehicle
is ready for driving.
The engine may not start because this
vehicle is equipped with silent key start.
This fuel saving feature allows your vehicle
to be ready to drive without requiring the
gas engine to be running. This indicator
will remain on while the vehicle is on,
whether the engine is running or not to
indicate the vehicle is capable of
movement (using its electric motor, engine,
or both). Typically, the engine will not start
unless the vehicle is cold, you make a
climate control change, or you press the
accelerator.
Driving: The gas engine automatically
starts and stops to provide power when
needed and to save fuel when not needed.
While coasting at low speeds, coming to
a stop, or standing, the gas engine
normally shuts down and the vehicle
operates in electric-only mode. Conditions
that may cause the engine to start up or
remain running include:
• Considerable vehicle acceleration
• Vehicle speed above 85 mph (137
km/h) However, the maximum speed
for electric–only operation may be
lower while driving in hot temperatures
or on hilly terrain.
• Ascending a hill
• Charge level of high voltage battery is
low
• Very high or low outside temperature
(to provide system cooling or heating)
• Engine not warm enough to provide
passenger requested cabin
temperature.
Stopping: The gas engine may shut off to
conserve fuel as you come to a stop.
Restarting the vehicle is not required.
Simply step on the accelerator when you
are ready to drive.
Transmission Operation: Due to the
technologically advanced,
electronically-controlled continuously
variable transaxle, you will not feel shift
changes like those of a non-hybrid vehicle.
Note: Since engine speed is controlled by
the transmission, it may seem elevated at
times. This is normal hybrid operation and
helps deliver fuel efficiency and
performance.
Neutral: It is not recommended to idle the
vehicle in position N for an extended
period of time because this will discharge
your high voltage battery and decrease
fuel economy. The engine will not start,
and cannot provide power to the hybrid
system in position N.
152
MKZ (CC9)
Unique Driving Characteristics
Low Gear: Low gear (position L) is
designed to mimic the enhanced engine
braking available in non-hybrid vehicles.
Low gear will produce high engine speeds
to provide necessary engine braking. This
is normal and will not damage your vehicle.
In low gear, the gas engine will remain on
more often than in position D.
Unique Hybrid Operating Characteristics
Your vehicle behaves differently compared
to a non-hybrid. Here is a description of
the major differences:
Battery: Your Hybrid is equipped with a
high voltage battery. A cool battery
ensures battery life and provides the best
possible performance. Your hybrid high
voltage battery may periodically
re-condition itself to ensure maximum
efficiency. You may notice slight changes
in driveability during this process, but it is
an important part of your hybrid's high
voltage battery optimization features.
Cabin air cools the high voltage battery by
pulling air through vents in the rear
package tray. Avoid placing objects on the
package tray which could block air flow
through the vents.
If you leave your vehicle inoperative for
over 31 days, it may be necessary to
jumpstart the vehicle. See Roadside
Emergencies (page 225).
Engine: The engine speed in your hybrid
is not directly tied to your vehicle speed.
Your vehicle's engine and transmission
are designed to deliver the power you
need at the most efficient engine speed.
During heavy accelerations, your hybrid
may reach high engine speeds (up to
6000 RPM).
In prolonged mountainous driving, you
may see the engine tachometer changing
without your input. This is intentional and
maintains the battery charge level. You
may also notice during extended downhill
driving that your engine continues to run
instead of shutting off.
During this engine braking, the engine
stays on, but it is not using any fuel. You
may also hear a slight whine or whistle
when operating your vehicle. This is the
normal operation of the electric generator
in the hybrid system.
During certain events (such as vehicle
servicing) your low voltage 12-volt battery
may become disconnected or disabled.
Once the battery is reconnected and after
driving the vehicle, the engine may
continue to operate for three to five
seconds after the key is turned to off. This
is a normal condition.
Braking: Your hybrid is equipped with
standard hydraulic braking and
regenerative braking. Regenerative
braking is performed by your transmission
and it captures brake energy and stores
it in your high voltage battery.
Driving to optimize fuel economy
Note: Having your engine running is not
always an indication of inefficiency. In
some cases, it is actually more efficient
than driving in electric mode.
Your fuel economy should improve
throughout your hybrid's break-in period.
As with any vehicle, your driving habits
and accessory usage can significantly
impact your fuel economy. For best results,
keep in mind these tips:
153
MKZ (CC9)
Unique Driving Characteristics
• Keep the tires properly inflated and
only use the recommended size.
• Aggressive driving increases the
amount of energy required to move
your vehicle. In general, you can
achieve better fuel economy with mild
to moderate acceleration and
deceleration. Moderate braking is
particularly important since it allows
you to maximize the energy captured
by the regenerative braking system.
Additional Tips:
• Do not carry extra loads.
• Be mindful of adding external
accessories that may increase
aerodynamic drag.
• Observe posted speed limits.
• Perform all scheduled maintenance.
• There is no need to wait for your
engine to warm up. The vehicle is
ready to drive immediately after
starting.
EV+ Mode
Your vehicle will recognize your frequent
destinations and allow for more EV driving
as you approach them. For example, when
nearing your home it should be easier to
stay in electric mode. The EV indicator will
display EV+ when this mode is active. You
should see this about 1/8 mile (200 meters)
from a frequent destination. See
Information Displays (page 97).
Note: Frequent destinations are learned
by your vehicle after two to four weeks of
use. You can clear these destinations with
a Driving History reset through the
Settings menu.
Note: The EV+ feature can be turned on
or off through the Driver Assist section of
the Settings menu.
154
MKZ (CC9)
Unique Driving Characteristics
Frequently asked questions
AnswerQuestion
The high voltage battery is electrically
isolated from the rest of the vehicle when
the key is off. When you turn the key to on,
high voltage contactors inside the battery
are closed to make the electricity available
to the motor/generator and enable the
vehicle to drive. The clicks are the sound
of these contactors as they close and open
during start up and shut down.
What are the series of clicks from the cargo
area when I first turn the key in the ignition?
The vehicle's computer will determine if an
engine start is required at key-on. Silent
key start will start the engine if it is neces-
sary for cabin heating, windshield defrost,
or if the outside temperature is low.
Why does the engine sometimes start at
key-on?
There are several reasons the engine stays
on for an extended amount of time when
you first start it. One common reason is to
ensure that the emissions components are
warm enough to minimize tailpipe emis-
sions. As the climate gets cooler, this
engine-on time is extended.
Why does it take a long time before the
engine shuts down?
The engine is required to turn on above
this speed to protect the transmission
hardware.
Why does my engine never shut down
above 85 mph (137 km/h)?
In order to ensure that the climate control
system can begin heating the cabin or
defrosting the windshield as soon as a
driver requests it, the engine coolant
temperature has to be kept sufficiently hot.
Keeping the engine on is required to
maintain the correct minimum temperature.
Why does my engine stay on when it is
extremely cold outside?
155
MKZ (CC9)
Unique Driving Characteristics
AnswerQuestion
Your vehicle's engine and transmission are
designed to deliver the power you need at
the most efficient engine speed. This may
be higher than expected during heavy
accelerations, and may fluctuate during
steady state driving. These are character-
istics of the Atkinson engine cycle and the
transmission technology that help maximize
your hybrid's fuel economy.
Why does my engine rev up so high
sometimes when I accelerate?
The fan noise comes from a fan located
outside the high voltage battery. This fan
turns on when the battery requires cooling
air. The fan speed, and associated noise
level, will change according to the amount
of cooling required to maintain good
performance. Maintaining the battery
temperature at optimal conditions also
prolongs the useful life of the battery and
helps to achieve better fuel economy.
What is the fan noise I hear from the rear
of my hybrid?
Running out of gas is not recommended.
However, you may be able to go about one
mile, driving at 30 mph (48 km/h), if the
battery has a normal state of charge.
How far can I go in Electric Drive if I run out
of gas?
Change the engine oil every 10000 miles
(16000 km) under normal operating condi-
tions. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
412).
What is the engine oil change service
interval?
Your hybrid vehicle can use E15 (15%
ethanol, 85% gasoline) fuel, but you may
notice slightly reduced fuel economy
because ethanol contains less energy per
gallon than gasoline. Your hybrid vehicle
is not designed to use E85 (85% ethanol).
Can I put E15 or E85 in my vehicle, and how
will it affect my fuel economy?
156
MKZ (CC9)
Unique Driving Characteristics
AnswerQuestion
The high voltage battery system is
designed to last the life of the vehicle and
requires no maintenance.
How long will my high voltage battery last?
Does it need maintenance?
There are no provisions for charging the
high voltage battery from a power supply
external to the vehicle.
Can you charge the battery with a plug into
an A/C outlet?
Yes. Your hybrid vehicle can be flat towed
without modification. See Towing (page
221).
Can I tow the hybrid behind my motor
home with all four wheels down?
157
MKZ (CC9)
Unique Driving Characteristics
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNINGS
Do not overfill the fuel tank. The
pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door (Easy Fuel capless
fuel system), do not refuel until the sound
stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out,
which could cause serious personal injury.
Automotive fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or
mishandled.
The flow of fuel through a fuel pump
nozzle can produce static electricity,
which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped
into an ungrounded fuel container.
Fuel ethanol and gasoline may
contain benzene, which is a
cancer-causing agent.
When refueling always shut the
engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the filler neck. Never
smoke or use a cell phone while refueling.
Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under
certain conditions. Avoid inhaling excess
fumes.
Observe the following guidelines when
handling automotive fuel:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always turn off the vehicle before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel such as
gasoline is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed,
call a physician immediately, even if
no symptoms are immediately
apparent. The toxic effects of fuel may
not be visible for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling too
much fuel vapor of any kind can lead
to eye and respiratory tract irritation.
In severe cases, excessive or
prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can
cause serious illness and permanent
injury.
• Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes.
If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove
contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper
medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
• Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If fuel is splashed on
the skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
wash skin thoroughly with soap and
water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes
skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
“Antabuse” or other forms of disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing gasoline vapors, or skin
contact could cause an adverse
reaction. In sensitive individuals,
158
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
serious personal injury or sickness may
result. If fuel is splashed on the skin,
promptly wash skin thoroughly with
soap and water. Consult a physician
immediately if you experience an
adverse reaction.
FUEL QUALITY
Note: We recommend that you use only
high quality fuel without additives or other
engine treatments.
Choosing the Right Fuel
Note: Use of any fuel other than those
recommended may cause powertrain
damage, a loss of vehicle performance
and repairs may not be covered under
warranty.
If your vehicle is not a flexible fuel vehicle,
then only use unleaded fuel or unleaded
fuel blended with a maximum of 15%
ethanol. Do not use fuel ethanol (E85),
diesel fuel, fuel methanol, leaded fuel or
any other fuel because it could damage
or impair the emission control system.
The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law.
Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel
or fuel additives with metallic compounds,
including manganese-based additives.
Octane Recommendations
Regular unleaded gasoline with a pump
(R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 is
recommended. Some fuel stations offer
fuels posted as regular with an octane
rating below 87, particularly in high altitude
areas. Fuels with octane levels below 87
are not recommended. Premium fuel will
provide improved performance and is
recommended for severe duty use such
as trailer tow.
Do not be concerned if your engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if it
knocks heavily while you are using fuel
with the recommended octane rating, see
your authorized dealer to prevent any
engine damage.
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
vehicle components.
If you have run out of fuel:
• To start the vehicle with a keyless
ignition, just start the engine. Crank
time will be longer than usual.
• Normally, adding 1 gallon (3.8 liters) of
fuel is enough to restart the vehicle. If
the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep
grade, more than 1 gallon (3.8 liters)
may be required.
• The service engine soon indicator may
come on.
159
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNINGS
Do not insert the nozzle of portable
fuel containers or aftermarket
funnels into the capless fuel system. This
could damage the fuel system and its seal,
and may cause fuel to run onto the ground
instead of filling the tank, which could
result in serious personal injury.
WARNINGS
Do not try to pry open or push open
the capless fuel system with foreign
objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels; they
will not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it. The included funnel
has been specially designed to work
safely with your vehicle.
When filling the vehicle’s fuel tank from a
portable fuel container, use the funnel
included with the vehicle.
E163066
The funnel is located in the rear of the
vehicle, inside the load compartment,
underneath the load floor carpet and is
accessible from the trunk.
1. Locate the portable funnel that comes
with your vehicle.
160
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
E157279
2. Slowly insert the funnel into the
capless fuel system.
E157280
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel from the
portable fuel container.
4. When done, clean the funnel or
properly dispose of it. Extra funnels
can be purchased from your
authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNINGS
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel
fire can cause severe injuries.
Read and follow all the instructions
on the pump island.
WARNINGS
Switch off your engine when you are
refueling.
Do not smoke if you are near fuel or
refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames and smoking
materials away from fuel.
Stay outside your vehicle and do not
leave the fuel pump unattended
when refueling your vehicle. This is against
the law in some places.
Keep children away from the fuel
pump; never let children pump fuel.
Do not use personal electronic
devices while refueling.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up when filling
an ungrounded fuel container:
• Place approved fuel container on the
ground.
• Do not fill a fuel container while it is in
your vehicle (including the cargo area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container while filling.
• Do not use a device that would hold
the fuel pump handle in the fill position.
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System
WARNING
The fuel system may be under
pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler door, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.
161
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
When fueling your vehicle:
1. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
E166527
2. Press the center-rear edge of the fuel
filler door and release to open.
E156032
Note: Hold the handle of the fuel filler
nozzle higher while you insert the nozzle
for easier access.
3. Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully
into the fuel system to open both
doors. Leave the nozzle fully inserted
until you have stopped pumping fuel.
E154765
Note: Allow about five to ten seconds after
pumping fuel before removing the fuel
filler nozzle. This allows residual fuel to
drain back into the fuel tank and not spill
onto the vehicle.
4. After you have stopped pumping fuel,
slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle.
Note: A fuel spillage concern may occur
if overfilling the fuel tank. Do not overfill
the tank to the point that the fuel is able
to bypass the fuel filler nozzle. The
overfilled fuel may run down the drain
located below and in front of the fuel filler
door.
5. To close the fuel filler door, press the
center-rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release. The fuel door will
latch closed.
If the fuel fill inlet did not close properly, a
Check Fuel Fill Inlet message may appear
on the instrument cluster.
At the next opportunity, do the following:
1. Safely pull off the road.
2. Put the vehicle in position P and switch
the ignition off.
3. Open the fuel filler door and remove
any visible debris from the fuel fill
opening.
162
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
4. Insert the fuel fill nozzle, or the fuel fill
funnel provided with the vehicle,
several times to allow the inlet to close
properly. This will dislodge any debris
preventing the inlet from sealing.
If this action corrects the problem, the
message may not reset immediately. It
may take several driving cycles for the
message to turn off. A driving cycle
consists of an engine start-up (after four
or more hours with the engine off) followed
by city or highway driving. Continuing to
drive with the message on may cause the
service engine soon lamp to turn on as
well.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Note: The amount of usable fuel in the
empty reserve varies and should not be
relied upon to increase driving range.
When refueling your vehicle after the fuel
gauge indicates empty, you might not be
able to refuel the full amount of the
advertised capacity of the fuel tank due
to the empty reserve still present in the
tank.
Empty reserve is the amount of fuel
remaining in the tank after the fuel gauge
indicates empty. Do not rely on this fuel
for driving. The usable capacity of the fuel
tank is the amount of fuel that can be put
into the tank after the gauge indicates
empty. The advertised capacity is the total
fuel tank size – it is the combined usable
capacity plus the empty reserve.
Filling the Tank
For consistent results when filling the fuel
tank:
• Turn the ignition off before fueling; an
inaccurate reading results if the engine
is left running.
• Use the same fill rate
(low-medium-high) each time the tank
is filled.
• Allow no more than two automatic
click-offs when filling.
Results are most accurate when the filling
method is consistent.
Calculating Fuel Economy
Do not measure fuel economy during the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers) of driving
(this is your engine’s break-in period); a
more accurate measurement is obtained
after 2000 miles - 3000 miles (3200
kilometers - 4800 kilometers). Also, fuel
expense, frequency of fill ups or fuel
gauge readings are not accurate ways to
measure fuel economy.
1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record
the initial odometer reading.
2. Each time you fill the tank, record the
amount of fuel added.
3. After at least three to five tank fill ups,
fill the fuel tank and record the current
odometer reading.
4. Subtract your initial odometer reading
from the current odometer reading.
5. Calculate fuel economy by dividing
miles traveled by gallons used (For
Metric: Multiply liters used by 100, then
divide by kilometers traveled).
163
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
Keep a record for at least one month and
record the type of driving (city or highway).
This provides an accurate estimate of the
vehicle’s fuel economy under current
driving conditions. Additionally, keeping
records during summer and winter show
how temperature impacts fuel economy.
In general, lower temperatures mean lower
fuel economy.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARNINGS
Do not park, idle, or drive your
vehicle in dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, which can start a fire.
Exhaust leaks may result in entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes
into the passenger compartment. If you
smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your dealer inspect your vehicle
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle is equipped with various
emission control components and a
catalytic converter that will enable your
vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards. To make sure that the
catalytic converter and other emission
control components continue to work
properly:
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high
speeds.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use parts other than Ford, Motorcraft
or Ford-authorized parts for maintenance
replacements, or for service of
components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be the
equivalent to genuine Ford Motor
Company parts in performance and
durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light
or the temperature warning light, fluid
leaks, strange odors, smoke or loss of
engine power could indicate that the
emission control system is not working
properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter
the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes
to your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
164
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal located
on or near the engine. This decal also lists
engine displacement
Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle is equipped with an on-board
diagnostics system (OBD-II) that monitors
the engine’ s emission control system. This
system protects the environment by
ensuring that your vehicle continues to
meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists your authorized
dealer in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator
to illuminate.
Examples of temporary malfunctions are:
• the vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly
• poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly
• the fuel fill inlet may not have been
properly closed See Refueling (page
161).
• driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without
these or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed
city/highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.
If the service engine soon indicator
remains on, have your vehicle serviced at
the first available opportunity. Although
some malfunctions detected by the OBD-II
may not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness, and
lead to more costly repairs.
Readiness for
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state/provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.
If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, you may need to have
the vehicle serviced. See On-Board
Diagnostics (OBD-II).
165
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, your vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’ s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that the vehicle is ready for
I/M testing.
The OBD-II system monitors the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days. If
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
may need to perform the following driving
cycle consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
Drive on an expressway or highway for a
steady 15 minutes, followed by 20 minutes
of stop-and-go driving with at least four
30-second idle periods.
Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours without starting the engine. Then,
start the engine and complete the above
driving cycle. The engine must warm up
to its normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the engine until the
above driving cycle is complete. If the
vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing, you
will have to repeat the above driving cycle.
166
MKZ (CC9)
Fuel and Refueling
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Have the battery pack serviced only
by an authorized electric vehicle
technician. Improper handling can result
in personal injury or death.
Note: The high-voltage battery does not
require regular service maintenance.
Your vehicle consists of various
high-voltage components and wiring. All
of the high-voltage power flows through
specific wiring assemblies labeled as such
or covered with a solid orange convolute,
or orange striped tape, or both. Do not
come in contact with these components.
The high-voltage battery system is a
high-voltage, lithium-ion battery system.
The pack is located in the rear cargo area.
The high-voltage battery system uses an
air-cooled system to regulate the
high-voltage battery temperature and help
maximize high-voltage battery life.
E159505
Note: The high-voltage battery is
equipped with air vents in the package
tray that help to regulate its temperature.
It is important to keep these openings free
of obstructions. Do not block the flow of
cabin air to this area.
HIGH-VOLTAGE SERVICE
DISCONNECT
The high-voltage service disconnect turns
off power from the high-voltage battery.
Note: There is a disconnect circuit in your
vehicle. Disconnecting the circuit will
automatically disable the high-voltage
battery.
To disable the battery and stop all
high-voltage electric activity in the vehicle
you can access the high-voltage
disconnect circuit. To do this, you must
unplug the circuit from the circuit port
connected to the battery.
The service disconnect is equipped with
an outer lever. This is to aid in properly
seating the service disconnect lever.
Remove this to disconnect the
high-voltage service disconnect.
The high-voltage service disconnect is
located behind the rear fold down seats.
167
MKZ (CC9)
High Voltage Battery
Disabling the High-Voltage Battery
E159506
1. Fold down the rear seats.
2. Locate the access door and remove
the plastic cover.
E171513
3. If equipped, remove the outer lever on
the service disconnect. Pull the end of
the lift tab toward the front of the
vehicle.
E147234
4. Slide the handle on the service
disconnect outboard to the right.
E146133
5. Pull the handle toward you and remove
the circuit from the vehicle to disable
the high-voltage battery.
6. Reverse this procedure to reinstall the
high-voltage service disconnect and
the outer lever to the service
disconnect.
Reactivating the High-Voltage Battery
Note: If you have manually disconnected
your high-voltage shut off circuit, you will
need to reconnect the circuit before you
can reactivate it. The vehicle will detect if
the electrical system is safe and reactivate
automatically.
168
MKZ (CC9)
High Voltage Battery
HIGH VOLTAGE BATTERY CUT-
OFF SWITCH
The high-voltage shut off operation shuts
off power from the high-voltage battery
after a collision, or if your vehicle receives
a substantial physical jolt.
To reactivate the vehicle after either event
perform the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition on.
3. If the vehicle is not powered after this
sequence, repeat steps 1 and 2.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to turn
ignition off.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
(ignition off).
4. Press the START/STOP button again
to re-enable the vehicle.
Note: After completing this process the
vehicle will detect if the electrical system
is safe and reactivate. Once your vehicle
determines the electrical system safe you
can start your vehicle as you would
normally by pressing the brake in
combination with the START/STOP button.
Note: In the event the vehicle does not
reactivate after the second key cycle,
contact an authorized dealer.
169
MKZ (CC9)
High Voltage Battery
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNINGS
Always set the parking brake fully
and make sure the vehicle is in P
(Park). Turn the ignition off whenever you
leave your vehicle.
Do not apply the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously for
more than three seconds will limit engine
rpm, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Push Button Shift Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
transmission. The shift buttons are located
on the instrument panel, next to the
MyLincoln Touch™ system. The gears are
selected by pressing and releasing the
PRNDL buttons.
P
R
N
D
L
E146131
Every time a gear is selected, the selected
button will light up. You will also see the
gear selected appear in the instrument
cluster.
E152628
Understanding the Positions of your
Electronic Transmission
Note: Always come to a complete stop
before putting your vehicle into and out
of P (Park).
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the button on the
instrument panel of the gear you want
to select.
3. The gear shift button you select will
illuminate and the instrument cluster
will show the selected gear.
4. Release the brake pedal and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
Note: If the driver attempts to leave the
vehicle while it is in gear, the vehicle will
automatically shift into P (Park). Seatbelt
and door monitors determine the driver's
intent and makes the shift for you. During
this time a Transmission not in Park
message will appear in the display screen,
prompting the driver to make the shift. To
put the vehicle in gear with the door open
perform steps 1-4. See the Automatic
Return to Park section in this chapter for
more information on this feature.
170
MKZ (CC9)
Transmission
Note: To put your vehicle in gear with the
door open, perform steps 1-4. See the
Automatic Return to Park section in this
chapter for more information on this
feature.
P (Park)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the front wheels from turning.
Always come to a complete stop before
putting your vehicle into and out of P
(Park). An audible chime will sound when
P (Park) is manually selected.
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle
will automatically shift into P (Park). If the
ignition is turned off while the vehicle is
moving, it will first shift into N (Neutral) until
a slow enough speed is reached. The
vehicle will then shift into P (Park)
automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature will not operate when
the vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or
neutral tow.
Your vehicle has a safety feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into P
(Park) when any of the following
circumstances are met:
• Turn the ignition off
• Open the driver's door with your seat
belt unlatched
• Unlatching your seatbelt while the
driver's door is open
If you turn the ignition off while your
vehicle is moving, your vehicle will first
shift into N (Neutral) until it slows down
enough to shift into P (Park) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended
period of time, (2-15 minutes) before
starting your vehicle, unlatching your
safety belt will cause this feature to
activate, even with the driver's door
closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly
if the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If
your door ajar indicator does not
illuminate when you open the driver’s door
or the indicator illuminates with the driver’s
door closed. See your authorized dealer.
R (Reverse)
With the transmission in R (Reverse), the
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Press the N button to put the vehicle in N
(Neutral). In neutral, the vehicle can be
started and is free to roll. Hold the brake
pedal down while in this position.
Stay in Neutral mode
Stay in Neutral mode allows the vehicle to
stay in N (Neutral) when you exit the
vehicle. The vehicle must be stationary to
enter this mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Press the N (Neutral) button on the
shifter assembly.
2. The message Select N Again to Enter
Stay in Neutral mode will appear in
the information display screen.
3. Press the N (Neutral) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
171
MKZ (CC9)
Transmission
The message Stay in Neutral mode
engaged will appear in the instrument
cluster when the vehicle has entered Stay
in Neutral mode.
Note: During this mode the N button will
flash continuously and the instrument
cluster will display N as the selected gear.
Exiting Stay in Neutral mode
To disable Stay in Neutral mode put the
vehicle in another gear. See the Putting
the Vehicle in Gear section for instructions
on how to do this.
Entering a Carwash
Note: Always put the vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage that may not be covered
by warranty.
D (Drive)
The normal driving position for the best
fuel economy.
D (Drive) with Grade Assist
E144523
The grade assist button is
located on the instrument panel
next the MyLincoln Touch™
system. Press the grade assist button to
activate and deactivate grade assist.
Grade assist:
• Provides additional grade braking with
a combination of engine motoring and
high-voltage battery charging to help
maintain vehicle speed when
descending a grade.
• As the vehicle determines the amount
of engine motoring and high-voltage
battery charging, you may notice the
engine speed increasing and
decreasing to help maintain your
vehicle speed when descending a
grade.
E144523
The grade assist lamp will
appear in the instrument cluster
when grade assist is turned on.
L (Low)
• Provides maximum engine braking.
• The transmission may be put into L
(Low) at any vehicle speed.
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNINGS
Do not drive your vehicle until you
verify that the brake lamps are
working.
When doing this procedure, you will
be taking the vehicle out of park
which means the vehicle can roll freely.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully set the parking brake prior to
doing this procedure. Use wheel chocks
if appropriate.
If the parking brake is fully released,
but the brake warning lamp remains
illuminated, the brakes may not be working
properly. See your authorized dealer.
172
MKZ (CC9)
Transmission
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature will
be disabled.
Note: This feature will only function if your
12-volt battery has power.
Use the brake-shift interlock override
procedure to put the vehicle in gear in the
event of an electrical malfunction or if your
vehicle has a dead battery. The brake shift
interlock override button is located inside
of the center console, below media inputs.
You will need a tool (for example a
screwdriver or similar tool) to access the
button.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
E152215
2. Locate the brake shifter interlock
access slot. The slot is located below
the media hub, in the front of the
center console storage bin and it is not
labeled
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the
media hub.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. When the
instrument panel buttons flash, the
vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held,
press the N (Neutral button) for towing,
or the desired gear to shift from Park.
5. Release the override button.
6. The vehicle will remain in Stay in
Neutral mode for wrecker towing
purposes or can be shifted to the
desired gear and driven (if the vehicle
can be driven).
7. Release the parking brake.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a minute or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur, or the
engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
173
MKZ (CC9)
Transmission
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal.
If a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
If the vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while
braking, have it checked by an authorized
dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Alloy
Wheels (page 272).
E144522
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 91).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash
or standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission selector lever
to position P, switch the engine off and
apply the parking brake. Inspect the
accelerator pedal for any interference. If
none are found and the condition persists,
have your vehicle towed to the nearest
authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake
heavily by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal. Brake assist can reduce
stopping distances in critical situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by
keeping the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily
illuminates when you turn the
ignition on. If the light does not
illuminate during start up, remains on or
flashes, the anti-lock braking system may
be disabled. Have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
E144522
If the system is disabled, normal
braking is still effective. If the
brake warning lamp illuminates
when you release the parking brake, have
your system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Regenerative Braking System
This feature is used to simulate the engine
braking of an internal combustion engine
and assist the standard brake system while
recovering some of the energy of motion
and storing it in the battery to improve fuel
economy. The standard brake system is
designed to fully stop the car if
regenerative braking is not available.
During regenerative braking, the motor is
174
MKZ (CC9)
Brakes
spun as a generator to create electrical
current. This recharges the battery and
slows the vehicle. In effect, once the
accelerator pedal is released, the motor
changes from an energy user to an energy
producer.
When you release the accelerator pedal
or press the brake pedal, the brake
controller automatically detects the
amount of deceleration requested and
optimizes how much of the deceleration
will be produced by regenerative braking.
The remaining portion is generated by
standard friction braking. When the battery
is almost fully charged, the amount of
regenerative braking is limited to avoid
overcharging, and the requested
deceleration is produced by standard
friction braking alone.
Regenerative braking does not take the
place of the standard friction brakes; it only
assists them. Regenerative braking has
also been designed to interact with the
anti-lock brake system. Regenerative
braking is disabled when the anti-lock
brake system is activated or the battery is
fully charged.
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
Note: When the system is operating, the
brake pedal will pulse and may travel
further. Maintain pressure on the brake
pedal. You may also hear a noise from the
system. This is normal.
The anti-lock braking system will not
eliminate the risks when:
• you drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you
• your vehicle is hydroplaning
• you take corners too fast
• the road surface is poor.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
The electric parking brake replaces the
conventional handbrake. The operating
switch is located on the instrument panel
to the left of the steering wheel.
WARNING
Always set the parking brake and
leave your vehicle with the
transmission selector in position P.
Note: When you apply the electric parking
brake in certain conditions, for example
on a steep hill, the electric parking brake
may reapply the brakes within three to ten
minutes.
Note: You may notice various noises when
you apply and release the electric parking
brake. This is normal and no cause for
concern.
Applying the electric parking brake
WARNING
If the brake system warning lamp
does not illuminate or flashes, there
could be a problem with your electric
parking brake. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
175
MKZ (CC9)
Brakes
Note: The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate for ten seconds, if the ignition
is turned off after the electric parking
brake has been applied, or the electric
parking brake has been applied after the
ignition has been turned off.
Note: The electric parking brake will not
automatically apply. You must apply the
electric parking brake using the electric
parking brake switch.
E169085
Pull the switch to apply the electric parking
brake.
The brake system warning lamp will
illuminate to confirm that the electric
parking brake has been applied. See
Information Displays (page 97).
Applying the electric parking brake
when the vehicle is moving
WARNINGS
Applying the electric parking brake
while moving will result in use of the
anti-lock braking system. Do not use the
electric parking brake system when the
vehicle is moving unless the normal brake
system is unable to stop the vehicle.
WARNINGS
With the exception of emergency
conditions (for example, the brake
pedal does not work or is blocked), do not
apply the electric parking brake while the
vehicle is moving. On bends, or poor road
surfaces or weather conditions,
emergency braking can cause the vehicle
to skid out of control or off the road.
If you apply the electric parking brake
when your vehicle is moving, the brake
system warning lamp will illuminate and a
warning chime will sound. See
Information Displays (page 97).
If your vehicle speed is above 4 mph (6
km/h), the braking force is applied as long
as the switch is applied. Release or press
the switch or press the accelerator pedal
to stop the braking force.
Releasing the electric parking brake
E169086
You can release the electric parking brake
either manually by pressing the switch
down or automatically.
176
MKZ (CC9)
Brakes
Manual release
WARNING
If the brake system warning light
remains illuminated or flashes after
you have released the parking brake, there
could be a problem with you braking
system. Have the system checked by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
You can manually release the electric
parking brake by turning the ignition on,
pressing the brake pedal and then
pressing the electric parking brake switch.
When the electric parking brake is
released, the brake system warning lamp
will turn off.
Automatic release - drive away release
Note: You must close the driver's door and
you must fasten the driver's safety belt
before this feature will operate.
Note: If the electric parking brake warning
lamp stays illuminated, the electric parking
brake will not automatically release. You
must release the electric parking brake
using the electric parking brake switch.
Note: The engine must be running and
you must press the accelerator pedal
before the drive away release feature will
operate.
Note: On hybrid vehicles, the vehicle must
be Ready-to-Drive as indicated by the
green Ready indicator light.
The brake system warning lamp will go off
to confirm that the electric parking brake
has been released.
Note: The electric parking brake drive
away release makes starting on a hill
easier. This feature will release the
parking brake automatically when the
vehicle has sufficient drive force to move
up the hill. To assure drive away release
when starting uphill, press the accelerator
pedal quickly.
Battery With No Charge
WARNING
You will not be able to apply or
release the electric parking brake if
the battery is low or has no charge.
If the battery is low or has no charge, use
jumper cables and a booster battery.
HILL START ASSIST
WARNINGS
The system does not replace the
parking brake. When you leave your
vehicle, always apply the parking brake
and put the transmission in park (P).
You must remain in your vehicle
once you have activated the system.
During all times, you are responsible
for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.
If the engine is revved excessively,
or if a malfunction is detected, the
system will be deactivated.
The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without
the need to use the parking brake.
177
MKZ (CC9)
Brakes
When the system is active, your vehicle
will remain stationary on the slope for two
to three seconds after you release the
brake pedal. This allows you time to move
your foot from the brake to the accelerator
pedal. The brakes are released
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient drive to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, (for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space).
The system will activate automatically on
any slope that will cause significant vehicle
rollback.
Using Hill Start Assist
1. Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill. Keep
the brake pedal pressed.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system will activate
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle will remain
on the slope without rolling away for
about two or three seconds. This hold
time will automatically be extended if
you are in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
brakes will release automatically.
178
MKZ (CC9)
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
In certain situations for example, stuck in
snow or mud, turning the traction control
off may be beneficial as this allows the
wheels to spin with full engine power.
Depending on the type of system you have
on your vehicle, you can either turn the
system off using the information display
or by pressing the button.
Switching the System Off Using the
Information Display Controls (If Equipped)
Your vehicle comes with this feature
already enabled. If required, you can
switch this feature off using the information
display controls. See Principle of
Operation (page 179).
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch (If Equipped)
The button is located in the instrument
panel.
Press the button. You will see a message
in conjunction with an illuminated icon in
the display. Press the button again to
return the system to normal mode.
When you switch the traction control
system off, stability control remains fully
active.
System Indicator Lights and
Messages
WARNING
If a failure has been detected within
the AdvanceTrac system, the
stability control light will illuminate steadily.
Verify that the AdvanceTrac system was
not manually disabled through the
information display. If the stability control
light still illuminates steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
AdvanceTrac disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
E138639
The stability control light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and flashes
when a driving condition activates the
stability system.
The stability control off light
temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on
when you turn the traction control system
off.
When you turn the traction control system
off or on, a message appears in the
information display showing system status.
179
MKZ (CC9)
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNINGS
Vehicle modifications involving
braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of the
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the AdvanceTrac system.
In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the AdvanceTrac system.
Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker
as far as possible from the front center
console, the tunnel, and the front seats in
order to minimize the risk of interfering
with the AdvanceTrac sensors. Reducing
the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac
system could lead to an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death.
Remember that even advanced
technology cannot defy the laws of
physics. It’ s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Aggressive driving
on any road condition can cause you to
lose control of your vehicle increasing the
risk of personal injury or property damage.
Activation of the AdvanceTrac system is
an indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the
road; this could reduce the operator’s
ability to control the vehicle potentially
resulting in a loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
If your AdvanceTrac system activates,
SLOW DOWN.
The AdvanceTrac Control system helps
you keep control of your vehicle when on
a slippery surface. The electronic stability
control portion of the system helps avoid
skids and lateral slides. The traction
control system helps avoid drive wheel
spin and loss of traction. See Using
Traction Control (page 179).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without AdvanceTrac
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with AdvanceTrac
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
180
MKZ (CC9)
Stability Control
USING STABILITY CONTROL
AdvanceTrac®
The system automatically activates when
you start your vehicle. The AdvanceTrac
system cannot be completely turned off,
but the electronic stability control system
is disabled when the transmission selector
lever is in position R. You can turn off the
traction control portion of the system
independently. See Using Traction
Control (page 179).
181
MKZ (CC9)
Stability Control
PARKING AID (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
To help avoid personal injury, please
read and understand the limitations
of the system as contained in this section.
Sensing is only an aid for some (generally
large and fixed) objects when moving in
reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds.
Traffic control systems, inclement weather,
air brakes, and external motors and fans
may also affect the function of the sensing
system; this may include reduced
performance or a false activation.
To help avoid personal injury, always
use caution when in R (Reverse) and
when using the sensing system.
This system is not designed to
prevent contact with small or moving
objects. The system is designed to provide
a warning to assist the driver in detecting
large stationary objects to avoid damaging
the vehicle. The system may not detect
smaller objects, particularly those close to
the ground.
Certain add-on devices such as large
trailer hitches, bike or surfboard
racks and any device that may block the
normal detection zone of the system, may
create false beeps.
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can
be affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alarms.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey®, it is possible to prevent turning
the sensing system off. See MyKey™ (page
53).
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of the
bumper area. The system turns on
automatically whenever the ignition is
switched on.
When receiving a detection warning, the
radio volume is reduced to a
predetermined level. After the warning
goes away, the radio volume returns to
the previous level.
The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once the
transmission is shifted into R. See General
Information (page 97).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display and does not allow the driver to
switch the faulted system on. See
Information Messages (page 109).
Rear Sensing System
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in R. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is fewer than 10 inches (25
centimeters) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If a stationary or receding
182
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
object is detected farther than 10 inches
(25 centimeters) from the side of the
vehicle, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.
E130178
A
Coverage area of up to 6 feet (2
meters) from the rear bumper.
There is decreased coverage
area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
A
The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in R:
• and moving toward a stationary object
at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less
• but not moving, and a moving object
is approaching the rear of the vehicle
at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or less
• and moving at a speed of less than 3
mph (5 km/h) and a moving object is
approaching the rear of the vehicle at
a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Front Sensing System
The front sensors are active when the
gearshift is in any position other than P
(Park) or N (Neutral) and the vehicle speed
is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
E130382
A
Coverage area of up to 27
inches (70 centimeters) from the
front of the vehicle and about
6–14 inches (15–35 centimeters)
to the side of the front end of the
vehicle. Refer to the reverse
sensing section for details on
coverage area.
A
The system sounds an audible warning
when obstacles are near either bumper in
the following manner:
• Objects detected by the front sensors
are indicated by a high-pitched tone
from the front radio speakers.
• Objects detected by the rear sensors
are indicated by a lower pitched tone
from the rear radio speakers.
183
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
• The sensing system reports the
obstacle which is closest to the front
or rear of the vehicle. For example, if
an obstacle is 24 inches (60
centimeters) from the front of the
vehicle and, at the same time, an
obstacle is only 16 inches (40
centimeters) from the rear of the
vehicle, the lower pitched tone sounds.
• An alternating warning sounds from
the front and rear if there are objects
at both bumpers that are closer than
10 inches (25 centimeters).
For specific information on the reverse
sensing portion of the system, refer to that
section.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
This system is designed to be a
supplementary park aid. It may not
work in all conditions and is not intended
to replace the driver’s attention and
judgment. The driver is responsible for
avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe
distance and speed, even when the
system is in use.
Note: The driver is always responsible for
controlling the vehicle, supervising the
system and intervening if required.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause disruptive reflections.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic
waves.
The system detects an available parallel
parking space and automatically steers
the vehicle into the space (hands-free)
while you control the accelerator, gearshift
and brakes. The system visually and
audibly instructs you to park the vehicle.
The system may not function correctly if
something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space (i.e. a
pedestrian or cyclist) or if the edge of the
neighboring parked vehicle is high from
the ground (i.e. a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck).
The system should not be used if:
• a foreign object (i.e. bike rack or trailer)
is attached to the front or rear of the
vehicle or at another location close to
the sensors.
• an overhanging object (i.e. surfboard)
is attached to the roof.
• the front bumper or side sensors are
damaged (i.e. in a collision) or
obstructed by a foreign object (i.e. front
bumper cover).
• a mini-spare tire is in use.
Using Active Park Assist
E146186
Press the button located on the
right side of the center stack.
The touch screen displays a message and
a corresponding graphic to indicate it's
searching for a parking space. Use the turn
signal to indicate which side of the vehicle
you want the system to search on.
Note: If the turn signal is not on, the
system automatically searches on the
vehicle's passenger side.
184
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
A
E130107
When a suitable space is found, the touch
screen displays a message and a chime
sounds. Slow down and stop when the
touch screen displays a message and a
chime sounds (at approximately position
A), then follow the instructions on the
touch screen.
Note: You must observe that the selected
space remains clear of obstructions at all
times in the maneuver.
Note: Vehicles with overhanging loads
(e.g. a bus or a truck), street furniture and
other items may not be detected by active
park assist. You must make sure the
selected space is suitable for parking.
Note: The vehicle should be driven as
parallel to other vehicles as possible while
passing a parking space.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space (i.e. if the vehicle
detects multiple spaces while you are
driving, it offers the last one).
Note: If driven above approximately 20
mph (35 km/h), the touch screen shows a
message to alert you to reduce vehicle
speed.
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space
Note: If vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10
km/h), the system switches off and you
need to take full control of the vehicle.
When you shift the transmission into R
(Reverse), with your hands off the wheel
(and nothing obstructing its movement),
the vehicle steers itself into the space.
Instructions to safely move the vehicle
back and forward in the space are
displayed in the touch screen and
indicated by chimes.
185
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
E130108
When you think the vehicle has enough
space in front and behind it, or you hear a
solid tone from the parking aid
(accompanied by a touch screen display
message and a chime), bring the vehicle
to a complete stop.
When automatic steering is finished, the
touch screen displays a message and a
chime sounds, indicating that the active
park assist process is done. The driver is
responsible for checking the parking job
and making any necessary corrections
before putting the transmission in P (Park).
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature
The system can be deactivated manually
by:
• pressing the active park assist button
• grabbing the steering wheel
• driving above approximately 50 mph
(80 km/h) for 30 seconds during an
active park search
• driving above 6 mph (10 km/h) during
automatic steering
• turning off the traction control system.
Certain vehicle conditions can also
deactivate the system, such as:
• Traction control has activated on a
slippery or loose surface.
• There is an anti-lock brake system
activation or failure.
• Something touches the steering wheel.
If a problem occurs with the system, a
warning message is displayed, followed
by a chime. Occasional system messages
may occur in normal operation. For
recurring or frequent system faults, contact
an authorized dealer to have your vehicle
serviced.
Troubleshooting the System
The system does not look for a space
The traction control system may be off
The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space
186
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
The system does not offer a particular space
Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors
There is not enough room on both sides of the vehicle in order to park
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space
The vehicle is farther than 6.5 ft (2.0 m) from the parking space
The vehicle is closer than 16 in. (40 cm) from neighboring parked vehicles
The transmission is in R (Reverse); the vehicle must be moving forward to detect a
parking space
The system does not position the vehicle where I want in the space
The vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the transmission (i.e. rolling forward
when R [Reverse] is selected)
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from aligning the vehicle
properly
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned correctly
The vehicle was pulled too far past the parking space. The system performs best when
you drive the same distance past the parking space
The tires may not be installed or maintained correctly (i.e. not inflated correctly, improper
size, or of different sizes)
A repair or alteration has changed detection capabilities
A parked vehicle has a high attachment (i.e. salt sprayer, snowplow, moving truck bed,
etc.)
The parking space length or position of parked objects changed after your vehicle
passed
The temperature around your vehicle changes quickly (i.e. driving from a heated garage
into the cold, or after leaving a car wash)
187
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
REAR VIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
The rear view camera system is a
reverse aid supplement device that
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
Objects that are close to either
corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
Back up as slow as possible since
higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop the vehicle.
Use caution when using the rear
video camera and the trunk is ajar.
If the trunk is ajar, the camera will be out
of position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled) have
been removed when the trunk is ajar.
Use caution when turning camera
features on or off while in R
(Reverse). Make sure the vehicle is not
moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle. The image will display in either
the rear view mirror or the display in the
center of the instrument panel.
During operation, lines will appear in the
display that represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.
E152548
The camera is located on the trunk near
the high-mount brake lamp.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you
place the transmission in Reverse (R).
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while
reversing in a straight line. This can be
helpful when backing into a parking
space or aligning your vehicle with
another object behind you.
• Centerline (if applicable): Helps align
the center of your vehicle with an
object (trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in Reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment is ajar, no
rear view camera features will display.
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in Reverse (R), have
the system inspected by an authorized
dealer.
188
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
and you might not see some objects. In
some vehicles, the guidelines may
disappear once you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to
damage to the rear of your vehicle.
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the touch screen when the
transmission is not in Reverse (R):
• Menu > Vehicle > Rear View Camera
After changing a system setting, the touch
screen shows a preview of the selected
features.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed
guidelines are only available when the
transmission is in Reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only available with
fixed guidelines. To use active guidelines,
turn the steering wheel to point the
guidelines toward an intended path. If you
change the steering wheel position while
reversing, your vehicle might deviate from
the original intended path.
189
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on your steering wheel
position. When your steering wheel
position is straight, the active guidelines
are not visible.
Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of your vehicle.
Selectable settings for this feature are
ACTIVE + FIXED, FIXED and OFF.
Visual Park Aid Alert
Note: Visual park alert is only available
when the transmission is in Reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when the reverse sensing system
detects an object. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. You can disable
the reverse sensing alert if you have visual
park aid alert enabled, you will still see the
displayed highlighted areas.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING
When manual zoom is on, the full
area behind your vehicle is not
shown. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in Reverse (R).
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in Reverse
(R). When you shift the transmission out of
Reverse (R), the feature automatically turns
off and you must enable it to use it used
again.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of
Reverse (R) and into any gear other than
Park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until your vehicle speed reaches
5 mph (8 km/h or until you select a radio
button.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
190
MKZ (CC9)
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal.
USING CRUISE CONTROL
WARNINGS
Do not use cruise control in heavy
traffic, on winding roads or when the
road surface is slippery. This could result
in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or
death.
When you are going downhill, your
vehicle speed may increase above
the set speed. The system will not apply
the brakes. Change down a gear to assist
the system in maintaining the set speed.
Failure to do so could result in loss of
vehicle control, serious injury or death.
Note: Cruise control will disengage if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10
mph (16 km/h) below your set speed while
driving uphill.
E145976
The cruise controls are located on the
steering wheel.
Switching Cruise Control On
Press and release ON.
E71340
The indicator will appear in the
instrument cluster.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
The indicator will change colors in the
instrument cluster.
Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, you will return to the speed that
you previously set.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
• Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed.
Press and release SET+.
Canceling the Set Speed
Press CNCL or tap the brake pedal. You
will not erase the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release RES.
191
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You will erase the set speed if you
switch the system off.
Press and release OFF or switch the
ignition off.
ECO Cruise Control
This feature saves vehicle energy by
relaxing acceleration compared to
standard cruise control. For example, your
vehicle may temporarily lose speed when
going uphill. ECO will appear in the
information display when ECO cruise
control is activated. It can be switched on
or off in the information display. See
General Information (page 97).
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNINGS
Always pay close attention to
changing road conditions, especially
when using adaptive cruise control.
Adaptive cruise control cannot replace
attentive driving. Failing to follow any of
the warnings below or failing to pay
attention to the road may result in a crash,
serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control is not a crash
warning or avoidance system.
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect pedestrians or objects in the
roadway.
WARNINGS
Adaptive cruise control will not
detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
Do not use the adaptive cruise
control when entering or leaving a
highway, in heavy traffic or on roads that
are winding, slippery or unpaved.
Do not use in poor visibility,
specifically fog, rain, spray or snow.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the
vehicle at all times.
The system adjusts your speed to maintain
a proper distance between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select from one of four gap
settings.
E145977
The controls for using your cruise control
are located on the steering wheel.
Switching the System On
Press and release ON.
E144529
The information display will
show the grey indicator light.
192
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
E164805
The current gap setting and SET will also
display.
Setting a Speed
1. Accelerate to the desired speed.
2. Press and release SET+. The vehicle
speed will be stored in the memory.
3. The information display will show a
green indicator light, current gap
setting and desired set speed.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
E164805
5. A lead vehicle graphic will illuminate if
there is a vehicle detected in front of
you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the set speed displayed in the
information display may vary slightly from
the speedometer.
Following a Vehicle
WARNINGS
When following a vehicle in front of
you, your vehicle will not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor will your
vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
to avoid a crash without driver
intervention. Always apply the brakes
when necessary. Failing to do so may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.
Adaptive cruise control only warns
of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be no
warning or a delayed warning. You should
always apply the brakes when necessary.
Failing to do so may result in a crash,
serious injury or death.
Note: The brakes may emit a sound when
modulated by the adaptive cruise control
system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. The
distance setting is adjustable.
The lead vehicle graphic will illuminate.
The vehicle will maintain a constant
distance between the vehicle ahead until:
• the vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed
• the vehicle in front of you moves out
of your lane or out of view
• the vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h)
• a new gap distance is set.
193
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
The vehicle will apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. The maximum
braking which the system can apply is
limited. You can override the system by
applying the brakes.
If the system predicts that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an
audible warning will sound while the
system continues to brake. This is
accompanied by a heads-up display; a red
warning bar illuminating on the windshield.
You should take immediate action.
Setting the Gap Distance
Note: It is your responsibility to select a
gap appropriate to the driving conditions.
E145978
Gap decreaseA
Gap increaseB
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front of you by pressing the gap control.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the graphic. Four gap distance settings
are available.
194
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
Adaptive cruise control, distance between vehicle settings
Dynamic beha-
vior
Distance gapTime gap,
seconds
Graphic display,
bars indicated
between vehicles
Set speed
yd (m)mph ( km/h)
Sport31 yd (28 m)1162 mph
(100 km/h)
Normal43 yd (39 m)1.4262 mph
(100 km/h)
Normal55 yd (50 m)1.8362 mph
(100 km/h)
Comfort67 yd (61 m)2.2462 mph
(100 km/h)
Each time you start the vehicle, the system
will select the last chosen gap for the
current driver.
Disengaging the System
Press the brake pedal or press CNCL. The
last set speed will display in grey but will
not erase.
Overriding the System
WARNING
Whenever the driver is overriding
the system by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the system will not
automatically apply the brakes to maintain
separation from any vehicle ahead.
You can override the set speed and gap
distance by pressing the accelerator pedal.
E144529
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the lead vehicle
graphic does not show in the information
display.
The system will resume operation when
you release the accelerator pedal. The
vehicle speed will decrease to the set
speed, or a lower speed if following a
slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
• Accelerate or brake to the desired
speed, then press and release SET+.
• Press and hold SET+ or SET- until the
desired set speed shows on the
information display. The vehicle speed
will gradually change to the selected
speed.
• Press and release SET+ or SET-. The
set speed will change in approximately
1 mph (2 km/h) increments.
195
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed will display continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Resuming the Set Speed
Note: Only use resume if you are aware
of the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press and release RES. The vehicle will
return to the previously set speed. The set
speed will display continuously in the
information display while the system is
active.
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation
The system is not functional at vehicle
speeds below 12 mph (20 km/h). An
audible alarm will sound and the automatic
braking releases if the vehicle drops below
this speed.
Hilly Condition Usage
Note: An audible alarm will sound and the
system will shut down if it is applying
brakes for an extended period of time.
This allows the brakes to cool down. The
system will function normally again when
the brakes have cooled down.
You should select a lower gear position
when the system is active in situations
such as prolonged downhill driving on
steep grades, for example in mountainous
areas. The system needs additional engine
braking in these situations to reduce the
load on the vehicle’ s regular brake system
to prevent them from overheating.
Switching the System Off
Note: The set speed memory erases when
you switch off the system.
Press and release OFF or turn off the
ignition.
Detection Issues
The radar sensor has a limited field of
vision. It may not detect vehicles at all or
detect a vehicle later than expected in
some situations. The lead vehicle graphic
will not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.
E71621
196
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming
out of a bend or curve in the
road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. The driver should stay
alert and intervene when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This
could cause missed or false vehicle
detections. See an authorized dealer to
have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• a blocked sensor
• high brake temperature
• a failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
WARNINGS
Do not use the system when towing
a trailer with brake controls.
Aftermarket trailer brakes will not function
properly when you switch the system on
because the brakes are electronically
controlled. Failing to do so may result in
loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
Do not use tire sizes other than
those recommended because this
can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failing to do so may result in a
loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
E145632
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is located behind a fascia cover
near the driver side of the lower grille. The
system cannot detect a vehicle ahead and
will not function when something obstructs
the radar signals. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message displaying.
197
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way.
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is
clean but the message remains in the
display.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the
surface of the road may interfere with the
radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.
You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it
is possible to get a blockage warning and
not be blocked. This can happen, for
example, when driving in sparse rural or
desert environments. A false blocked
condition will either self clear or clear after
a key cycle.
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING
Normal cruise control will not brake
due to slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting will not display, the system will not
automatically respond to lead vehicles and
automatic braking will not activate. The
system defaults to adaptive cruise control
when you start the vehicle.
ECO Cruise Control
This feature saves vehicle energy by
relaxing acceleration compared to
standard cruise control. For example, your
vehicle may temporarily lose speed when
going uphill. ECO will appear in the
information display when you activate ECO
cruise control. It can be switched on or off
in the information display. See General
Information (page 97).
198
MKZ (CC9)
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The driver alert system is designed
to aid you. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment. You
are still responsible to drive with due care
and attention.
Note: The system will store the on/off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
will be active at speeds above 40 mph (64
km/h). When below the activation speed,
the information display will inform the
driver that the system is unavailable.
Note: The system works as long as one
lane marking can be detected by the
camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may
not function.
Note: The system may not be available in
poor weather or other low visibility
conditions.
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the information
display.
Using Driver Alert
Switching the system on and off
You may switch the system on or off
through the information display by
selecting Settings then Driver Assist then
Driver Alert in the menu. When activated,
the system will monitor your alertness level
based upon your driving behavior in
relation to the lane markings, and other
factors.
System Warnings
Note: Note: The system will not issue
warnings below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h).
The warning system is in two stages. At
first the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest. This
message will only appear for a short time.
If the system detects further reduction in
driving alertness, another warning may be
issued which will remain in the information
display for a longer time. Press OK on the
steering wheel control to clear the warning
System Display
When active the system will run
automatically in the background and only
issue a warning if required. You can view
the status at any time using the information
display. See General Information (page
97).
The alertness level is shown by six steps
in a colored bar.
199
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness
is within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar will travel from left to right
as the calculated alertness level
decreases. As the rest icon is approached
the color turns from green to yellow to red.
• Green - No rest required.
• Yellow - First warning is active.
• Red - Second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning; you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is with the typical
range.
Note: The alertness level will be shown in
grey for a short time if the camera sensor
cannot track the road lane markings or if
the vehicle speed drops below
approximately 40 mph (64 km/h), after
which the system display will inform the
driver that the system is unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
WARNING
The system is designed to aid the
driver. It is not intended to replace
the driver’s attention and judgment. The
driver is still responsible to drive with due
care and attention.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as one
lane marking can be detected by the
camera.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may
not function.
Note: When Aid mode is on and the
system detects no driver steering activity
for a short continuous period of time, the
system alerts the driver to put their hands
on the steering wheel. The system may
detect a light grip/touch on the steering
wheel as hands off driving.
200
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
The system detects unintentional drifting
toward the outside of the lane and alerts
and/or aids the driver to stay in the lane
through the steering system and
instrument cluster display. The system
automatically detects and tracks the road
lane markings using a camera that is
mounted behind the interior rear view
mirror.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is
stored until it is manually changed, unless
a MyKey® is detected. If a MyKey® is
detected, the system is defaulted to on
and the mode is set to Alert.
Note: If a MyKey® is detected, pressing
the button will not affect the on or off
status of the system. Only the Mode and
Intensity settings can be changed when
a MyKey® is present.
E144813
Press the button located on the
left steering wheel stalk to
switch the system on or off.
System Settings
The system has two optional setting
menus available. To view or adjust them,
select Settings > Driver Assist > Lane
Keeping Sys in the information display
using the OK button on the steering wheel.
The last-known selection for each of these
settings is stored by the system. You do
not need to readjust your settings each
time you turn on the system.
Mode: This setting allows the driver to
select which of the system features will be
enabled.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when an unintended lane
departure is detected.
E165516
Aid only – Provides an assistance steering
torque input toward the lane center when
an unintended lane departure is detected.
201
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
A
B
A
B
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides an assistance
steering torque input toward the lane
center. If the vehicle continues drifting out
of the lane, a steering wheel vibration is
provided.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams are
meant to illustrate general zone coverage.
They are not intended to provide the exact
zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for
the alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not impact the aid mode.
• Low
• Medium
• High
System Display
E151660
When the system is turned on, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings will be displayed in the
information display. If the aid mode is
selected when the system is turned on, a
separate white icon will also appear in the
instrument cluster or in some vehicles
arrows will be displayed with the lane
markings.
When the system is turned off, the lane
marking graphics will not be displayed.
Note: The overhead vehicle graphic may
still be displayed if adaptive cruise control
is enabled.
While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings will change to indicate the
system status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side(s).
This may be because:
• the vehicle is under the activation
speed
• the turn indicator is active
• the vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver
202
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
• the road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view
• the camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental conditions (e.g.
significant sun angles or shadows,
snow, heavy rain, fog), traffic conditions
(e.g. following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane), or
vehicle conditions (e.g. poor headlamp
illumination).
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention, on the indicated side(s).
Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking
• Fast acceleration
• Using the turn signal indicator
• Evasive steering maneuver
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature
Sun is shining directly into the camera lens
Quick intentional lane change
Staying too close to the lane marking
Driving at high speeds in curves
Previous feature activation happened within the last one second
Ambiguous lane markings (mainly in construction zones)
Rapid transition from light to dark or vice versa
Sudden offset in lane markings
ABS or AdvanceTrac activation
Camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield
Driving too close to the vehicle in front of you
203
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa
Standing water on the road
Faint lane markings (partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads)
Lane width too narrow or too wide
Camera not calibrated after a windshield replacement
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads
Why does the vehicle not come back into the middle of the lane always, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds
Large road crown
Rough roads, grooves, shoulder drop-offs
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure
If the tires have been exchanged (including snow tires), or the suspension has been
modified
204
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM
Blind Spot Information System
(BLIS®) with Cross Traffic Alert (If
Equipped)
WARNING
To help avoid injuries, NEVER use
the BLIS as a replacement for using
the interior and exterior mirrors and
looking over your shoulder before
changing lanes. BLIS is not a replacement
for careful driving and only an assist.
A
A
E124788
BLIS aids you in detecting vehicles that
may have entered the blind spot zone (A).
The detection area is on both sides of the
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 10 feet
(3 meters) beyond the bumper. The system
alerts you if certain vehicles enter the blind
spot zone while driving.
Cross traffic alert warns you of vehicles
approaching from the sides when the
transmission is in R (Reverse).
Note: BLIS is not designed to prevent
contact with other vehicles or objects; or
to detect parked vehicles, people, animals
or infrastructure (fences, guardrails, trees,
etc.). It is designed to alert the driver to
vehicles in the blind zones.
Note: When a vehicle passes quickly
through the blind zone, typically fewer
than two seconds, the system does not
trigger.
Using the Systems
BLIS turns on when the vehicle is started
and is driven forward above 5 mph (8
km/h); it remains on while the transmission
is in D (Drive) and N (Neutral). If shifted out
of D (Drive) or N (Neutral), the system
enters cross traffic alert mode. Once
shifted back into D (Drive), BLIS turns back
on when the vehicle is driven above 5 mph
(8 km/h).
Note: BLIS does not function in R (Reverse)
or P (Park) or provide any additional
warning when a turn signal is on.
Note: Cross traffic alert detects
approaching vehicles from up to 45 feet
(14 meters) away though coverage
decreases when the sensors are blocked.
Reversing slowly helps increase the
coverage area and effectiveness.
WARNING
To help avoid personal injury, NEVER
use the cross traffic alert system as
a replacement for using the interior and
exterior mirrors and looking over your
shoulder before backing out of a parking
space. Cross traffic alert is not a
replacement for careful driving and only
an assist.
205
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
E142440
In this first example, the left sensor is only
partially obstructed; zone coverage is
nearly maximized.
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at shallow angles. Here, the left
sensor is mostly obstructed; zone
coverage on that side is severely limited.
206
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
System Lights and Messages
E142442
The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems
illuminate a yellow alert indicator in the
outside mirror on the side of the vehicle
the approaching vehicle is coming from.
Note: The alert indicator dims when
nighttime darkness is detected.
Cross traffic alert also sounds an audible
warning and a message appears in the
information display indicating a vehicle is
coming from the right or left. Cross traffic
alert works with the reverse sensing
system which sounds its own series of
tones. See Parking Aid (page 182).
System Sensors
WARNING
Just prior to the system recognizing
a blocked condition and alerting the
driver, the number of missed objects will
increase. To help avoid injuries, NEVER
use the BLIS as a replacement for using
the side and rear view mirrors and looking
over your shoulder before changing lanes.
BLIS is not a replacement for careful
driving and only an assist.
Note: It is possible to get a blockage
warning with no blockage present; this is
rare and known as a false blockage
warning. A false blocked condition either
self-corrects or clears after a key cycle.
E142443
The system uses radar sensors which are
located behind the bumper fascia on each
side of your vehicle. Do not allow these
areas to become obstructed by mud, snow
or bumper stickers, as this can cause
degraded system performance.
If the system detects a degraded
performance condition, a message
warning of a blocked sensor or a message
warning of low visibility will appear in the
information display and the alert indicator
illuminates in the appropriate mirror(s). The
information display warning can be cleared
but the alert indicator remains illuminated.
When the blockage is removed, the
system can be reset in two ways:
• when at least two objects are detected
while driving, or
• turn the ignition from on to off, then
back on.
If the blockage is still present after the key
cycle, the system senses again that it is
blocked after driving in traffic.
207
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
Reasons for messages being displayed
Clean the fascia area in
front of the radar or remove
the obstruction.
The radar
surface is
dirty or
obstructed
Drive normally in traffic for
a few minutes to allow the
radar to detect passing
vehicles so it can clear the
blocked state.
The radar
surface is
not dirty or
obstructed
No action required. The
system automatically resets
to an unblocked state once
the rainfall or snowfall rate
decreases or stops. Do not
use BLIS or cross traffic
alert in these conditions.
Heavy rain-
fall/snow-
fall inter-
feres with
the radar
signals
System Limitations
The BLIS and cross traffic alert systems do
have their limitations; situations such as
severe weather conditions or debris
build-up on the sensor area may limit
vehicle detection.
The following are other situations that may
limit the BLIS:
• Certain maneuvering of vehicles
entering and exiting the blind zone.
• Vehicles passing through the blind
zone at very fast rates.
• When several vehicles forming a
convoy pass through the blind zone.
The following are other situations that may
limit the cross traffic alert system:
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
obstructing the sensors.
• Approaching vehicles passing at
speeds greater than 15 mph (24 km/h).
• Driving in reverse faster than 5 mph (8
km/h).
• Backing out of an angled parking spot.
False Alerts
Note: If a trailer is connected to the
vehicle the BLIS system may detect the
trailer causing a false alert. You may want
to turn the BLIS off manually.
There may be certain instances when
either the BLIS or cross traffic alert
systems illuminate the alert indicator with
no vehicle in the coverage zone; this is
known as a false alert. Some amount of
false alerts are normal; they are temporary
and self-correct.
System Errors
If either system senses a problem with the
left or right sensor, the BLIS telltale will
illuminate and a message will appear in
the information display.
All other system faults will only be
displayed by a message in the information
display.
Switching the Systems Off and On
One or both systems can be switched off
temporarily by using the information
display control. See General Information
(page 97). When the BLIS is switched off,
you will not receive alerts and a telltale
illuminates in the information display.
208
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
Note: The CTA system always switches
on whenever the ignition is switched on.
However, the BLIS system will remember
the last selected on or off setting.
One or both systems cannot be switched
off when MyKey is used. See General
Information (page 313).
One or both systems can also be switched
off permanently at your authorized dealer.
Once switched off, switching it back on
must also be done at your authorized
dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNINGS
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system to ensure
proper operation. When a system error is
detected a steering message will appear
in the information display.
The electric power steering system
has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system to ensure
proper operation of the electronic system.
When an electronic error is detected, a
message will be displayed in the
information display. If this happens, stop
the vehicle in a safe place, and turn off the
engine. After at least 10 seconds, reset the
system by restarting the engine, and watch
the information display for a steering
message. If a steering message returns,
or returns while driving, take the vehicle
to your dealer to have it checked.
WARNINGS
Obtain immediate service if a system
error is detected. You may not notice
any difference in the feel of your steering,
but a serious condition may exist. Failure
to do so may result in loss of steering
control.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power-assisted steering system. There is
no fluid reservoir to check or fill.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving (or if the ignition is turned
off), you can steer the vehicle manually,
but it takes more effort. Extreme
continuous steering may increase the
effort it takes for you to steer. This occurs
to prevent internal overheating and
permanent damage to your steering
system. If this should occur, you will
neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle
manually nor will it cause permanent
damage. Typical steering and driving
maneuvers will allow the system to cool
and steering assist will return to normal.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• an improperly inflated tire
• uneven tire wear
• loose or worn suspension components
• loose or worn steering components
• improper vehicle alignment
A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
209
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
Adaptive Learning
The EPS system adaptive learning helps
correct for road irregularities and improves
overall handling and steering feel. It
communicates with the vehicle's brake
system to help operate advanced stability
control and accident avoidance systems.
Additionally, whenever the battery is
disconnected or a new battery installed,
the vehicle must be driven a short distance
before the strategy is relearned and all
systems are reactivated.
COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
This system is designed to be a
supplementary driving aid. It is not
intended to replace the driver’ s attention,
and judgment, or the need to apply the
brakes. This system does NOT activate
the brakes automatically. Failure to press
the brake pedal to activate the brakes may
result in a collision.
The collision warning system with
brake support cannot help prevent
all collisions. Do not rely on this system to
replace driver judgment and the need to
maintain distance and speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn
or respond to potential collisions with
vehicles to the rear or sides of the vehicle.
Note: The collision warning system is
active at speeds above approximately 5
mph (8 km/h).
E156130
This system is designed to alert the driver
of certain collision risks. A radar detects if
your vehicle is rapidly approaching
another vehicle traveling in the same
direction as yours.
E156131
If it is, a red warning light illuminates and
an audible warning chime sounds.
The brake support system assists the
driver in reducing the collision speed by
charging the brakes. If the risk of collision
further increases after the warning light
illuminates, the brake support prepares
the brake system for rapid braking. This
may be apparent to the driver. The system
does not automatically activate the brakes
but, if the brake pedal is pressed, full force
braking is applied even if the brake pedal
is lightly pressed.
Using the Collision Warning System
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if the
driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
210
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
The warning system sensitivity can be
adjusted to one of three possible settings
by using the information display control.
See General Information (page 97).
Note: If the system cannot be turned off
in a vehicle equipped with MyKey®,
Note: If collision warnings are perceived
as being too frequent or disturbing then
the warning sensitivity can be reduced,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
See General Information (page 97).
Blocked Sensors
E145632
If a message regarding a blocked sensor
appears in the information display, the
radar signals from the sensor have been
obstructed. The sensors are located
behind a fascia cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. When the sensors are
obstructed, a vehicle ahead cannot be
detected and the collision warning system
does not function. The following table lists
possible causes and actions for this
message being displayed.
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruc-
tion
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty
or obstructed in some way
Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is no
longer obstructed
The surface of the radar in the grille is
clean but the message remains in the
display
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is inter-
fering with the radar signals
The collision warning system is temporarily
disabled. Collision warning should automat-
ically reactivate a short time after the
weather conditions improve
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the
surface of the road may interfere with the
radar signals
211
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
System Limitations
WARNING
The collision warning system’ s brake
support can only help reduce the
speed at which a collision occurs if the
driver applies the vehicle’s brakes. The
brake pedal must be pressed just like any
typical braking situation.
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
• Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
• Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
• Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
• Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
• Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
• Small distance to vehicle ahead.
• Steering wheel and pedal movements
are large (very active driving style).
•
If the front end of the vehicle is hit or
damaged, the radar sensing zone may be
altered causing missed or false collision
warnings. See your authorized dealer to
have your collision warning radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
DRIVE CONTROL
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln
Drive Control will respond to your
preferences based on what gear position
you select. This provides a single location
to control multiple systems performance
settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
• Continuously controlled damping
dynamically adjusts the shock
absorbers stiffness in real time to
match the road surface and driver
inputs. This system continuously
monitors your vehicle’s motion (roll,
pitch, bounce), suspension position,
load, speed, road conditions, and
steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based
on your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Active noise control utilizes your
vehicle electronics to enhance the
acoustic experience.
212
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control
in adverse conditions or high
performance driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances
the powertrain response to your inputs.
These systems have a range of modes
which you can choose from in order to
customize your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing
comfort. Your steering effort decreases
and the suspension movement is more
fluid. Comfort mode is ideal when you
desire enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the
composure demanded from a luxury
vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens,
with an emphasis on handling and
control. The engine responds more
directly to your inputs and takes on a
more powerful tone. Sport mode is
ideal for use during more spirited
driving.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the Drive
Control modes are active when your
vehicle is in Drive (D) or in Sport (S). The
configuration remains active until modified
from the main menu on the information
display.
To change your vehicle’s Drive Control
settings from the main menu on the
information display:
1. Choose Settings.
2. Choose Vehicle.
3. Choose Drive Control.
4. Select the shift position you would like
to configure, either D or S.
5. Choose from Comfort, Normal, or Sport
modes as your preferred setting in D.
6. Choose from Normal or Sport modes
as your preferred setting in S.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the
system to ensure proper operation.
Certain types of system errors will gray
out the mode selections within the
information display, preventing you from
changing states when the gear position
is changed. Other types of errors will
produce a temporary message that states
Drive Control Malfunction. If either
condition persists for multiple key cycles,
have your vehicle checked by an
authorized dealer.
213
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without
a Trailer
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle, trailer
or both, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating
capability, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of vehicle
design performance. Before loading
your vehicle, familiarize yourself with
the following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight ratings, with or
without a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire
Label or Safety Compliance
Certification Label:
Base Curb Weight - is the weight of
the vehicle including a full tank of fuel
and all standard equipment. It does
not include passengers, cargo, or
optional equipment.
Vehicle Curb Weight - is the weight
of your new vehicle when you picked
it up from your authorized dealer plus
any aftermarket equipment.
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload - is the combined weight of
cargo and passengers that the vehicle
is carrying. The maximum payload for
your vehicle can be found on the Tire
Label on the B-Pillar or the edge of
the driver door (vehicles exported
outside the US and Canada may not
have a Tire Label). Look for “THE
COMBINED WEIGHT OF
OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD
NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX lb.”
for maximum payload. The payload
listed on the Tire Label is the
maximum payload for the vehicle as
built by the assembly plant. If you
install any aftermarket or
authorized-dealer installed equipment
on the vehicle, you must subtract the
weight of the equipment from the
payload listed on the Tire Label in
order to determine the new payload.
214
MKZ (CC9)
Load Carrying
WARNING
The appropriate loading capacity
of your vehicle can be limited
either by volume capacity (how much
space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there
is space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control
and vehicle rollover.
Example only:
E142516
E142517
215
MKZ (CC9)
Load Carrying
E143817
CARGO
Cargo Weight - includes all weight
added to the Base Curb Weight,
including cargo and optional
equipment. When towing, trailer
tongue load or king pin weight is also
part of cargo weight.
GAW (Gross Axle Weight) - is the total
weight placed on each axle (front and
rear) including vehicle curb weight and
all payload.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
is the maximum allowable weight that
can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). These numbers are shown on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label. The label shall be affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position. The total load on
each axle must never exceed its
Gross Axle Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer.
E143818
GVW
216
MKZ (CC9)
Load Carrying
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - is the
Vehicle Curb Weight, plus cargo, plus
passengers.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
- is the maximum allowable weight of
the fully loaded vehicle (including all
options, equipment, passengers and
cargo). It is shown on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
label shall be affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position. The Gross Vehicle Weight
must never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.
Example only:
E142523
E142524
217
MKZ (CC9)
Load Carrying
WARNING
Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
vehicle weight rating limits could result
in substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission
and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control
and personal injury.
E143819
GCW
GVW
GCW (Gross Combined Weight) - is
the Gross Vehicle Weight plus the
weight of the fully loaded trailer.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating) - is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the loaded
trailer, including all cargo and
passengers, that the vehicle can
handle without risking damage.
(Important: The towing vehicle’s
braking system is rated for operation
at Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, not at
Gross Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should be
used for safe control of towed vehicles
and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing
vehicle plus the trailer exceed the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating of the
towing vehicle. The Gross Combined
Weight must never exceed the Gross
Combined Weight Rating.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight - is
the highest possible weight of a fully
loaded trailer the vehicle can tow. It
assumes a vehicle with mandatory
options, driver and front passenger
weight (150 pounds [68 kilograms]
each), no cargo weight (internal or
external) and a tongue load of 10–15%
(conventional trailer) or king pin weight
of 15–25% (fifth wheel trailer). Consult
an authorized dealer (or the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at an
authorized dealer) for more detailed
information.
Tongue Load or Fifth Wheel King Pin
Weight - refers to the amount of the
weight that a trailer pushes down on
a trailer hitch.
218
MKZ (CC9)
Load Carrying
Examples: For a 5000 pound (2268
kilogram) conventional trailer, multiply
5000 by 0.10 and 0.15 to obtain a
proper tongue load range of 500 to
750 pounds (227 to 340 kilograms).
For an 11500 pound (5216 kilogram)
fifth wheel trailer, multiply by 0.15 and
0.25 to obtain a proper king pin load
range of 1725 to 2875 pounds (782 to
1304 kilograms).
WARNINGS
Do not exceed the GVWR or the
GAWR specified on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
Do not use replacement tires
with lower load carrying
capacities than the original tires
because they may lower the vehicle’ s
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Exceeding any vehicle weight
rating limitation could result in
serious damage to the vehicle and/or
personal injury.
Steps for determining the correct
load limit:
1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX
kg or XXX lb." on your vehicle’s
placard.
2. Determine the combined weight
of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will be
five 150 lb. passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lb. (1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650
lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight
of luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may
not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
The following gives you a few
examples on how to calculate the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity:
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and
luggage capacity. You decide to go
golfing. Is there enough load capacity
to carry you, four of your friends and
all the golf bags? You and four friends
average 220 pounds (99 kilograms)
each and the golf bags weigh
approximately 30 pounds (13.5
kilograms) each. The calculation would
219
MKZ (CC9)
Load Carrying
be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 -
1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and
your golf bags. In metric units, the
calculation would be: 635 kilograms -
(5 x 99 kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms)
= 635 - 495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
*Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo and
luggage capacity. You and one of your
friends decide to pick up cement from
the local home improvement store to
finish that patio you have been
planning for the past two years.
Measuring the inside of the vehicle
with the rear seat folded down, you
have room for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do you
have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your home?
If you and your friend each weigh 220
pounds (99 kilograms), the calculation
would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (12 x 100)
= 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240 pounds.
No, you do not have enough cargo
capacity to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would be:
635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) -
(12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 540
= -103 kilograms. You will need to
reduce the load weight by at least 240
pounds (104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram) cement
bags, then the load calculation would
be: 1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) = 1400
- 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would be:
635 kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9
x 45 kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume
that the loads are positioned in your
vehicle in a manner that does not
overload the Front or the Rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label. The label shall be
affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position.
220
MKZ (CC9)
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING
Never tow a trailer with an MKZ
Hybrid. This powertrain is not
designed to tow.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
The front wheels (drive wheels) must be
on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle
from the rear using wheel lift equipment.
This prevents damage to the transmission.
We recommend placing the rear wheels
on a tow dolly when towing your vehicle
from the front using wheel lift equipment.
This prevents damage to the rear fascia.
221
MKZ (CC9)
Towing
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
In the event your vehicle becomes
disabled (without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels on
the ground, regardless of the
powertrain/transmission configuration)
under the following conditions:
• The vehicle is facing forward so that it
is towed in a forward direction.
• The transmission gear shift lever is
placed in position N. If the transmission
gear shift lever cannot be moved to
position N, it may need to be
overridden. See Automatic
Transmission (page 170).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 miles (80
kilometers).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 124).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are designed to ensure that
your transmission is not damaged.
Your vehicle can be towed with all four
wheels on the ground using the Neutral
Tow feature, or with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If
you are using a vehicle transport trailer,
follow the instruction specified by the
equipment provider.
Neutral Tow
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the vehicle in Neutral Tow mode
by doing the following:
• Put the ignition in accessory mode
(ignition on, engine off). See
Keyless Starting (page 147).
• Select Neutral Tow in the
information display.
• When prompted by the information
display, press the brake pedal and
select Neutral on the transmission.
Make sure the parking brake is off.
If done successfully, Neutral Tow
Engaged appears in the display.
• Shut the ignition off. See Keyless
Starting (page 147). If the process
is completed successfully, the N
on the transmission slowly blinks
and "Neutral tow engaged"
appears in the information display.
• Do not exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Start the engine and allow it to run for
one minute at the beginning of each
day. With the engine running and your
foot on the brake, shift into position D
and then into position R before shifting
back into position N.
222
MKZ (CC9)
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 miles (480 kilometers).
During this time, your vehicle may exhibit
some unusual driving characteristics. The
engine also needs to break in. Avoid hard
accelerations and driving too fast for the
first 1000 miles (1600 kilometers). If
possible, avoid carrying heavy loads up
steep grades during the break-in period.
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind
that may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• When running errands, go to the
furthest destination first and then
work your way back home.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds. (Traveling
at 65 mph/105 kph uses about 15% less
fuel than traveling at 75 mph/121 kph).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and
use only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want
to avoid doing because they reduce your
fuel economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before
turning off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly
terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake
pedal while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4
kilometers/liter] is lost for every 400
lbs [180 kilograms] of weight carried).
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Note: Driving through deep water above
the recommended levels can cause
vehicle damage.
223
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Hints
If driving through deep or standing water
is unavoidable, proceed very slowly. Never
drive through water that is higher than the
bottom of the wheel rims (for cars) or the
bottom of the hubs (for trucks).
E142667
When driving through water, traction or
brake capability may be limited. Also,
water may enter your engine’s air intake
and severely damage your engine or your
vehicle may stall.
Once through the water, always dry the
brakes by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal. Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle
as quickly as dry brakes.
FLOOR MATS
E142666
WARNINGS
Always use floor mats that are
designed to fit the foot well of your
vehicle, leaving the pedal area
unobstructed, and which can be firmly
secured to retention posts so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere
with the pedals or impair safe operation
of your vehicle in other ways.
Incorrectly fitted floor mats can
cause the accelerator pedal to
become stuck in the open position. This
can cause loss of vehicle control.
Always correctly install the floor mats
to the retention posts so that they
cannot slip out of position or obstruct
pedal operation.
Do not place unsecured floor mats
or any other covering in the foot
well.
Do not place additional floor mats or
any other covering on top of the
original floor mats. This will reduce the
pedal clearance and interfere with the
pedal operation.
Do not allow objects to fall or
become trapped under the pedals
of your vehicle. This can cause loss of
vehicle control.
Carry out regular inspections to
make sure the floor mats are secure.
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
Remove in reverse order.
224
MKZ (CC9)
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold In the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist, if you have a vehicle
concern, Ford Motor Company offers a
complimentary Roadside Assistance
program. This program is separate from
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years or 70,000.0 mi
(112,654.08 km) (whichever comes first)
within the extended powertrain
warranty coverage period for
subsequent owners.
Roadside assistance will cover:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
mobility kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up
to 2.00 gal (7.57 L) of gasoline or
5.00 gal (18.93 L) of diesel fuel to a
disabled vehicle. Roadside Assistance
limits fuel delivery service to two
no-charge occurrences within a
12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100.0 ft
(30.48 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.
• Towing — Lincoln eligible vehicles to
the client's selling or preferred dealer
within 100.0 mi (161 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
Lincoln dealer. If a client requests a
tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100.0 mi (161 km) from the
disablement location, the client shall
be responsible for any mileage costs
in excess of 100.0 mi (161 km).
Roadside Assistance will include up to
$200 coverage for a towed trailer if the
disabled eligible vehicle requires service
at the nearest authorized dealer. If the
towing vehicle is operational but the trailer
is not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.
Vehicles Sold In the United States :
Using Roadside Assistance
United States Lincoln vehicle clients who
need Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100.0 mi (161 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States Lincoln vehicle
clients, call 1-800-521-4140. Ford Motor
Company will ask clients to submit their
original receipts.
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting
Roadside Assistance
Canadian clients who need roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.
225
MKZ (CC9)
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using
Roadside Assistance
Canadian Roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the United States
coverage. Please refer to your warranty
information or visit our website at
www.ford.ca for information on Canadian
services and benefits.
Canadian customers who need to obtain
roadside information, call 1-800-665-2006
or visit our website at www.ford.ca.
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
Note: If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery will lose charge. There
may be insufficient power to restart your
vehicle.
The hazard warning button is
located on the instrument panel.
Use it when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
• Press the button to turn on the hazard
warning function, and the front and
rear direction indicators will flash.
• Press the button again to turn them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING
Failure to inspect and, if necessary,
repair fuel leaks after a collision may
increase the risk of fire and serious injury.
Ford Motor Company recommends that
the fuel system be inspected by an
authorized dealer after any collision.
In the event of a moderate to severe
collision, this vehicle is equipped with a
fuel pump shut-off feature that stops the
flow of fuel to the engine. Not every impact
will cause a shut-off.
Should your vehicle shut off after a
collision, you may restart your vehicle by
doing the following:
1. Turn the ignition off.
2. Turn the ignition to crank.
3. Turn the ignition off.
4. Turn the ignition on again to re-enable
the fuel pump.
For vehicles equipped with a push button
start system:
1. Press the START/STOP button to turn
the ignition off.
2. Press the brake pedal and press the
START/STOP button (crank attempt).
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press the START/STOP button
(ignition off).
4. Press the START/STOP button again
to re-enable the fuel system.
JUMP-STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNINGS
The gases around the battery can
explode if exposed to flames, sparks,
or lit cigarettes. An explosion could result
in injury or vehicle damage.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which
can burn skin, eyes and clothing, if
contacted.
226
MKZ (CC9)
Roadside Emergencies
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle. Automatic
transmissions do not have push-start
capability. Attempting to push-start a
vehicle with an automatic transmission
may cause transmission damage.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start
your vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle's electrical system.
1. Park the booster vehicle close to the
hood of the disabled vehicle making
sure the two vehicles do not touch. Set
the parking brake on both vehicles and
stay clear of the engine cooling fan
and other moving parts.
2. Check all battery terminals and remove
any excessive corrosion before you
attach the battery cables. Ensure that
vent caps are tight and level.
3. Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles
to protect from any electrical surges.
Turn all other accessories off.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
Your vehicle has two battery prongs that
are accessible from under the hood, even
though the actual battery is located in the
trunk. Your vehicle can be jumped the
same way conventional vehicles can be
using these prongs. The illustration below
shows the two connector prongs used for
jump-starting your vehicle.
E155827
227
MKZ (CC9)
Roadside Emergencies
A. Negative prong (–)
B. Positive prong (+)
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the
bottom is used to designate the assisting
(boosting) battery.
Note: Remove the red cap from the
positive prong (B) on your vehicle before
connecting the cables.
E148861
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) prong (B) of the
discharged battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of
the assisting battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the assisting
battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to the negative (-)
prong (A) of your vehicle.
Note: Do not attach the negative (-) cable
to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the
intake manifold or electrical components
as grounding points.
WARNING
Do not connect the end of the
second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases
that surround the battery.
Ensure that the cables are clear of fan
blades, belts, moving parts of both
engines, or any fuel delivery system parts.
Jump Starting
1. Start the booster vehicle and press the
accelerator pedal moderately.
2. Start the disabled vehicle. Check the
instrument cluster for the Ready to
Drive light as the gasoline engine may
not start, but the electric motor may be
running.
3. Once you start the disabled vehicle,
run both vehicles for an additional
three minutes before disconnecting
the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
Note: In the illustration, the vehicle on the
bottom is used to designate the assisting
(boosting) battery.
228
MKZ (CC9)
Roadside Emergencies
E148862
1. Remove the jumper cable from the
ground metal surface.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle's battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle's battery.
After disconnecting the jumper cables, let
the disabled vehicle sit in Ready to Drive
mode for several minutes to charge the
12V battery. The disabled vehicle can
charge the 12V battery even if the gasoline
engine may be off. The 12V battery will
receive power from the high-voltage
battery instead.
COLLISION, DAMAGE OR FIRE
EVENT
Guidance for Ford Motor Company
Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles
Equipped With High Voltage
Batteries
(Vehicle Owner/Operator/General Public)
Electric and Hybrid-Electric Vehicle
Considerations
In the event of damage or fire involving
an electric vehicle (EV) or hybrid-electric
vehicle (HEV):
• Always assume the high-voltage
battery and associated components
are energized and fully charged.
• Exposed electrical components, wires
and high-voltage batteries present
potential high-voltage shock hazards.
• Venting/off-gassing high-voltage
battery vapors are potentially toxic and
flammable.
• Physical damage to the vehicle or
high-voltage battery may result in
immediate or delayed release of toxic,
flammable gases and fire.
229
MKZ (CC9)
Roadside Emergencies
Vehicle Information and General Safety
Practices
• Know the make and model of your
vehicle.
• Review the owner’s manual and
become familiar with your vehicle’s
safety information and recommended
safety practices.
• Do not attempt to repair damaged
electric and hybrid-electric vehicles
yourself. Contact an authorized Ford
Dealer or vehicle manufacturer
representative for service.
Crashes
A crash or impact significant enough to
require an emergency response for
conventional vehicles would also require
the same response for an electric or
hybrid-electric vehicle.
If possible
• Move your car to a safe, nearby
location and remain on the scene.
• Roll down the windows before shutting
your vehicle off.
• Place your vehicle in Park, set the
parking brake, turn off the vehicle,
activate the hazard lights, and move
your key(s) at least 16 feet (5 meters)
away from the vehicle.
Always
• Call 911 if assistance is needed and
advise that an electric or hybrid-electric
vehicle is involved.
• Do not touch exposed electrical
components or the engine
compartment, as a shock hazard may
exist.
• Avoid contact with leaking fluids and
gases, and remain out of the way of
oncoming traffic until emergency
responders arrive.
• When emergency responders arrive,
tell them that the vehicle involved is
an electric vehicle or hybrid vehicle.
Fires
As with any vehicle, call 911 immediately if
you see sparks, smoke or flames coming
from the vehicle.
• Exit the vehicle immediately.
• Advise 911 that an electric or
hybrid-electric vehicle is involved.
• As with any vehicle fire, do not inhale
smoke, vapors or gas from the vehicle,
as they may be hazardous.
• Remain a safe distance upwind and
uphill from the vehicle fire.
• Stay out of the roadway and stay out
of the way of any oncoming traffic
while awaiting the arrival of emergency
responders.
230
MKZ (CC9)
Roadside Emergencies
Post-Incident
• Do not store a severely damaged
vehicle with a lithium-ion battery inside
a structure or within 50 feet (15 meters)
of any structure or vehicle.
• Make sure that passenger and cargo
compartments remain ventilated (i.e.,
open window, door, or trunk).
• For vehicles in the United States, notify
Ford Motor Company 1-800-392-3673
(then follow the prompts on the voice
response menu), an authorized Ford
dealer or service center as soon as
possible as there may be other steps
to secure and discharge the
high-voltage battery.
• For vehicles in Canada, notify Ford
Motor Company 1-800-565-3673 (then
follow the prompts on the voice
response menu), an authorized Ford
dealer or service center as soon as
possible as there may be other steps
to secure and discharge the
high-voltage battery.
• Call 911 if you observe leaking fluids,
sparks, smoke or flames, or hear
gurgling or bubbling from the
high-voltage battery.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the turn signal lamps
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the safety belt pretensioners.
The horn and lamps will turn off when:
• The hazard control button is pressed
• The panic button (if equipped) is
pressed on the remote entry
transmitter
• Your vehicle runs out of power
Spinout Detection
If a spinout is detected, the vehicle comes
to a stop and the hazard warning flashers
come on. The message Spinout Detected
Hazards Activated will also appear on the
instrument cluster. The message may not
appear if your vehicle runs out of power.
Once the hazard warning flashers have
been activated, you can turn them off by:
• Pressing the hazard warning flasher
button
• Pressing the remote control unlock
button
• Pressing the remote control panic
button
• Cycling the ignition on and off twice
231
MKZ (CC9)
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your
vehicle line will provide warranty service,
we recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48121
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)
Online
Additional information and resources are
available online at www.lincolnowner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State, or Zip Code
• Owner Manuals
• Maintenance Schedules
• Recalls
• Ford Extended Service Plans
• Ford Genuine Accessories
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6J 5E4
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
Online
www.ford.ca
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your
selling/servicing authorized dealer.
232
MKZ (CC9)
Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales
Manager, Service Manager or
Customer Relations Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.
In order to help you serve you better,
please have the following information
available when contacting a Customer
Relationship Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer
reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Ford in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Ford is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute
must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
before taking action under the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to the
extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal
to the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a
refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18000 miles (29 000 km),
whichever occurs first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury
OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
233
MKZ (CC9)
Customer Assistance
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before
asserting in court any rights or remedies
conferred by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b). You are also required to use
BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights
or seeking remedies created by the
Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15
U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to
seek redress by pursuing rights and
remedies not created by California Civil
Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to
BBB AUTO LINE is not required by those
statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM
(U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not
reached during mediation or you do not
want to participate in mediation, and if
your claim is eligible, you may participate
in the arbitration process. An arbitration
hearing will be scheduled so that you can
present your case in an informal setting
before an impartial person. The arbitrator
will consider the testimony provided and
make a decision after the hearing.
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you
have already taken to try to resolve them.
A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
234
MKZ (CC9)
Customer Assistance
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
4200 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 800
Arlington, Virginia 22203-1833
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations,
modify procedures, or to discontinue this
process at any time without notice and
without obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by
Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer
to resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford
of Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel.
If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can
only get fuel with an anti-knock index
lower than is recommended for your
vehicle, contact our Customer Relationship
Center.
235
MKZ (CC9)
Customer Assistance
The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking
or serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by
use of improper fuel. Using leaded fuel
may also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific
Region, Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin
Islands, Central America, the Caribbean,
and Israel, contact the nearest authorized
dealer. If the authorized dealer cannot help
you, contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL
INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (313) 594-4857
Fax: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
For customers in Guam, the
Commonwealth of the Northern Mariana
Islands (CNMI), America Samoa, and the
U.S. Virgin Islands, please feel free to call
our Toll-Free Number: (800) 841-FORD
(3673).
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Puerto Rico,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS & GLOBAL
INITIATIVES
Customer Relationship Center
1555 Fairlane Drive
Fairlane Business Park #3
Allen Park, Michigan 48101
U.S.A.
Telephone: (800) 841-FORD (3673)
FAX: (313) 390-0804
Email: [email protected]
www.ford.com.pr
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact:
Ford Middle East
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 21470
Dubai, United Arab Emirates
Telephone: +971 4 3326084
Toll-Free Number for the Kingdom of Saudi
Arabia: 800 8971409
Local Telephone Number of Kuwait:
24810575
FAX: +971 4 3327299
Email: [email protected]
www.me.ford.com
If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations & Global Growth Initiatives by
emailing [email protected].
236
MKZ (CC9)
Customer Assistance
If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.
Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.
ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)
Obtaining a French Owner’ s Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)
E142557
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Ford Motor Company.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Ford Motor Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
237
MKZ (CC9)
Customer Assistance
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform Transport Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/menu.htmWebsite
1–800–333–0510Phone
238
MKZ (CC9)
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNINGS
Always disconnect the battery
before servicing high-current fuses.
To reduce risk of electrical shock,
always replace the cover to the
power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect your vehicle's main electrical
systems from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the
battery, you will need to reset some
features. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 260).
E144783
239
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used (spare)
25A
3
1
Not used-2
Autowipers
15A
1
3
Blower motor relay-4
Power point 3 - Back of console
20A
3
5
Not used-6
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
1
20A
1
7
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
2
20A
1
8
Powertrain control module relay-9
Power point 1 - driver front
20A
3
10
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
4
15A
2
11
Powertrain control module - vehicle power
3
15A
2
12
Not used (spare)
10A
2
13
Not used (spare)
10A
2
14
Run/start relay-15
Power point 2 - console
20A
3
16
Not used-17
Powertrain and hybrid powertrain control
module - keep alive power
10A
1
18
240
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Run/start electronic power assist steering
10A
1
19
Run/start lighting
10A
1
20
Run/start hybrid powertrain control module
15A
1
21
Not used-22
Run/start: Blind spot information system,
Rear view camera, Adaptive cruise control,
Heads-up display, Shifter
15A
1
23
Not used-24
Run/start anti-lock brake system
10A
2
25
Run/start powertrain control module
10A
2
26
Not used-27
Not used-28
Hybrid content vehicle power 5
15A
1
29
Not used-30
Not used-31
Cooling fan relay (Hybrid)-32
Not used-33
Not used-34
Not used (spare)
15A
2
35
Not used (spare)
15A
2
36
Not used-37
Vacuum pump #1 relay-38
Vacuum pump #2 relay-39
241
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Fuel pump relay-40
Horn relay-41
Not used-42
Not used-43
Not used-44
Vacuum pump monitor
5A
1
45
Not used (spare)
10A
2
46
Brake on/off switch
10A
2
47
Horn
20A
1
48
Not used (spare)
5A
1
49
Not used-50
Hybrid content vehicle power 1
15A
2
51
Hybrid content vehicle power 2
15A
2
52
Power seats
10A
1
53
Hybrid content vehicle power 4
10A
2
54
Hybrid content vehicle power 3
10A
2
55
1
Micro fuse
2
Dual micro fuse
3
M-type fuse
242
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
E145983
There are fuses located on the bottom of
the fuse box. To access the bottom of the
fuse box, do the following:
1. Release the two latches, located on
both sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box
from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the center
of the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box
to access the bottom side.
243
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
E144949
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Fuel pump feed
30A
1
56
Not used-57
Not used-58
Vacuum pump relay
40A
1
59
PWM fan
40A
1
60
Not used-61
Body control module 1
50A
2
62
Not used-63
Not used-64
244
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Front heated seat
20A
1
65
Not used-66
Body control module 2
50A
2
67
Heated rear window
40A
1
68
Anti-lock brake system valves
30A
1
69
Passenger seat
30A
1
70
Not used-71
Panoramic roof #1
30A
1
72
Rear climate controlled seats
20A
1
73
Driver seat module
30A
1
74
Not used-75
iShifter
20A
1
76
Front climate controlled seats
30A
1
77
Not used-78
Blower motor
40A
1
79
Power trunk
30A
1
80
Inverter
40A
1
81
Anti-lock brake system pump
60A
2
82
Wiper motor #1
25A
1
83
245
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Not used-84
Panoramic roof #2
30A
1
85
1
M-type fuse
2
J-type fuse
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument
panel to the left of the steering column.
E145984
246
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Lighting (ambient, glove box, vanity, dome,
trunk)
10A
1
1
Memory seats, Lumbar, Power mirror
7.5A
1
2
Driver door unlock
20A
1
3
Not used (spare)
5A
1
4
Subwoofer amplifier, THX amplifier
20A
1
5
Not used (spare)
10A
2
6
Not used (spare)
10A
2
7
Not used (spare)
10A
2
8
Not used (spare)
10A
2
9
Power trunk logic, Keypad
5A
2
10
Not used (spare)
5A
2
11
Climate control, Gear shift
7.5A
2
12
Steering wheel column, Cluster, Datalink
logic
7.5A
2
13
Hybrid battery control module
10A
2
14
Datalink/Gateway module
10A
2
15
Trunk release
15A
1
16
Not used (spare)
5A
2
17
247
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Ignition, Push button stop/start
5A
2
18
Passenger airbag disabled indicator,
Transmission range
5A
2
19
Adaptive headlamps
5A
2
20
Humidity and in-car temperature, Rear
climate seats
5A
2
21
Occupant classification sensor
5A
2
22
Delayed accessory (power inverter logic,
moonroof logic)
10A
1
23
Central lock/unlock
30A
1
24
Driver door (window, mirror)
30A
1
25
Front passenger door (window, mirror)
30A
1
26
Moonroof
30A
1
27
THX amplifier
20A
1
28
Rear driver side door (window)
30A
1
29
Rear passenger side door (window)
30A
1
30
Not used (spare)
15A
1
31
GPS, Voice control, Display, Adaptive
cruise control, Radio frequency receiver
10A
1
32
Radio, Active noise control
20A
1
33
Run/start (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37,
circuit breaker)
30A
1
34
248
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Protected componentsFuse amp ratingFuse or relay number
Restraints control module
5A
1
35
Continuous control damping suspension,
Auto-dimming rear view mirror, Lane
keeping system module
15A
1
36
Heated steering wheel
15A
1
37
Rear window shade30A38
1
Micro fuse
2
Dual micro fuse
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that
has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating
can cause severe wire damage and could
start a fire.
E142430
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown.
Blown fuses are identified by a broken
wire within the fuse. Check the appropriate
fuses before replacing any electrical
components.
Standard Fuse Amperage Rating and Color
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating
--TanTan5A
--BrownBrown7.5A
--RedRed10A
-GreyBlueBlue15A
BlueLight Blue-Yellow20A
249
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
Color
J-type fusesM-type fusesDual micro fusesMicro fusesFuse rating
WhiteWhite-White25A
PinkPink-Green30A
GreenGreen--40A
Red---50A
Yellow---60A
250
MKZ (CC9)
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to
help maintain its roadworthiness and
resale value. There is a large network of
Ford authorized dealers that are there to
help you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
To help you service your vehicle, we
provide scheduled maintenance
information which makes tracking routine
service easy. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 412).
If your vehicle requires professional
service, your authorized dealer can
provide the necessary parts and service.
Check your warranty information to find
out which parts and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other
burning material (such as cigarettes)
away from the battery and all fuel
related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P
(Park).
2. Turn off the engine and remove the
key (if equipped).
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries, do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift to P
(Park).
2. Block the wheels
251
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
E142457
1. To open the hood, go inside the
vehicle and pull the hood release
handle located under the instrument
panel.
2. Go to the front of the vehicle and find
the secondary release lever, which is
located under the front of the hood,
near the Lincoln badge.
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left,
toward the passenger side of the
vehicle.
4. Raise the hood. A gas strut will support
the hood.
5. To close the hood, lower the hood and
allow it to drop the last 8 to 11 inches
(20 to 30 centimeters).
Note: Make sure that the hood is closed
properly.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L
HYBRID
WARNING
The inverter system controller
contains various high-voltage
components that can cause serious bodily
harm or death. The inverter system
controller is not serviceable and should
never be touched, probed, or tampered
with.
Note: Do not attempt to service any of the
high-voltage components or wiring. For
easier identification, the high-voltage
wiring insulation is color coated orange.
252
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
E146046
Engine coolant reservoir capA
Engine oil filler capB
Engine air cleaner coverC
Brake fluid reservoir capD
Power distribution boxE
Inverter system controllerF
Inverter system controller coolant reservoir capG
Engine oil dipstickH
Windshield washer fluid reservoir capI
253
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
A B
E169062
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
Note: Check the level before starting the
engine.
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and the MAX marks.
1. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
2. Turn the engine off and wait 10
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan.
3. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace the
dipstick and remove it again to check
the oil level.
If the level is at the MIN mark, add oil
immediately.
Adding Engine Oil
Note: Do not remove the filler cap when
the engine is running.
Note: Do not add oil further than the MAX
mark. Oil levels above the MAX mark may
cause engine damage.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International
Lubricants Specification Advisory Council
(ILSAC), comprised of U.S. and Japanese
automobile manufacturers.
1. Remove the filler cap.
2. Add engine oil that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
3. Replace the filler cap. Turn it until you
feel a strong resistance.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
To reset the oil monitoring system after an
oil change, See General Information
(page 97).
254
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
Engine Coolant and Inverter System
Controller Coolant
Your vehicle is equipped with two
separate cooling systems. One is for
cooling the engine and one is for cooling
the inverter system controller that is
specific to the hybrid operating system.
The two systems operate similarly, with
the inverter system controller cooling
system generally operating at a lower
temperature and pressure.
Checking the Engine Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the engine
coolant at the intervals listed in the
scheduled maintenance information. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 412).
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the engine
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add prediluted
coolant immediately. See Adding Engine
Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool
300-ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use
of hydrometers or coolant test strips for
measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine
coolant or antifreeze or windshield washer
fluid outside of its specified function and
vehicle location.
Checking the Inverter System
Controller Coolant
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the inverter
system controller coolant at the intervals
listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 412).
Note: Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the inverter
system controller coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
Note: If the level is at the MIN mark, below
the MIN mark, or empty, add prediluted
coolant immediately. See Adding Inverter
System Controller Coolant in this chapter.
The coolant concentration should be
maintained within 48% to 50%, which
equates to a freeze point between -30°F
(-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
255
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
Note: For best results, coolant
concentration should be tested with a
refractometer such as Rotunda tool
300-ROB75240 available from your
dealer. Ford does not recommend the use
of hydrometers or coolant test strips for
measuring coolant concentrations.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use engine
coolant or antifreeze or windshield washer
fluid outside of its specified function and
vehicle location.
Adding Coolant
WARNINGS
Do not add engine coolant when the
engine is hot. Steam and scalding
liquids released from a hot cooling system
can burn you badly. Also, you can be
burned if you spill coolant on hot engine
parts.
Do not put engine coolant in the
windshield washer fluid container. If
sprayed on the windshield, engine coolant
could make it difficult to see through the
windshield.
To reduce the risk of personal injury,
make sure the engine is cool before
unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap.
The cooling system is under pressure;
steam and hot liquid can come out
forcefully when the cap is loosened
slightly.
Do not add coolant further than the
MAX mark.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or additives as they can
cause damage to the cooling or heating
systems. This damage would not be
covered under your vehicle’s warranty.
Note: During normal vehicle operation,
the coolant may change color from orange
to pink or light red. As long as the coolant
is clear and uncontaminated, this color
change does not indicate the coolant has
degraded nor does it require the coolant
to be drained, the system to be flushed,
or the coolant to be replaced.
Note: It is very important to use prediluted
coolant meeting the Ford specification in
order to avoid plugging the small coolant
passageways. Use of concentrated
coolant and water may cause coolant
passageway plugging and void the
warranty. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
256
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
• Do not mix different colors or types of
coolant in your vehicle. Make sure the
correct coolant is used. Mixing of
coolants may harm your cooling
system. The use of an improper
coolant may harm the engine, inverter
system controller, and cooling system
components and may void the
warranty.
• In case of emergency, a large amount
of water without engine coolant may
be added to the engine cooling system
only in order to reach a vehicle service
location. In this instance, the engine
cooling system must be drained,
chemically cleaned with Motorcraft
Premium Cooling System Flush, and
refilled with prediluted engine coolant
as soon as possible. Water alone
(without engine coolant) can cause
engine damage from corrosion,
overheating, or freezing. DO NOT use
this method for the inverter system
controller cooling system. The inverter
system controller cooling system
operates close to ambient
temperature, and is susceptible to
freezing in any subfreezing
environment in the absence of coolant.
• Do not use alcohol, methanol, brine or
any engine coolants mixed with alcohol
or methanol antifreeze (coolant).
Alcohol and other liquids can cause
engine damage from overheating or
freezing.
• Do not add extra inhibitors or additives
to the coolant. These can be harmful
and compromise the corrosion
protection of the engine coolant.
Adding Engine Coolant
1. Unscrew the engine coolant reservoir
cap slowly. Any pressure will escape
as you unscrew the cap.
2. Use a funnel to add prediluted engine
coolant to the engine coolant reservoir.
Make sure that the level is between
the MIN and MAX marks on the engine
coolant reservoir. Use prediluted
engine coolant meeting the Ford
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
3. Close the engine coolant reservoir cap.
Whenever you add coolant, check the
coolant level in the engine coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive the
vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
engine coolant level to the proper level.
Adding Inverter System Controller
Coolant
1. Open the inverter system controller
coolant reservoir cap.
2. Use a funnel to add prediluted coolant
to the inverter system controller
coolant reservoir. Make sure that the
level is between the MIN and MAX
marks on the inverter system controller
coolant reservoir. Use prediluted
coolant meeting the Ford specification.
See Capacities and Specifications
(page 302).
3. Close the inverter system controller
coolant reservoir cap.
257
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
Whenever you add coolant, check the
coolant level in the inverter system
controller coolant reservoir the next few
times you drive the vehicle. If necessary,
add enough prediluted coolant to bring
the inverter system controller coolant level
to the proper level.
Recycled Engine Coolant
Ford Motor Company does not
recommend the use of recycled engine
coolant since a Ford-approved recycling
process is not yet available.
Used engine coolant should be disposed
of in an appropriate manner. Follow your
community’s regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized Ford dealer increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% will
provide improved freeze point
protection. Engine coolant
concentrations above 60% will
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the engine coolant
and may cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to have an
authorized Ford dealer decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% will
provide improved overheat protection.
Engine coolant concentrations below
40% will decrease the corrosion/freeze
protection characteristics of the engine
coolant and may cause engine
damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant
meeting the Ford specification for optimum
cooling system and engine protection.
What You Should Know About Fail-
Safe Cooling
If the engine coolant supply is depleted,
this feature allows the vehicle to be driven
temporarily before incremental component
damage is incurred. The “fail-safe”
distance depends on ambient
temperatures, vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the
engine coolant temperature gauge will
move to the red (hot) area and:
The coolant temperature
warning light will illuminate.
The service engine soon
indicator will illuminate.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
will automatically switch to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.
258
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
When this occurs the vehicle will still
operate. However:
• The engine power will be limited.
• The air conditioning system will be
disabled.
Continued operation will increase the
engine temperature and the engine will
completely shut down, causing steering
and braking effort to increase.
Once the engine temperature cools, the
engine can be re-started. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to minimize engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNINGS
Fail-safe mode is for use during
emergencies only. Operate the
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring the vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, the vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.
Never remove the coolant reservoir
cap while the engine is running or
hot.
Note: Driving the vehicle without repairing
the engine problem increases the chance
of engine damage. Take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
You have limited engine power when in
the fail-safe mode, so drive the vehicle
with caution. The vehicle will not be able
to maintain high-speed operation and the
engine will run rough. Remember that the
engine is capable of completely shutting
down automatically to prevent engine
damage, therefore:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and turn off the engine.
2. Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to
an authorized dealer.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level and replenish
if low.
5. Re-start the engine and take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
Note: Transmission fluid should be
checked by an authorized dealer. If
required, fluid should be added by an
authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 412). Your
transmission does not consume fluid.
However, the fluid level should be
checked if the transmission is not working
properly, (i.e., if the transmission slips or
shifts slowly) or if you notice some sign of
fluid leakage.
259
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents.
The use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in
damage to internal transmission
components.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX
lines are within the normal operating
range; there is no need to add fluid. If the
fluid levels are outside of the normal
operating range, the performance of the
system could be compromised; seek
service from your authorized dealer
immediately.
POWER STEERING FLUID CHECK
Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING
If you operate your vehicle in
temperatures below 40°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase
the risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
Ford specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze agents
should be used only if they provide cold
weather protection without damaging the
vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.
FUEL FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime
fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel
tank. Regular maintenance or replacement
is not needed.
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNINGS
Batteries normally produce explosive
gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow flames,
sparks or lighted substances to come near
the battery. When working near the
battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide proper
ventilation.
When lifting a plastic-cased battery,
excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and
damage to the vehicle or battery. Lift the
battery with a battery carrier or with your
hands on opposite corners.
260
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
WARNINGS
Keep batteries out of reach of
children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
Motorcraft® maintenance-free battery
which normally does not require additional
water during its life of service.
Note: If your battery has a cover/shield,
make sure it is reinstalled after the battery
has been cleaned or replaced.
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.
When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle
To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to
the vehicle, the accessories or
components may adversely affect the low
voltage battery performance and
durability and may also affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep
the top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory
by power from the low voltage battery.
When a technician disconnects and
connects the low voltage battery, these
settings are erased. Complete the
following procedure in order to restore the
settings:
1. With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
261
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
2. Shift the transmission into P.
3. Turn off all accessories.
4. Step on the brake pedal and start the
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 309). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 83). Reset
the radio station presets. See Audio
System (page 309).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, step on
the accelerator to start the engine.
7. While the engine is running, step on
the brake pedal and shift the
transmission to N.
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 10 miles (16
kilometers) to completely relearn the
idle and fuel trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be
adversely affected until the engine
computer eventually relearns the idle trim
and fuel trim strategy.
Note: Always dispose of automotive
batteries in a responsible manner. Follow
your local authorized standards for
disposal. Call your local authorized
recycling center to find out more about
recycling automotive batteries.
Note: It is recommended that the negative
battery cable terminal be disconnected
from the battery if you plan to store your
vehicle for an extended period of time.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge
of the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
The wiper arms can be manually moved
when the ignition is off. This allows for
ease of blade replacement and cleaning
under the blades.
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away
from the glass.
E129990
1
1
2
262
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
2. Press the locking buttons together.
3. Rotate and remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade
locks into place. Lower the wiper arm and
blade back to the windshield. The wiper
arms will automatically return to their
normal position when the ignition is turned
on.
Replace wiper blades at least once per
year for optimum performance.
Poor wiper quality can be improved by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are
properly aimed at the assembly plant. If
your vehicle has been in an accident, the
alignment of your headlamps should be
checked by your authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a
wall or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 feet (7.6 meters)
away.
2. Measure the height of the headlamp
bulb center from the ground and mark
an 8 foot (2.4 meter) horizontal
reference line on the vertical wall or
screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
263
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the right hand
portion of the beam pattern. If the top
edge of the high intensity light zone is
not at the horizontal reference line, the
headlamp will need to be adjusted.
E150095
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the
horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
Horizontal aim is not required for this
vehicle and is not adjustable.
CHANGING A BULB
Lamp Assembly Condensation
Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate
normal changes in pressure. Condensation
can be a natural by-product of this design.
When moist air enters the lamp assembly
through the vents, there is a possibility that
condensation can occur when the
temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a thin film of mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
thin mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48
hours under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• Presence of thin mist (no streaks, drip
marks or droplets).
• Fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable moisture
(usually caused by a lamp water leak) are:
• Water puddle inside the lamp.
• Large water droplets, drip marks or
streaks present on the interior of the
lens.
Take your vehicle to a dealer for service
if any of the above conditions of
unacceptable moisture are present.
264
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
Replacing Bulbs
For replacing bulbs, see your authorized
dealer.
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized “D.O.T.” for
North America to make sure they have the
proper lamp performance, light brightness,
light pattern, and safe visibility. The correct
bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly
or void the lamp assembly warranty and
will provide quality bulb illumination time.
Trade nameFunction
LEDHeadlamp high beam
LEDHeadlamp low beam
LEDSide marker lamp - front
LEDPark lamp - front
LEDTurn lamp - front
LEDTail and brake lamp - high series
LEDTail and brake lamp - low series
LEDReverse lamp
LEDTurn lamp - rear - high series
LEDTurn lamp - rear - low series
LEDSide marker lamp - rear
LEDLicense plate lamp
LEDTrunk lamp
LEDHigh-mount brake lamp
LEDSide repeater lamp
265
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
Trade nameFunction
LEDGlove compartment lamp
LEDInterior lamp
To replace any bulb, see your authorized dealer.
266
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING
To reduce the risk of vehicle damage
and/or personal burn injuries do not
start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the air filter element, use
only the air filter element listed. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 302).
Change the air filter element at the proper
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 412).
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. The customer warranty may be
void for any damage to the engine if the
correct air filter element is not used.
E146048
1. Loosen the 5 bolts on the air cleaner
cover.
2. Remove the air cleaner cover.
3. Remove the engine air filter element
from the engine air cleaner assembly.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air
filter housing and cover to make sure
no dirt gets in the engine and to make
sure you have a good seal.
5. Install the new engine air filter element
to the engine air cleaner assembly.
6. Install the air cleaner cover.
7. Tighten the 5 bolts to the air cleaner
cover.
267
MKZ (CC9)
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your Ford or Lincoln authorized dealer has
many quality products available to clean
your vehicle and protect its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover (ZC-42)
Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner
(ZC-15)
Motorcraft Detail Wash (ZC-3-A)
Motorcraft Dusting Cloth (ZC-24)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser (U.S. only) (ZC-20)
Motorcraft Engine Shampoo (Canada only)
(CXC-66-A)
Motorcraft Multi-Purpose Cleaner (Canada
only) (CXC-101)
Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner
(Canada only) (CXC-100)
Motorcraft Premium Quality Windshield
Washer Fluid (Canada only) [CXC-37-(A, B,
D or F)]
Motorcraft Premium Windshield Wash
Concentrate with Bitterant (U.S. only)
(ZC-32-B1)
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet &
Upholstery Cleaner (ZC-54)
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover (U.S.
only) (ZC-14)
Motorcraft Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner
(ZC-23)
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner
(ZC-37-A)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household
detergents or soap, such as dish
washing or laundry liquid. These
products can discolor and spot painted
surfaces.
• Never wash a vehicle that is “hot to the
touch” or during exposure to strong,
direct sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel in order to eliminate
water spotting.
• Immediately remove items such as
gasoline, diesel fuel, bird droppings
and insect deposits because they can
cause damage to your vehicle’s
paintwork and trim over time. Use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, such
as antennas, before entering a car
wash.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage any painted surface; if these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash off as soon as possible.
Stripes or Graphics (if equipped)
Do not use a commercial or high-pressure
sprayer on the surface or edge of stripes
and graphics. This can cause damage to
the film and cause the edge of the film to
peel away from the vehicle surface.
268
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome
Note: Never use abrasive materials such
as steel wool or plastic pads as they can
scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels and wheel
covers
• Wash your vehicle first, using cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, such as Motorcraft Detail
Wash.
• Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal
Cleaner. Apply the product as you
would a wax to clean bumpers and
other chrome parts; allow the cleaner
to dry for a few minutes, then wipe off
the haze with a clean, dry rag.
• Do not apply cleaning product to hot
surfaces and do not leave cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
• Using other non-recommended
cleaners can result in severe and
permanent cosmetic damage.
Underbody
Flush the complete underside of your
vehicle frequently. Keep body and door
drain holes free from packed dirt.
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts
Use only approved products to clean
plastic parts
• For routine cleaning, use Motorcraft
Detail Wash.
• If tar or grease spots are present, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect
your car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’ s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
• Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup
keep the engine warmer than normal.
269
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while
it is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
fluid.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear
window. The vehicle warranty does not
cover damage caused to the heated rear
window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNINGS
Do not use cleaning solvents, bleach
or dye on the vehicle’s safety belts,
as these actions may weaken the belt
webbing.
On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a collision.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
270
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING
Do not use chemical solvents or
strong detergents when cleaning the
steering wheel or instrument panel to
avoid contamination of the airbag system.
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp, white cotton cloth,
then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth
to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that
increase the gloss of the upper portion
of the instrument panel. The dull finish
in this area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
• Be certain to wash or wipe your hands
clean if you have been in contact with
certain products such as insect
repellent and suntan lotion in order to
avoid possible damage to the interior
painted surfaces.
• Do not use household or glass
cleaners as these may damage the
finish of the instrument panel, interior
trim and cluster lens.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Damage may not be covered by your
warranty.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or
on interior trim surfaces, clean as follows:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
white, cotton cloth.
2. Wipe the surface with a damp, clean,
white cotton cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, use a mild soap and water
solution. If the spot cannot be
completely cleaned by this method,
the area may be cleaned using a
commercially available cleaning
product designed for automotive
interiors.
3. If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, white, cotton cloth and press
the cloth onto the soiled area. Allow
this to set at room temperature for 30
minutes.
271
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
4. Remove the soaked cloth and if it is
not soiled badly, use this cloth to clean
the area by using a rubbing motion for
60 seconds.
5. Following this, wipe area dry with a
clean, white, cotton cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (IF
EQUIPPED)
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth. For more thorough
cleaning, wipe the surface with a mild soap
and water solution. Dry the area with a soft
cloth.
If you cannot completely clean the leather
using a mild soap and water solution, you
can try a commercially available leather
cleaning product designed for automotive
interiors.
Note: To check for compatibility, first test
any cleaner or stain remover on an
inconspicuous part of the leather.
You should:
• remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner
• clean spills and stains as quickly as
possible
• check for compatibility by first testing
any cleaner or stain remover on an
inconspicuous part of the leather.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• oil/petroleum-based leather
conditioners
• household cleaners
• alcohol solutions
• solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Your authorized dealer has touch-up paint
to match your vehicle’s color. Take your
color code (printed on a sticker in the
driver’s door jamb) to your authorized
dealer to ensure you get the correct color.
• Remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits,
tar spots, road salt and industrial fallout
before repairing paint chips.
• Always read the instructions before
using the products.
CLEANING THE ALLOY WHEELS
Note: Do not apply a cleaning chemical
to warm or hot wheel rims and covers.
Note: Some automatic car washes may
cause damage to the finish on your wheel
rims and covers.
Note: Industrial-strength or heavy-duty
cleaners in combination with brush
agitation to remove brake dust and dirt,
could wear away the clear coat finish over
a period time.
Note: Do not use hydrofluoric acid-based
or high caustic-based wheel cleaners,
steel wool, fuels or strong household
detergents.
272
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
Note: If you intend parking your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with a wheel cleaner, drive your
vehicle for a few minutes before doing so.
This will reduce the risk of increased
corrosion of the brake discs.
Alloy wheels and wheel covers are coated
with a clear coat paint finish. To maintain
their condition we recommend that you:
• Clean the wheels weekly using
Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner.
Apply using manufacturer's
instructions.
• Use a sponge to remove heavy
deposits of dirt and brake dust
accumulation.
• Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream
of water when you have completed the
cleaning process.
• To remove tar and grease, use
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for an
extended period of time (30 days or more),
read the following maintenance
recommendations to make sure your
vehicle stays in good operating condition.
All motor vehicles and their components
were engineered and tested for reliable,
regular driving. Long term storage under
various conditions may lead to component
degradation or failure unless specific
precautions are taken to preserve the
components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud
from exterior surfaces, rear-wheel
housing and underside of front
fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle stored
in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when your vehicle is washed.
• Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid
hinges, and latches with a light grade
oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
273
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
Engine
• The engine oil and filter should be
changed prior to storage, as used
engine oil contain contaminates that
may cause engine damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days. Run at
fast idle until it reaches normal
operating temperature
• With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm there are no cooling system
leaks, and fluid is at the recommended
level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary.
Keep connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, it
may be advisable to disconnect the
battery cables to ensure battery charge
is maintained for quick starting.
Note: If battery cables are disconnected,
it will be necessary to reset memory
features.
Brakes
• Make sure brakes and parking brake
are fully released.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are
covered with grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8
meters) every 15 days to lubricate
working parts and prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out
of storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage (mice/squirrel nests).
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 feet (4.5 meters) back
and forth to remove rust build-up.
274
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
• Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
• If the battery was removed, clean the
battery cable ends and inspect.
Contact your authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.
275
MKZ (CC9)
Vehicle Care
TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT
Note: The temporary mobility kit sealant
compound in the canister is to be used for
one tire only. See your Ford authorized
dealer for additional replacement sealant
canisters.
The kit is located in the spare tire well in
the trunk. The kit consists of an air
compressor to reinflate the tire and a
sealing compound in a canister that will
effectively seal most punctures caused by
nails or similar objects. This kit will provide
a temporary seal allowing you to drive your
vehicle up to 120 miles (200 kilometers)
at a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
E144618
Air compressor (inside)A
Diverter knobB
On and off buttonC
Air pressure gaugeD
Sealant bottle and canisterE
Sealant filling clear tubeF
Sealant tube - tire valve
connector
G
Yellow cap toolH
Air compressor hoseI
Air hose -tire valve connectorJ
Accessory power plugK
Casing/housingL
276
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
General Information
WARNING
Failure to follow these guidelines
could result in an increased risk of
loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has
become severely damaged by driving the
vehicle with a tire that has insufficient air
pressure. Only punctured areas located
within the tire tread can be sealed with
the kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than 1/4 inch (6 millimeters) or damage to
the tire's sidewall. The tire may not
completely seal.
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect
tire performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50
mph (80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120 miles
(200 kilometers). Drive only to the closest
Ford Motor Company authorized dealer
or tire repair shop to have your tire
inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt
steering maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation
pressure in the affected tire; if the tire
is losing pressure, have the vehicle
towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for
Use of the Kit section to make sure
safe operation of the kit and your
vehicle.
Tips for Use of the Kit
Read the following list of tips to ensure
safe operation of the kit:
• Before operating the kit, make sure
your vehicle is safely off the road and
away from moving traffic. Turn on the
hazard lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle doesn't move
unexpectedly.
• Do not remove any foreign objects,
such as nails or screws, from the tire.
• When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors
or in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor doesn't drain the vehicle's
battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to
operate continuously for more than 15
minutes; this will help prevent the
compressor from overheating.
• Never leave the kit unattended when
it is operating.
• Sealant compound contains latex.
Make sure that you use the non-latex
gloves provided to avoid an allergic
reaction.
• Keep the kit away from children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (–30°C)
and 158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before
the use by date. The use by date is on
the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister (bottle).
Check the use by date regularly and
replace the canister after four years.
277
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
• Do not store the kit unsecured inside
the passenger compartment of the
vehicle as it may cause injury during a
sudden stop or crash. Always store the
kit in its original location.
• After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve
stem on the wheel must be replaced
by an authorized Ford dealer.
• When inflating a tire or other objects,
use the black air hose only. Do not use
the transparent hose which is designed
for sealant application only.
• Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and
DVD player operation.
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire's tread area
can be repaired in two stages with the kit.
• In the first stage, the tire will be
reinflated with a sealing compound
and air. After the tire has been
reinflated, you will need to drive the
vehicle a short distance (about 4 miles
[6 kilometers]) to distribute the sealant
in the tire.
• In the second stage, you will need to
check the tire pressure and adjust, if
necessary, to the vehicle's tire inflation
pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air
WARNINGS
Do not stand directly over the kit
while inflating the tire. If you notice
any unusual bulges or deformations in the
tire's sidewall during inflation, stop and call
roadside assistance.
If the tire doesn't inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within
15 minutes, stop and call roadside
assistance.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe,
level and secure area, away from moving
traffic. Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the
parking brake and turn the engine off.
Inspect the flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. To avoid
any allergic reactions, use the non-latex
gloves located in the accessory box on
the underside of the kit housing.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
3. Remove the tube cap and fasten the
metal connector of the tube to the tire
valve, turning clockwise. Make sure
the connection is tightly fastened.
278
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
E144619
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on
the canister and place it on the top of
the instrument panel or the center of
the dash.
6. Start the vehicle only if the vehicle is
outdoors or in a well-ventilated area.
E144924
7. Push and turn dial (A) counterclockwise
to the sealant position. Turn on the kit
by pressing the on/off button (B).
E144621
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on
the tire label located on the driver's
door or the door jamb area. When the
sealing compound is first added into
the tire, the air pressure gauge reading
on the compressor unit may indicate
a higher value; this is normal and
should be no reason for concern. The
pressure will drop after about 30
seconds of operation. The tire pressure
has to be checked with the
compressor in the OFF position to get
the correct tire pressure reading.
9. When the recommended tire pressure
is reached, turn off the kit by pressing
the on button; disconnect the kit from
the tire valve and the power point.
Re-install the valve cap on the tire
valve, place the tube cap on the metal
connector, and return the kit to the
stowage area
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 4 miles (6 kilometers) to
distribute the sealant evenly inside
the tire. Do not exceed 50 mph (80
km/h).
11. After 4 miles (6 kilometers), stop and
check the tire pressure. See Second
stage: Checking tire pressure.
279
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise while
driving, reduce your speed until you can
safely pull off to the side of the road to call
for roadside assistance. Note: Do not
proceed to the second stage of this
operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure
WARNINGS
If you are proceeding from the First
stage: Re–inflating the tire with
sealing compound and air section and
have injected sealant in the tire and the
pressure is below 20 psi (1.4 bar), stop and
call roadside assistance. If tire pressure is
above 20 psi (1.4 bar), continue to the next
step.
The power plug may get hot after
use and should be handled carefully
while unplugging.
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve.
2. Unhook the black hose from the side
of the compressor and fasten firmly on
the valve stem by turning clockwise.
3. Push and turn the dial clockwise to the
air position. Turn on the kit by pressing
the on button.
E144622
4. Adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure from the tire label
located on the driver's door or door
jamb area. The tire pressure has to be
checked with the compressor in the
OFF position to get the correct tire
pressure reading.
5. Turn the compressor off by pressing
the on/off button.
6. Unplug the hoses, re-install the valve
cap on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area.
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed
After using the kit to seal your tire, you will
need to replace the sealant canister and
clear tube (hose). Sealing compound and
spare parts can be obtained and replaced
at an authorized Ford Motor Company
dealership or tire dealer. Empty sealant
bottles may be disposed of at home;
however, liquid residue from the sealing
compound should be disposed by your
local Ford Motor Company dealership or
tire dealer, or in accordance with local
waste disposal regulations.
280
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Note: After the sealing compound has
been used, the maximum vehicle speed
is 50 mph (80 km/h) and the maximum
driving distance is 120 miles (200
kilometers). The sealed tire should be
inspected immediately.
Note: After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Ford dealer.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 miles (200 kilometers) by
performing the procedure from Second
stage: Checking tire pressure listed
previously.
Removal of the sealant canister from the
kit
E144623
1. Unwrap the clear tube from the
compressor housing.
E144624
2. Locate the yellow cap at the end of the
clear tube.
E144625
3. Using the yellow cap tool, press the
tab located on the kit compressor
housing while pulling up on the sealant
canister.
Installation of the sealant canister to the
kit
E144626
1. Align the sealant canister with the kit
housing.
281
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
E161567
2. Once aligned, seat the sealant canister
by lightly pushing down until you hear
an audible click.
E144628
3. Wrap the clear tube around the
compressor housing.
Note: If you experience any difficulties
with the removal or installation of the
sealant canister, consult your Ford Motor
Company authorized dealer for
assistance.
E144629
Be sure to check the sealant compound's
use by date regularly. The use by date is
on the lower right hand corner of the label
located on the sealant canister (bottle).
The sealant canister should be replaced
after four years.
TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform Tire
Quality Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
282
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They
do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires, space-saver or
temporary use spare tires, light truck
or LT type tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited
production tires as defined in Title 49
Code of Federal Regulations Part
575.104 (c)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation
Tire quality grades: The U.S.
Department of Transportation requires
Ford Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire grades
exactly as the government has written
it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1
½) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning or peak
traction characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt
and concrete. A tire marked C may
have poor traction performance.
Temperature A B C
WARNING
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading,
either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible
tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
283
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
139. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
• Tire Identification Number: A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire
size and date of manufacture. Also
referred to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of
the amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at 35 psi [37 psi (2.5
bar) for Metric tires]. Increasing the
inflation pressure beyond this
pressure will not increase the tire’ s
load carrying capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 41 psi [43
psi (2.9 bar) for Metric tires].
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold inflation pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven
for 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Recommended inflation pressure:
The cold inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets
the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire
Label located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at
the side of the vehicle behind the
front door
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the
tire next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between
the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts
the road when mounted on the
vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for
a tire or a tire and tube assembly
upon which the tire beads are
seated.
284
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes
the fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of a
recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a
tire size, load index and speed rating.
The definitions of these items are
listed below. (Note that the tire size,
load index and speed rating for your
vehicle may be different from this
example.)
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association, that may
be used for service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks. Note: If your tire size does not
begin with a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical Organization
or the Japan Tire Manufacturing
Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge. In general, the
larger the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index.
It is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find
this information in your owner’s
manual. If not, contact a local tire
dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is
not required by federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed
at which a tire is designed to be driven
for extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and
inflation pressure. The tires on your
vehicle may operate at different
285
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the difference
in conditions. The ratings range from
81 mph (130 km/h) to 186 mph (299
km/h). These ratings are listed in the
following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it is
not required by federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter
rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h),
tire manufacturers sometimes use the
letters ZR. For those with a maximum
speed capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always use
the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number: This begins with the letters
DOT and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next two
numbers or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are the
tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to
four digits. For example, 2501 means
the 25th week of 2001. The numbers
in between are identification codes
used for traceability. This information
is used to contact customers if a tire
defect requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies
or the number of layers of
rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
and sidewall. Tire manufacturers also
must indicate the ply materials in the
tire and the sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the tire.
Refer to the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
286
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
• Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and
C. The grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
• Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
M. Maximum Permissible Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum permissible
pressure or the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the
tire. This pressure is normally higher
than the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation pressure
which can be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load, radial tubeless, etc.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are described
below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by
the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
287
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's
load-carrying capabilities and its
inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum
load and tire pressure when the tire
is used as a dual; defined as four tires
on the rear axle (a total of six or more
tires on the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at
psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum
load and tire pressure when the tire
is used as a single; defined as two
tires (total) on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire
size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type
tires; these differences are described
below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge. In general, the
larger the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a
short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
288
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing
tire inflation pressure by tire size and
other important information located
on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure without
appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than the
others, use a tire gauge to check
pressure of all tires and adjust if
required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the
tire pressure with a tire gauge
(including spare, if equipped). Inflate
all tires to the inflation pressure
recommended by Ford Motor
Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges may
be inaccurate. Ford recommends the
use of a digital or dial-type tire
pressure gauge rather than a
stick-type tire pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns
WARNING
Under-inflation is the most
common cause of tire failures
and may result in severe tire cracking,
tread separation or blowout, with
unexpected loss of vehicle control and
increased risk of injury. Under-inflation
increases sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat buildup
and internal damage to the tire. It also
may result in unnecessary tire stress,
irregular wear, loss of vehicle control
and accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not appear
to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the
edge of the driver’s door. Failure to
follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause uneven
treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles
289
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Maximum Permissible Inflation
Pressure is the tire manufacturer's
maximum permissible pressure and
the pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating position),
or Tire Label which is located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door. The cold inflation pressure
should never be set lower than the
recommended pressure on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1
psi (7 kPa) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and
adjust them to the proper pressure
which can be found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label or Tire
Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example
driven more than 1 mile [1.6
kilometers]), never bleed or reduce air
pressure. The tires are hot from
driving and it is normal for pressures
to increase above recommended cold
pressures. A hot tire at or below
recommended cold inflation pressure
could be significantly under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance
to get air for your tire(s), check and
record the tire pressure first and add
the appropriate air pressure when you
get to the pump. It is normal for tires
to heat up and the air pressure inside
to go up as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure
the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release
air by pressing on the metal stem in
the center of the valve. Then recheck
the pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
290
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the
other tires. For T type mini-spare tires
(refer to the Dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly information for a
description): Store and maintain at 60
psi (4.15 bar). For full-size and
dissimilar spare tires (refer to the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a
description): Store and maintain at the
higher of the front and rear inflation
pressure as shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke
a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
7. Check the sidewalls to make sure
there are no gouges, cuts or
bulges.
Inspecting Your Tires and Wheel
Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads for
uneven or excessive wear and remove
objects such as stones, nails or glass
that may be wedged in the tread
grooves. Check the tire and valve
stems for holes, cracks, or cuts that
may permit air leakage and repair or
replace the tire and replace the valve
stem. Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other signs
of damage or excessive wear. If
internal damage to the tire is
suspected, have the tire demounted
and inspected in case it needs to be
repaired or replaced. For your safety,
tires that are damaged or show signs
of excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to blow
out or fail.
Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to wear
abnormally. Inspect all your tires,
including the spare, frequently, and
replace them if one or more of the
following conditions exist:
Tire Wear
E142546
When the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm), tires must
be replaced to help prevent your
vehicle from skidding and
hydroplaning. Built-in treadwear
indicators, or wear bars, which look
like narrow strips of smooth rubber
across the tread will appear on the tire
when the tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm)
When the tire tread wears down to the
same height as these wear bars, the
tire is worn out and must be replaced.
291
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads and
sidewalls for damage (such as bulges
in the tread or sidewalls, cracks in the
tread groove and separation in the
tread or sidewall). If damage is
observed or suspected have the tire
inspected by a tire professional. Tires
can be damaged during off-road use,
so inspection after off-road use is also
recommended.
Age
WARNING
Tires degrade over time
depending on many factors such
as weather, storage conditions, and
conditions of use (load, speed,
inflation pressure, etc.) the tires
experience throughout their lives.
In general, tires should be replaced
after six years regardless of tread
wear. However, heat caused by hot
climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if it
has not been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on
the sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and describes
the fundamental characteristics of the
tire and also provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case of a
recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next
two are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For example,
the numbers 317 mean the 31st week
of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go
to four digits. For example, 2501
means the 25th week of 2001. The
numbers in between are identification
codes used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires a
recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
292
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
WARNINGS
Only use replacement tires and
wheels that are the same size,
load index, speed rating and type
(such as P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as those
originally provided by Ford. The
recommended tire and wheel size may
be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these
labels then you should contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Use of any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your
vehicle, which could result in an
increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. Additionally the use
of non-recommended tires and wheels
could cause steering, suspension,
axle, transfer case or power transfer
unit failure. If you have questions
regarding tire replacement, contact
your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
WARNINGS
To reduce the risk of injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on the
sidewall of the tire to set the beads
without additional precautions listed
below. If the beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again
When inflating the tire for mounting
pressures up to 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure
on the tire sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to protect
the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 feet (3.66
meters) away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
For a mounting pressure more than
20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer or
other tire service professional should
do the mounting.
Always inflate steel carcass tires with
a remote air fill with the person
inflating standing at a minimum of 12
feet (3.66 meters) away from the
wheel and tire assembly
293
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used
in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the operation of
your tire pressure monitoring system.
If the TPMS indicator is flashing, your
TPMS is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your TPMS, or some
component of the TPMS may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNINGS
If your vehicle is stuck in snow,
mud or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires; spinning the tires can tear
the tire and cause an explosion. A tire
can explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
Do not spin the wheels at over
35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or
bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the
road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive
there’ s always the possibility that you
may eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest
safe area out of traffic. This may
further damage the flat tire, but your
safety is more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you
suspect your tire or vehicle has been
damaged, immediately reduce your
speed. Drive with caution until you can
safely pull off the road. Stop and
inspect the tires for damage. If you
cannot detect a cause, have the
vehicle towed to the nearest repair
facility or tire dealer to have the
vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end of
your vehicle to become misaligned or
cause damage to your tires. If your
vehicle seems to pull to one side
when you’re driving, the wheels may
be out of alignment. Have an
authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
294
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an optional independent rear
suspension may require alignment of
all four wheels.
You should balance the tires
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly is defined as a
spare wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels. If you
have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly it is intended for temporary
use only and should not be used in a
tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked
and adjusted to the vehicle
requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval (as indicated
in the Scheduled Maintenance
chapter) will help your tires wear more
evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive or all-wheel drive
vehicles (front tires on the left side of
the diagram)
E142547
All vehicles with directional tires (front
tires on the left side of the diagram)
E147237
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
295
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Summer Tires
Your Ford vehicle may be equipped
with summer tires to provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud
and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction
rating on the tire side wall. Since
summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as All-season or
Snow tires, Ford does not recommend
using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately
40°F (5°C) or below (depending on tire
wear and environmental conditions)
or in snow and ice conditions. Like any
tire, summer tire performance is
affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you must
drive in those conditions, Ford
recommends using Mud and Snow
(M+S, M/S), All-season or Snow tires.
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNINGS
If you choose to install snow tires on
your vehicle, they must be the same
size, construction, and load range as the
original tires listed on the tire placard, and
they must be installed on all four wheels.
Mixing tires of different size or construction
on your vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may
lead to loss of vehicle control.
Do not use snow chains or cables
on this vehicle as they may cause
damage to your vehicle which may lead
to loss of vehicle control.
Snow chains have not been approved for
use on your vehicle.
The original equipment tires on your
vehicle may have an all-weather tread
design to provide traction, handling, and
braking performance in year-round driving.
You may install snow tires for improved
traction when driving in areas with
sustained periods of snow or icy driving
conditions.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING
The tire pressure monitoring system
is NOT a substitute for manually
checking tire pressure. The tire pressure
should be checked periodically (at least
monthly) using a tire gauge, see Inflating
your tires in this chapter. Failure to
properly maintain your tire pressure could
increase the risk of tire failure, loss of
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
296
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a tire pressure
monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates
a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low
tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale
will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that
the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
The tire pressure monitoring system
complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a
tire pressure sensor located inside the
wheel and tire assembly cavity. The
pressure sensor is attached to the valve
stem. The pressure sensor is covered by
the tire and is not visible unless the tire is
removed. Care must be taken when
changing the tire to avoid damaging the
sensor
It is recommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
dealer.
297
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
The tire pressure should be checked
periodically (at least monthly) using an
accurate tire gauge. See Inflating Your
Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your four road tires
and sends the tire pressure readings to
your vehicle. The low tire pressure warning
light will turn on if the tire pressure is
significantly low. Once the light is
illuminated, your tires are under-inflated
and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.
When your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed (If Equipped)
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the tire
pressure monitoring system will continue
to identify an issue to remind you that the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
needs to be repaired and put back on your
vehicle.
To restore the full functionality of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When you Believe your System is not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:
298
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure
warning light
1. Make sure tires are at the proper
pressure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. 2. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’ s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’ s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflatedSolid warning light
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system functionality. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When your temporary spare tire is
installed in this section.
Spare tire in useFlashing warning
light
If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
TPMS malfunction
299
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating your Tires
When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure
How Temperature Affects your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi (14
to 28 kPa) from a cold start situation. If the
vehicle is stationary overnight with the
outside temperature significantly lower
than the daytime temperature, the tire
pressure may decrease approximately 3
psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C) in
ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the TPMS as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the TPMS warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. (If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary.) Check
air pressure in the road tires. If any tire is
under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
300
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING
When a wheel is installed, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials
present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure that any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces
of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel
mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while
your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss of control.
Ib-ft (Nm)
*
Bolt size
100 (135)M12 x 1.5
*
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).
E145950
Wheel pilot boreA
Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.
301
MKZ (CC9)
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS
2.0L ATK iVCT EngineEngine
122Cubic inches
Minimum 87 octaneRequired fuel
1-3-4-2Firing order
Coil on plug (COP)Ignition system
12.3:1Compression
ratio
0.051 in. ± 0.002 in. (1.3 mm ± 0.05 mm)Spark plug gap
302
MKZ (CC9)
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS
2.0L ATK iVCT EngineComponent
FA-1911
Air filter element
1
FL-910-S
Oil filter
2
BXT-96R-500Battery
BXT-96R-590
SP-531
Spark plugs
3
FP-71Cabin air filter
FS-104Seat filter
WW-2200 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-1900 (passenger side)
1
Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe engine damage. The
customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter
element is not used.
2
Only use the specified replacement oil filter. The use of a non-specified oil filter can
result in engine damage.
3
For spark plug replacement, see your authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at
the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 412).
Note: Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications
for your vehicle, such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts. The customer
warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used.
303
MKZ (CC9)
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle
identification number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
304
MKZ (CC9)
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door
latch, next to the driver's seating position.
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.
CodeDescription
JElectronic continuously variable transmission (ECVT),
automatic, power split, shift by wire
305
MKZ (CC9)
Capacities and Specifications
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Ford part name or
equivalent
CapacityItem
PM-20/Motorcraft DOT 4
LV High Perform-
ance Brake Fluid
Between MIN and
MAX on reservoir
Brake fluid
1
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft XL-5
(aerosol) /
CRCSL3151ESB/
Multi-Purpose
Grease (lithium
grease)
Not applicableHinges, latches,
striker plates and
rotors, seat tracks,
fuel filler door
hinge and spring
ESB-M1C93-B
XL-1 / NoneMotorcraft Penet-
rating and Lock
Lubricant
Not applicableLock cylinder
XT-10-QLV MERCON
LV
Motorcraft
MERCON LV ATF
5.7 qt (5.4L)Automatic transmis-
sion fluid
2, 3
WSS-M2C947-AMotorcraft SAE 0W-
20 motor oil or
equivalent
4.5 qt (4.3L)
Hybrid engine oil
4,
5, 6, 7
VC-3DIL-B (U.S.);Motorcraft Orange
Antifreeze/Coolant
Prediluted
8.2 qt (7.8L)Hybrid engine
coolant
8
CVC-3DIL-B (Canada)
/ WSS-M97B44-D2
1 qt (1.0L)Inverter system
controller coolant
8
ZC-32-A (U.S.);Motorcraft Premium
Windshield Washer
Concentrate with
Bitterant(U.S.);
Fill as requiredWindshield washer
fluid CXC-37-(A, B, D, and
F) (Canada)
/ WSB-M8B16-A2
Premium Quality
Windshield Washer
Fluid (Canada)
Not applicableNot applicable13.5 gal (51.1L)Hybrid fuel tank
306
MKZ (CC9)
Capacities and Specifications
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Ford part name or
equivalent
CapacityItem
YN-19 (US);Motorcraft R-134a
Refrigerant
1.39 lb (0.63 kg)
A/C Refrigerant
9
CYN-16-R (Canada)
/ WSH-M17B19-A
YN-32Motorcraft PAG
Refrigerant
Compressor Oil
5.2 oz (153 ml)A/C Refrigerant
Compressor Oil
9
307
MKZ (CC9)
Capacities and Specifications
Ford part number / Ford
specification
Ford part name or
equivalent
CapacityItem
/WSS-M2C31-B2
1
Ford recommends using Motorcraft (Ford) DOT 4 LV High Performance Motor Vehicle
Brake Fluid or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use of any fluid other than the
recommended fluid may cause degraded brake performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry. Contamination with dirt, water,
petroleum products or other materials may result in brake system damage and possible
failure.
2
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
3
Automatic transmissions that require Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid should
only use Motorcraft MERCON LV transmission fluid.
Use of any fluid other than the recommended fluid may cause transmission damage.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter at the correct service interval. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 412).
4
The design of your engine allows for the use of Motorcraft engine oils or equivalent oils
that meet Ford specifications. It is also acceptable to use an engine oil of recommended
viscosity grade that meets API SN requirements and displays the API certification mark
for gasoline engines.
5
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives, cleaners or other engine treatments. They
are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage not covered by Ford warranty.
6
Do not use API S category oils labeled as SN, SM, SL or lower category unless the label
also displays the API certification mark. These oils do not meet the requirements of the
engine and emission system.
7
You can use 5W-20 oil if 0W-20 oil is not available.
8
Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle.
9
See the warning below:
WARNING
The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant R-134a under high
pressure. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Have the air conditioning refrigerant system serviced only by qualified personnel.
308
MKZ (CC9)
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established
by the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and the Canadian Radio
and Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC). Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530, 540-1700, 1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.7, 107.9 MHz
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an FM station, the weaker the
signal and the weaker the reception.
Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.75-inch (12 centimeter) audio compact
discs only. Due to technical incompatibility,
certain recordable and re-recordable
compact discs may not function correctly
when used in Ford CD players.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD
to become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Please
contact an authorized dealer for further
information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection
film attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of the
disc toward the edge. Do not clean in a
circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.
309
MKZ (CC9)
Audio System
MP3 Track and Folder Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 individual tracks and folder
structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
disc playback: MP3 track mode (system
default) and MP3 folder mode.
• MP3 track mode ignores any folder
structure on the MP3 disc. The player
numbers each MP3 track on the disc
(noted by the .mp3 file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 files
may be less depending on the
structure of the CD and exact model
of radio present.
• MP3 folder mode represents a folder
structure consisting of one level of
folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 tracks on the disc (noted by the
.mp3 file extension) and all folders
containing MP3 files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 discs, it
is important to understand how the system
reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present, (files with
extensions other than mp3), only files with
the .mp3 extension are played; other files
are ignored by the system. This enables
you to use the same MP3 disc for a variety
of tasks on your work computer, home
computer and your in-vehicle system.
In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all .mp3 files play, regardless
of being in a specific folder). In folder
mode, the system only plays the .mp3 files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving.
Note: The MyLincoln Touch system
controls most of the audio features. See
Entertainment (page 334).
310
MKZ (CC9)
Audio System
E146318
CD slot: Insert a CD.A
Eject: Eject a CD.B
TUNE +/-: In radio mode, select a frequency band and press one of the TUNE
buttons. The system stops at the first station it finds in that direction. In SIRIUS
mode, select the previous or next channel. If a specific category is selected,
(Jazz, Rock, News, etc.), use the TUNE buttons find to the previous or next
channel in the selected category.
C
Volume: Swipe your finger across bar to adjust the volume level on your system.D
Power: Switch the audio system on and off by pressing the button.E
Seek/Fast Forward/Reverse: Press to go to the previous or next track or
available radio station. Press and hold to either reverse or fast forward through
the current track or to quickly reverse or advance through the radio band in
individual increments.
F
MEDIA HUB
The media hub is located in the center
console and has the following features:
311
MKZ (CC9)
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving.
A
B
H
C
DG
EF
E161890
PhoneA
Navigation (or Information if your vehicle is not equipped with Navigation)B
ClimateC
SettingsD
EV InformationE
HomeF
313
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
InformationG
EntertainmentH
This system uses a four-corner strategy to
provide quick access to several vehicle
features and settings. The touchscreen
provides easy interaction with your cellular
phone, multimedia, climate control and
navigation system. The corners display
any active modes within those menus,
such as phone status or the climate
temperature.
Note: Some features are not available
while your vehicle is moving.
Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 30 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).
PHONE
Press to select any of the following:
• Phone
• Quick Dial
• Phonebook
• History
• Messaging
• Settings
NAVIGATION
Press to select any of the following:
• My Home
• Favorites
• Previous Destinations
• Point of Interest
• Emergency
• Street Address
• Intersection
• City Center
• Map
• Edit Route Cancel Route
CLIMATE
Press to select any of the following:
• Driver Settings
• Recirculated Air
• Auto
• Dual
• Passenger Settings
• A/C
• Defrost
E142607
SETTINGS
Press to select any of the following:
• Clock
• Display
• Sound
• Vehicle
• Settings
• Help
E161716
EV Information
Press to access features
specific to your hybrid or plug-in
hybrid electric vehicle.
E142613
HOME
314
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Press to access your home screen.
Depending on your vehicle’s option
package and software, your screens may
vary in appearance from the descriptions
in this section. Your features may also be
limited depending on your market. Check
with an authorized dealer for availability.
E142608
INFORMATION
Press to select any of the following:
• Services
• Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• Apps
ENTERTAINMENT
Press to select any of the following:
• AM
• FM
• SIRIUS
• CD
• USB
• BT Stereo
• SD Card
• A/V In
Using the Touch-Sensitive Controls
on Your System
To turn a feature on and off, just touch the
graphic with your finger. To get the best
performance from the touch-sensitive
controls:
• Do not press hard on the controls.
They are sensitive to light touch.
• Use your bare finger to touch the
center of a touch-control graphic.
Touching off-center of the graphic may
affect operation of a nearby control.
• Make sure your hands are clean and
dry.
• Keep metal and other conductive
material away from the surface of the
touchscreen as this may cause
electronic interference (for example,
inadvertently turning on a feature other
than the one you meant to turn on).
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your bezel:
• Power: Switch the media or climate
features off and on.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
media.
• Fan: Control the speed of the climate
system fan.
• Seek and Tune buttons: Use as you
normally would in media modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the
entertainment system.
• SOURCE: Touch the word repeatedly
to see all available media modes. The
screen does not change, but you see
the media change in the lower left
status bar.
315
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
• SOUND: Touch the word to access the
Sound menu where you can adjust
settings such as: Bass, Treble,
Midrange, Balance and Fade, DSP
(Digital Signal Processing), THX Deep
Note Demo, Occupancy Mode and
Speed Compensated Volume. (Your
vehicle may not have all of these
sound options.)
• Hazard flasher: Switch the hazard
flashers off and on.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Display
Use a clean, soft cloth such as one used
for cleaning glasses. If dirt or fingerprints
are still visible, apply a small amount of
alcohol to the cloth. Do not pour or spray
alcohol onto the display. Do not use
detergent or any type of solvent to clean
the display.
Support
The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.
Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call: 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.
Safety Information
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as
it could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds under 3 mph (5
km/h).
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.
316
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SIRIUS Travel Link sports
scores, movie times or ski conditions.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).
See the following chart for more specific
examples.
Restricted Features
Pairing a Bluetooth phoneCellular Phone
Adding phonebook contacts or uploading phonebook
contacts (from a USB)
List entries are limited for phone contacts and recent
phone call entries
Editing the keypad codeSystem Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active
Editing wireless settingsWi-Fi and Wireless
Editing the list of wireless networks
Playing videoVideos, Photos and
Graphics
Editing the screen's wallpaper or adding new wallpaper
Composing text messagesText Messages
Viewing received text messages
Editing preset text messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destinationNavigation
Demo navigation route
Adding or editing Address Book entries or Avoid Areas
317
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported
media content. The system also records a
short development log of approximately
10 minutes of all recent system activity.
The log profile and other system data may
be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log remain in your
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in your vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or your vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to your
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada do not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent,
a court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company
and Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the sections on 911 Assist,
Vehicle Health Report, and Traffic,
Directions and Information.
318
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Accessing and Adjusting Modes Through Your Right Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
E145459
The display is located on the right side of
your instrument cluster (A). You can use
your steering wheel controls to view and
make minor adjustments to active modes
without taking your hands off the wheel.
For example:
• In Entertainment mode, you can view
what is now playing, change the audio
source, select memory presets and
make some adjustments.
• In Phone mode, you can accept or
reject an incoming call.
• If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, you can view the current
route or activate a route.
• In climate mode, the driver side
temperature can bet set as well as fan
speed.
• In Efficiency Leaves mode, you can
learn how your vehicle informs you of
your driving efficiency. Press OK to exit
the menu.
E145982
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes:
319
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the
mode.
• Press the left or right arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, Compass appears in the
display instead of Navigation. If you press
the right arrow to go into the Compass
menu, you can see the compass graphic.
The compass displays the direction in
which the vehicle is traveling, not true
direction (for example, if the vehicle is
traveling west, the middle of the compass
graphic displays west; north displays to
the left of west though its true direction is
to the right of west).
Using Voice Recognition
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is in front of you.
The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the lower left status
bar indicating the status of the voice
session (such as Listening, Success, Failed,
Paused or Try Again).
How to Use Voice Commands with Your
System
E142599
Press the voice icon. After the
tone, speak your command
clearly.
These commands can be said at any time
during a voice session
"Cancel"
"Exit"
"Go back"
"List of commands"
"Main menu"
"Next page"
"Previous page"
"What can I say?"
"Help"
320
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
What Can I Say?
To access the available voice commands
for the current session, do one of the
following:
• During a voice session, press the help
icon (?) in the lower left status bar of
the screen.
• Say, "What can I say?" for an on-screen
listing of the possible voice commands
associated with your current voice
session.
• Press the voice icon. After the tone,
say, "Help" for an audible list of
possible voice commands.
Helpful Hints
• Make sure the interior of your vehicle
is as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
• After pressing the voice icon, wait until
after the tone sounds and Listening
appears before saying a command.
Any command spoken before this does
not register with the system.
• Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
• At any time, you can interrupt the
system while it is speaking by pressing
the voice icon.
Accessing a List of Available Commands
• If you use the touchscreen, press the
Settings icon > Help > Voice
Command List.
• If you use the steering wheel control,
press the voice icon. After the tone,
speak your command clearly.
Available voice commands
"Audio list of commands"
"Bluetooth audio list of commands"
"Browse list of commands"
"CD list of commands"
"Climate control list of commands"
"List of commands"
"Navigation list of commands"
*
"Phone list of commands"
"Radio list of commands"
"SD card list of commands"
"Sirius satellite list of commands"
**
"Travel link list of commands"
*
"USB list of commands"
"Voice instructions list of commands"
"Voice settings list of commands"
"Help"
*
This command is only available when
your vehicle is equipped with the
navigation system, and the navigation
system SD card is in the card slot.
**
This command is only available when you
have an active SIRIUS satellite radio
subscription.
321
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice Settings
Voice settings allow you to customize the
level of system interaction, help and
feedback. The system defaults to standard
interaction that uses candidate lists and
confirmation prompts as these provide the
highest level of guidance and feedback.
• Interaction Mode: Novice mode
provides detailed interaction and
guidance while the advanced mode
has less audible interaction and more
tone prompts.
• Confirmation Prompts: The system
uses these short questions to confirm
your voice request. If turned off, the
system simply makes a best guess as
to what you requested. The system
may still occasionally ask you to
confirm settings.
• Phone and Media Candidate Lists:
Candidate lists are lists of possible
results from your voice commands. The
system creates these lists when it has
the same confidence level of several
options based on your voice
command.
To access these settings using the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Settings icon > Settings >
then Voice Control.
2. Select from the following:
• Interaction Mode
• Confirmation Prompts
• Media Candidate Lists
• Phone Candidate Lists
• Voice Control Volume.
To access these settings using voice
commands:
1. Press the voice icon. Wait for the
prompt "Please say a command".
Another tone sounds to let you know
the system is listening.
2. Say any of the following commands:
Voice settings using voice commands
"Confirmation prompts off"
"Confirmation prompts on"
"Interaction mode advanced"
"Interaction mode novice"
"Media candidate lists off"
"Media candidate lists on"
"Phone candidate lists off"
"Phone candidate lists on"
"Help"
Using Voice Commands with the
Touchscreen Options
Your voice system has a dual mode
feature which allows you to switch
between using voice commands and
making on-screen selections. This is
available only when the system displays
a list of candidates generated during a
voice session. For example, when entering
in a street address or trying to call a
contact from the phone you paired to the
system.
322
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
SETTINGS
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
ClockA
DisplayB
SoundC
VehicleD
SettingsE
HelpF
E142607
Under this menu, you can set
your clock, access and adjust
the display, sound and vehicle
settings as well as access settings for
specific modes or the help feature.
Clock
Note: You cannot manually set the date.
Your vehicle’s GPS does this for you.
Note: If the battery has been
disconnected, your vehicle needs to
acquire a GPS signal to update the clock.
Once your vehicle acquires the signal, it
may take a few minutes for the update to
display the correct time.
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Clock.
2. Press + and - to adjust the time.
323
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
From this screen, you can also make other
adjustments such as 12-hour or 24-hour
mode, activate GPS time synchronization
and have the system automatically update
new time zones.
You can also turn the outside air
temperature display off and on. It appears
at the top center of the touchscreen, next
to the time and date.
The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.
Display
You can adjust the touchscreen display
through the touchscreen or by pressing
the voice button on your steering wheel
controls and when prompted, say, "Display
settings".
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Display, to access and make
adjustments using the
touchscreen.
• Brightness allows you to make the
screen display brighter or dimmer.
• Auto DIM, when set to On, lets you
use the Auto Dim Manual Offset
feature. When set to Off, screen
brightness does not change.
• Mode allows you to set the screen to
a certain brightness or have the system
automatically change based on the
outside light level, or turn the display
off.
• If you select AUTO or NIGHT, you
have the options of turning the
display's Auto Dim feature on or off
and changing the Auto Dim Manual
Offset feature.
• Auto Dim Manual Offset allows you
to adjust screen dimming as the
outside lighting conditions change
from day to night. This feature also
allows you to adjust screen brightness
using the instrument panel dimming
control.
• Edit Wallpaper
• You can have your touchscreen
display the default photo or upload
your own.
Uploading Photos for Your Home Screen
Wallpaper
Note: You cannot load photos directly
from your camera. You must access the
photos either from your USB mass storage
device or from an SD card.
Note: Photographs with extremely large
dimensions (such as 2048 x 1536) may not
be compatible and appear as a blank
(black) image on the display.
Your system allows you to upload and
view up to 32 photos.
E142607
To access, press the Settings
icon > Display > Edit Wallpaper,
and then follow the system
prompts to upload your photographs.
Only the photograph(s), which meets the
following conditions, display:
• Compatible file formats are as follows:
.jpg, .gif, .png, .bmp
• Each file must be 1.5 MB or less.
• Recommended dimensions: 800 x 384
324
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Sound
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Sound,
then select from the following:
Sound
Bass
Midrange
Treble
Set Balance and Fade
DSP
*
THX Deep Note Demo
*
Occupancy Mode
*
Speed Compensated Volume
*
Your vehicle may not have these sound
settings.
Vehicle
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Vehicle, then select from the
following:
• Ambient Lighting
• Vehicle Health Report
• Rear View Camera
• Enable Valet Mode.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
When you turn this feature on, ambient
lighting illuminates footwells and
cupholders with a choice of colors. To
access and make adjustments:
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Ambient Lighting.
2. Touch the desired color.
3. Use the scroll bar to increase or
decrease the intensity.
To turn the feature on or off, press the
power button.
Vehicle Health Report
Turn Automatic Reminders on and off and
set the mileage interval at which you
would like to receive the reports. Press ?
for more information on these selections.
When done making your selections, press
Run Vehicle Health Report Now if you
want your report.
You can find more information on Vehicle
Health Report in this chapter. See
Information (page 365).
Rear View Camera
This menu allows you to access settings
for your rear view camera.
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Vehicle
> Rear View Camera, then
select from the following
settings:
• Rear Camera Delay
• Visual Park Aid Alert
• Guidelines.
You can find more information on the rear
view camera in another chapter. See Rear
View Camera (page 188).
325
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Enable Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.
You can create your own four-digit PIN to
lock and unlock the system.
E142607
1. Press the Settings icon > Vehicle >
Enable Valet Mode.
2. When prompted, enter a four-digit PIN.
After you press Continue, the system locks
until you enter the PIN again.
Note: If the system locks, and you need
to reset the PIN, enter 3681 and the
system unlocks.
Settings
Access and adjust system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
System
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > System, then select
from the following:
System
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish
or French.
Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Adjust the volume of voice prompts from the system.System Prompt Volume
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made
through the touchscreen.
Touch Screen Button Beep
Select to have the system beep to confirm button choices
made through the climate or audio system.
Touch Panel Button Beep
Have the touchscreen keyboard display in QWERTY or
ABC format.
Keyboard Layout
Install any downloaded applications or view the current
software licenses.
Install Applications
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal
settings and personal data.
Master Reset
326
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Voice Control
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Voice Control, then
select from the following:
Voice control
Standard interaction mode provides more detailed inter-
action and guidance. Advanced mode has less audible
interaction and more tone prompts.
Interaction Mode
Have the system ask you short questions if it has not
clearly heard or understood your request.
*
Confirmation Prompts
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at
your request with these turned off.
Media Candidate Lists
Candidate lists are possible results from your voice
commands. The system simply makes a best guess at
your request with these turned off.
Phone Candidate Lists
This allows you to adjust the system’ s voice volume level.Voice Control Volume
*
Even with confirmation prompts turned off, the system may occasionally ask you to
confirm settings
Media Player
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Media Player, then
select from the following:
327
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Media player
When this feature is on, the system automatically switches
to the media source upon initial connection. This allows
you to listen to music during the indexing process. When
this feature is off, the system does not automatically switch
to the inserted media source.
Autoplay
Select to connect, disconnect, add or delete a device.
You can also set a device as your favorite so that the
system automatically attempts to connect to that device
at every ignition cycle.
Bluetooth Devices
When this feature is on, the system automatically indexes
media on your connected Bluetooth device.
Index Bluetooth Audio
Devices
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote
Database.
Gracenote Database Info
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplies
metadata information for your music files. This overrides
information from your device. This feature defaults to off.
Gracenote Mgmt
With this feature on, the Gracenote Database supplied
cover art for your music files. This overrides any art from
your device. This feature defaults to Media Player.
Cover Art Priority
Navigation
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation, then
select from the following:
Navigation
Turn breadcrumbs on and off.Map Preferences
Have the system display your turn list top to bottom or
bottom to top.
Turn the Parking POI notification on and off.
328
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation
Choose to have the system display the Shortest, Fastest
or most Ecological route first. If you set Always Use
Preferred Route to Yes, the system uses the selected
route type to calculate only one route to the desired
destination. Always Use Preferred Route bypasses route
selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on the preferred route setting.
Eco Time Penalty allows you to select a low, medium or
high cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.
Route Preferences
Have the system avoid freeways.
Have the system avoid tollroads.
Have the system avoid ferries or car trains.
Have the system use HOV (high-occupancy vehicle) lanes.
Have the system use guidance prompts.Navigation Preferences
Have the system automatically fill-in State/Province
information.
Have the system display areas where roadwork occurs.Traffic Preferences
Have the system display incident icons.
Have the system display areas where difficult driving
conditions may occur.
Have the system display areas where snow and ice on
the road may occur.
Have the system display any smog alerts.
Have the system display weather warnings.
Have the system display where there may be reduced
visibility.
Have the system turn on your radio for traffic announce-
ments.
Enter specific areas that you would like to avoid on
planned navigation routes.
Avoid Areas
329
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Phone
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Phone, then select
from the following:
Phone
Connect, disconnect, add or delete a device, as well as
save it as a favorite.
Bluetooth Devices
Turn Bluetooth on and off.Bluetooth
Have all calls go directly to your voice mail and not ring
inside your vehicle. With this feature turned on, text
message notifications are also suppressed and do not
ring inside your vehicle.
Do Not Disturb
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Information
(page 365).
911 Assist
Select the type of notification for phone calls - ring tone,
beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Phone Ringer
Select the type of notification for text messages - alert
tone, beep, text to speech, or have it be silent.
Text Message Notification
If compatible with your phone, you can adjust your internet
data connection. Select to make your connection profile
with the personal area network or to turn off your
connection. You can also choose to adjust your settings
or have the system always connect, never connect when
roaming or query on connect. Press ? for more information.
Internet Data Connection
Access features, such as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add contacts from your
phone as well as delete or upload your phonebook.
Manage Phonebook
Have the system alert you when in Roaming mode.Roaming Warning
330
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Wireless & Internet
Your system has a Wi-Fi feature that
creates a wireless network within your
vehicle, thereby allowing other devices
(such as personal computers or phones)
in your vehicle to speak to each other,
share files or play games. Using this Wi-Fi
feature, everyone in your vehicle can also
gain access the internet if you have a USB
mobile broadband connection inside your
vehicle, your phone supports personal
area networking and if you park outside a
wireless hotspot.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Wireless & Internet,
then select from the following:
Wi-fi
Wi-Fi Network (Client) Mode turns the Wi-Fi feature on
and off in your vehicle. Make sure you turn it on for
connectivity purposes.
Wi-Fi Settings
Choose a Wireless Network allows you to use a previ-
ously stored wireless network. You can categorize by
alphabetical listing, priority and signal strength. You can
also choose to search for a network, connect to a network,
disconnect from a network, receive more information,
prioritize a network or delete a network.
Gateway (Access Point) Mode makes SYNC an access
point for a phone or a computer when turned on. This
forms the local area network within your vehicle for things,
such as game playing, file transfer and internet browsing.
Press ? for more information.
Gateway (Access Point) Settings allows you to view and
change settings for using SYNC as the internet gateway.
Gateway (Access Point) Device List allows you to view
recent connections to your Wi-Fi system.
331
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Wi-fi
Instead of using Wi-Fi, your system can also use a USB
mobile broadband connection to access the internet. (You
must turn on your mobile broadband device on your
personal computer before connecting it to the system.)
This screen allows you to set up what is your typical area
for your USB mobile broadband connection. (USB mobile
broadband settings may not display if the device is already
on.) You can select the following: Country, Carrier, Phone
Number, User Name and Password.
USB Mobile Broadband
Shows you the currently paired devices as well as giving
you your typical Bluetooth options to connect, disconnect,
set as favorite, delete and add device. Bluetooth is a
registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG.
Bluetooth Settings
Choose your connection methods and change them as
needed. You can select to Change Order and have the
system either always attempt to connect using a USB
mobile broadband or using Wi-Fi.
Prioritize Connection
Methods
E142626
The
Wi-Fi
CERTIFIED Logo is a certification mark of
the Wi-Fi Alliance.
Help
E142607
Press the Settings icon > Help,
then select from the following:
Help
View your vehicle's current location, if your vehicle is
equipped with navigation. If your vehicle is not equipped
with navigation, you do not see this button.
Where Am I?
Touchscreen system serial numberSystem Information
Your vehicle identification number (VIN)
Touchscreen system software version
332
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Help
Navigation system version
Map database version
Sirius satellite radio ESN
Gracenote Database Information and Library version
View the licenses for any software and applications
installed on your system.
Software Licenses
Certain features are not accessible when your vehicle is
moving.
Driving Restrictions
Turn on and turn off the 911 Assist feature. See Informa-
tion (page 365).
911 Assist
In Case of Emergency (ICE) Quick Dial: allows you to
save up to two numbers as ICE contacts for quick access
if there is an emergency. Select Edit to access your
phonebook and then select the desired contacts. The
numbers then appear as options on this screen for the
ICE 1 and ICE 2 buttons. The ICE contacts you select
appear at the end of the 911 Assist call process.
View categorized lists of voice commands.Voice Command List
To access Help using the voice
commands, press the voice button, then,
after the tone, say "Help". The system
provides allowable voice commands for
the current mode.
333
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
ENTERTAINMENT
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
E161892
AM 1 and AM ASTA
FM 1, FM 2 and FM ASTB
SIRIUSC
CDD
USBE
Touch this button to scroll down for more options, such as SD Card, BT Stereo
and A/V In
F
These buttons change with the media mode you are in.G
Radio memory presets and CD controls.H
Note: Some features may not be available
in your area. Contact an authorized dealer
for more information.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Browsing Device Content
When listening to audio on a device, you
can browse through other devices without
having to change sources. For example, if
you are currently listening to audio on an
SD card, you can browse all the artists that
are stored on your USB device.
334
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
E142599
Press the voice icon on the
steering wheel. When prompted,
you can say:
"BROWSE" within devices
"Browse"
*
"Browse <league> games"
**
"Browse <Sirius category> channels"
**
"Browse SD card"
"Browse Sirius channel guide"
**
"Browse USB"
"Help"
*
If you only say, "Browse", you can then
say any commands in the following chart.
**
This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to Sirius satellite
radio.
"BROWSE"
"<League> Games"
*
"<Sirius category> channels"
*
"SD card"
**
"Sirius Channel Guide"
*
"BROWSE"
"USB"
**
"Help"
*
This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to Sirius satellite
radio.
**
For more commands in SD card or USB
mode, see the "SD Card and USB Port"
section of this chapter.
Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command. For example, if you are listening
to music on a USB device, then want to
switch to a satellite radio channel, simply
press the voice button on the steering
wheel controls and say the name of the
Sirius station (such as, "the Highway"). The
following voice commands are available
at the top level of the voice session no
matter which current audio source you are
listening to (such as a USB device or Sirius
satellite radio).
Note: This is only available when your
MyLincoln Touch system language is set
to North American English.
Sample commands
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<530-1710>"
"<Channel name>"
*
"AM <530-1710>"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
335
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Sample commands
"Play [album] <name>"
**
"Play [artist] <name>"
**
"Play [genre] <name>"
**
"Play [playlist] <name>"
**
"Play [song] <name>"
**
"Play <name>"
"Play <name (song or album)> by <artist
name>"
"Sirius <0-223>"
*
"Sports games"
*
*
This command is only usable if you have
an active subscription to Sirius satellite
radio.
**
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional. For
example, if you say, "Play Metallica", this
is the same as the voice command, "Play
[artist] <name>".
AM/FM Radio
E142611
Touch the AM or FM tab to listen
to the radio.
To change between AM and FM presets,
just touch the AM or FM tab.
Memory Presets
Save a station by pressing and holding
one of the memory preset areas. There is
a brief mute while the radio saves the
station. Sound returns when finished.
HD Radio
Touch this button to turn HD Radio on. The
light on the button illuminates when the
feature is on. HD Radio allows you to
receive radio broadcasts digitally, where
available, providing free, crystal-clear
sound. See HD Radio information later in
this chapter.
Scan
Touch this button to go to the next strong
AM or FM radio station. The light on the
button illuminates when the feature is on.
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
336
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Set PTY for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You
can then choose to either seek or scan for
the stations playing that category.
RDS Text Display
This allows you to view the information
broadcast by FM stations.
AST
AST (Autostore) allows you to have the
system automatically store the six
strongest stations in your current location.
TAG Button
This feature is available when HD Radio
is on, and allows you to tag a song to
download later. When you select On, TAG
appears on-screen when HD Radio is
active. You can touch TAG to save the
information of the song that is playing.
When you plug in your portable music
player, the information transfers, if
supported by your device. When you are
connected to iTunes®, the tags appear to
remind you of the songs you would like to
download. See HD Radio information later
in this chapter.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to enter the desired
station number manually. Touch Enter
when you are done.
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD Radio logo blinks when acquiring
a digital station and stays solid when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.
337
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
TAG allows you to save a song to
download later when you are on an
acquired HD Radio station and the feature
is on. To turn the feature on and use it:
1. Press AM or FM > Options > TAG
Button > On.
2. When you hear a song you like, touch
TAG.
3. The system automatically saves the
song's information and transfers it to
your portable music player (if
supported) when you connect it to the
system. The system automatically
transfers the tag to your player (if
already connected) and a pop-up
confirms the transfer.
4. When you access iTunes with your
portable music player, the tags appear
to you as a reminder. The system
allows you to tag up to approximately
100 songs. For a list of devices that
support tagging, see
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.
Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access the saved station if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.
338
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-
HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is
an HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version.
Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight
sound change when the station changes from analog to
digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound
or digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
339
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is
a broadcast issue.
This is poor time alignment
by the radio broadcaster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
No action required. The
reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting
between analog and digital
audio.
Sound fading or blending in
and out.
No action required. This is
normal behavior. Wait until
the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not
available until the HD Radio
broadcast is decoded. Once
decoded, the audio is avail-
able.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2
or HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.
No action required. The
station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored
multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your
current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.
Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.
*
Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.
There is no text information
shown for currently selected
frequency.
No action required. This is
normal behavior.
Pressing Scan disables
HD2-HD7 channel search.
HD2-HD7 stations not found
when Scan is pressed.
*
http://www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences
340
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of iBiquity Digital Corp. Ford Motor
Company and iBiquity Digital Corp. are not
responsible for the content sent using HD
Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the following
commands.
If you are not listening to the radio, press
the voice button and, after the tone, say
"Radio", then any of the following
commands.
"RADIO"
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD"
1
"<530-1710>"
"AM"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"AM preset <#>"
"Browse"
2
"FM"
"RADIO"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
1
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"
"FM 1"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"FM 2"
"FM 2 preset <#>"
"HD <#>"
1
"Preset <#>"
"Radio off"
"Radio on"
"Set PTY"
"Tune"
3
"Help"
1
If available.
2
If you have said "Browse", see the
"Browse" chart later in this section.
3
If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.
341
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"TUNE"
"<530-1710>"
"<87.9-107.9>"
"<87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
"AM"
"AM <530-1710>"
"AM autoset"
"AM autoset preset <#>"
"AM preset <#>"
"FM"
"FM <87.9-107.9>"
"FM <87.9-107.9> HD <#>"
*
"FM autoset"
"FM autoset preset <#>"
"FM preset <#>"
"FM 1"
"FM 1 preset <#>"
"FM 2"
"FM 2 preset <#>"
"HD <#>"
*
"Preset <#>"
"Help"
*
If available.
Sirius® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
SIRIUS tab.
Memory Presets
Save a channel by pressing and holding
one of the memory preset areas. There is
a brief mute while the radio saves the
channel. Sound returns when finished.
ALERT
Save the current song, artist, or team as a
favorite. The system alerts you when it
plays again on any channel.
Replay
Replay audio on the current channel. You
can replay approximately 45 minutes of
audio as long as you have remained tuned
to the current station. Changing stations
erases the previous audio.
While in replay mode:
• Press and release the seek buttons to
hear the previous or next song.
• Press and hold the seek buttons to
reverse or fast forward in the current
track.
• Press play or pause to play or pause
the audio.
• Press Replay to return to live audio if
you have been using the feature to
replay audio.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of channels.
342
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Set Category for Seek/Scan
This allows you to select a category of
music you would like to search for. You
can then choose to either seek or scan for
the stations playing that category.
Parental Lockout
This allows you to lock and unlock
channels, change or reset your PIN or
unlock all channels. To use this feature,
you need your initial PIN, which is 1234.
Artist/Title/Team Alerts
This feature allows you to select Artists,
Titles and Teams that you would like the
system to alert you to when they are
playing on other channels. Press Edit
Alerts to delete or turn off alerts. You can
also set all alerts to on or off. When an
alert appears on the screen, you can
choose to Tune to the channel, to Cancel
the alert or to Disable Alerts. If you are
listening to a sporting event, you can save
your favorite teams so that the system can
alert you when they are playing on a
satellite radio channel.
Note: Sirius does not support the Alert
feature on all channels. Ford Motor
Company shall not be responsible for Alert
feature variation.
Electronic Serial Number (ESN)
Sirius requires this number when
communicating with you about your
account.
Direct Tune
Touch this button to enter the desired
satellite channel number manually. Touch
Enter when you are done.
Browse
Touch this button to view a list of all
available stations. Scroll to see more
categories. Touch the station you want to
listen to.
Touch Skip if you want to skip this
channel.
Touch Lock if you do not want anyone to
listen to this channel.
Touch Title or Artist to see song and
artists on other stations.
343
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Sirius Satellite Radio Information
Note: Sirius reserves the unrestricted right
to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its
prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E142593
Sirius satellite radio is a subscription-based
satellite radio service that broadcasts a
variety of music, sports, news, weather,
traffic and entertainment programming.
Your factory-installed Sirius satellite radio
system includes hardware and a limited
subscription term that begins on the date
of sale or lease of your vehicle. See an
authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of Sirius satellite radio channels, and
other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.sirius.ca in Canada, or call Sirius at
1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. The ESN
is on the System Information Screen (SR
ESN:XXXXXXXXXXXX). To access your
ESN, touch the bottom left corner of the
touchscreen. Touch SIRIUS > Options.
344
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Sirius Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and
other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the
interference and the audio system may mute.
Satellite radio signal interfer-
ence
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseRadio display
No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.
Acquiring...
If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your
receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for
service.
There is an internal module
or system failure present.
Sat Fault/Sirius System
Failure.
Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.
The channel is no longer
available.
Invalid Channel.
Contact Sirius at 1-888-539-
7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.
Your subscription does not
include this channel.
Unsubscribed Channel.
345
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseRadio display
The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the
Sirius satellite or Sirius
tower to your vehicle
antenna.
No Signal.
No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel
programming in progress.
Updating.
Contact Sirius at 1-888-539-
7474 to resolve subscription
issues.
Your satellite service is no
longer available.
Call Sirius
1-888-539-7474.
Use the channel guide to
turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the
selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check Channel
Guide.
No action required.Sirius has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.
Subscription Updated.
Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
controls. When prompted, say any of the
following commands.
If you are not listening to Sirius satellite
radio, press the voice button and, after the
tone, say "Sirius", then any of the following
commands.
"SIRIUS"
"<Channel name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT preset <#>"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 Preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
346
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"SIRIUS"
"Sirius <0-223>"
"Sirius off"
"Sirius on"
"Sports game"
*
"Tune"
**
"Help"
*
If you have said "Sports game", see the
following "Sports game" chart.
**
If you have said "Tune", see the following
"Tune" chart.
"SPORTS GAME"
"Tune to the <college name> game"
"Tune to the <team city> game"
"Tune to the <team city> <team name>
game"
"Tune to the <team name> game"
"Help"
"TUNE"
"<Channel Name>"
"Preset <#>"
"SAT"
"SAT 1"
"SAT 1 preset <#>"
"SAT 2"
"TUNE"
"SAT 2 preset <#>"
"SAT 3"
"SAT 3 preset <#>"
"Sirius <0-223>"
"Help"
CD
E142611
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select the
CD tab.
You can also advance and reverse the
current track or current folder, if
applicable.
Repeat
Touch this button to repeat the currently
playing track, all tracks on the disc or turn
the feature off if already on.
Shuffle
Touch this button to play the tracks or
entire albums in random order, or turn the
feature off if already on.
Scan
Touch this button to hear a brief sampling
of all available tracks.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information.
347
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Options
Sound Settings
Touch this button to adjust settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Compression
Touch this button to turn the compression
feature off and on.
Browse
Touch this button to look through all
available CD tracks.
CD Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a CD, press the
voice button and, after the tone, say "CD",
then any of the following commands.
"CD"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play next track"
"Play previous track"
"Play track <1-512>"
"Repeat"
"Repeat folder"
*
"Repeat off"
"Repeat track"
"Shuffle"
"Shuffle CD"
*
"Shuffle folder"
*
"Shuffle off"
"Help"
*
This applies to WMA or MP3 files only.
SD Card Slot and USB Port
SD Card
Note: Your SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, press the card in
and the system ejects it. Do not attempt
to pull the card to remove it as this could
cause damage.
Note: The navigation system also uses
this card slot. See Navigation (page 379).
348
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
E142619
The SD card slot is located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press
the lower left corner of the touchscreen.
E142620
SD logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
USB Port
E142621
The USB ports are located either in the
center console or behind a small access
door in the instrument panel. To access
and play music from your device, press
the lower left corner of the touchscreen.
This feature allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks, flash
drives or thumb drives, and charge devices
if they support this feature.
In order to playback video from your iPod
or iPhone, you must have a special
combination USB/RCA composite video
cable (which you can buy from Apple).
When you connect the cable to your iPod
or iPhone, plug the other end into both the
RCA jacks and the USB port.
Playing Music from Your Device
E142611
Insert your device and select the
SD Card or USB tab once the
system recognizes it. You can
then select from the following options:
Repeat
This feature replays the currently playing
song or album.
349
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Shuffle
Touch this button to play music on the
selected album or folder in random order.
Similar Music
This feature allows you to choose music
similar to what is currently playing.
More Info
Touch this button to see disc information
such as current track, artist name, album
and genre.
Options
Touch this button to view and adjust
various media settings.
Sound Settings allows you to adjust
settings for:
• Bass
• Midrange
• Treble
• Balance and Fade
• THX Deep Note Demo
• DSP (Digital Signal processing)
• Occupancy Mode
• Speed Compensated Volume.
Note: Your vehicle may not have all these
sound settings.
Media Player Settings allows you to select
more settings, which is under Media
Player. See Settings (page 323).
Device Information displays software and
firmware information about the currently
connected media device.
Update Media Index indexes your device
when you connect it for the first time and
each time the content changes (such as
adding or removing tracks) to make sure
you have the latest voice commands
available for all media on the device.
Browse
This feature allows you to view the
contents of the device. It also allows you
to search by categories, such as genre,
artist or album.
If you want to view song information such
as Title, Artist, File, Folder, Album, and
Genre, touch the on-screen album art.
You can also touch What’s Playing to hear
how the system pronounces the current
band and song. This can be helpful when
using voice commands to make sure the
system correctly plays your request.
Playing Video from Your Device
To access and play video from your
device, your vehicle's transmission must
be in position P with the ignition in
accessory mode. See Starting and
Stopping the Engine (page 147).
SD Card and USB Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a USB
device or an SD card, press the
voice button on the steering
wheel controls. When prompted, say any
of the following commands.
If you are not listening to a USB device or
an SD card, press the voice button and,
after the tone, say "USB" or "SD card", then
any of the following commands.
350
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Browse"
*
"Next"
"Pause"
"Play"
"Play album <name>"
"Play all"
"Play artist <name>"
"Play audiobook <name>"
"Play author <name>"
"Play composer <name>"
"Play folder <name>"
"Play genre <name>"
"Play movie <name>"
**
"Play music video <name>"
**
"Play playlist <name>"
"Play podcast <name>"
"Play podcast episode <name>"
"Play similar music"
"Play song <name>"
"Play TV show <name>"
**
"Play TV show episode <name>"
**
"Play video <name>"
**
"USB" or "SD CARD"
"Play video podcast <name>"
**
"Play video podcast episode <name>"
**
"Play video playlist <name>"
**
"Previous"
"Repeat all"
"Repeat off"
"Repeat one"
"Shuffle"
"Shuffle album"
"Shuffle off"
"What's this?"
"Help"
*
If you have said you would like to browse
your USB or SD card, the system prompts
you to specify what you would like to
browse. When prompted, see the following
"Browse" chart.
**
These commands are only available in
USB mode and are device-dependent.
"BROWSE"
"Album <name>"
"All albums"
"All artists"
"All audiobooks"
"All authors"
351
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"BROWSE"
"All composers"
"All folders"
"All genres"
"All movies"
*
"All music videos"
*
"All playlists"
"All podcasts"
"All songs"
"All TV shows"
*
"All video playlists"
*
"All video podcasts"
*
"All videos"
*
"Artist <name>"
"Audiobook <name>"
"Author <name>"
"Composer <name>"
"Folder <name>"
"Genre <name>"
"Playlist <name>"
"Podcast <name>"
"TV show <name>"
*
"Video <name>"
*
"BROWSE"
"Video playlist <name>"
*
"Video podcast <name>"
*
"Help"
*
This command is only available in USB
mode and is device-dependent.
Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod, Zune™,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. Supported audio formats include
MP3, WMA, WAV and AAC.
It is also able to organize your indexed
media from your playing device by
metadata tags. Metadata tags, which are
descriptive software identifiers embedded
in the media files, provide information
about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC may classify the empty
metadata tags as Unknown.
In order to playback video from your iPod
or iPhone, you must have a special
combination USB/RCA composite video
cable (which you can buy from Apple).
When you connect the cable to your iPod
or iPhone, plug the other end into both the
RCA jacks and the USB port.
352
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Bluetooth Audio
Your system allows you to stream audio
over your vehicle's speakers from your
connected, Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
E142611
To access, press the lower left
corner on the touchscreen, then
select the BT Stereo tab.
Bluetooth Audio Voice Commands
E142599
If you are listening to a Bluetooth
audio device, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
control. When prompted, say "Next song",
"Pause", "Play" or "Previous song".
If you are not listening to a Bluetooth audio
device, press the voice button and, after
the tone, say "Next song", "Pause", "Play"
or "Previous song".
A/V Inputs
WARNINGS
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving.
WARNINGS
For safety reasons, do not connect
or adjust the settings on your
portable music player while your vehicle
is moving.
Store the portable music player in a
secure location, such as the center
console or the glove box, when your
vehicle is moving. Hard objects may
become projectiles in a crash or sudden
stop, which may increase the risk of
serious injury. The audio extension cable
must be long enough to allow the portable
music player to be safely stored while your
vehicle is moving.
E142622
Your A/V inputs allow you to connect an
auxiliary audio/video source (such as a
gaming systems or a personal camcorder)
by connecting RCA cords (not included)
to these input jacks. The jacks are yellow,
red and white and are located either
behind a small access door on the
instrument panel or in your center console.
You can also use the A/V inputs as an
auxiliary input jack to play music from your
portable music player over your vehicle's
speakers. Plug in your 1/8 inch (3.5
millimeter) RCA adapter into the two left
A/V input jacks (red and white).
353
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Press the lower left corner of the
touchscreen, and then select A/V In.
To use the auxiliary input jack feature,
make sure that your portable music player
is designed for use with headphones and
that it is fully charged. You also need an
audio extension cable with stereo male
1/8-inch (3.5 millimeter) connectors at one
end and a RCA jack at the other.
1. Switch off the engine, radio and
portable music player. Set the parking
brake and put the transmission in
position P.
2. Attach one end of the audio extension
cable to the headphone output of your
player and the other end into the
adapter in one of the two left A/V input
jacks (white or red) inside the center
console.
3. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select either a tuned FM
station or a CD (if there is a CD already
loaded into the system).
4. Adjust the volume as desired.
5. Turn the portable music player on and
adjust the volume to ½ the maximum.
6. Press the lower left corner on the
touchscreen. Select the A/V In tab.
(You should hear audio from your
portable music player although it may
be low.)
7. Adjust the sound on your portable
music player until it reaches the level
of the FM station or CD by switching
back and forth between the controls.
In order to playback video from your iPod
or iPhone, you must have a special
combination USB/RCA composite video
cable (which you can buy from Apple).
When you connect the cable to your iPod
or iPhone, plug the other end into both the
RCA jacks and the USB port.
Troubleshooting
• Do not connect the audio input jack to
a line level output. The jack only works
correctly with devices that have a
headphone output with a volume
control.
• Do not set the portable music player's
volume level higher than is necessary
to match the volume of the CD or FM
radio as this causes distortion and
reduces sound quality.
• If the music sounds distorted at lower
listening levels, turn the portable music
player volume down. If the problem
persists, replace or recharge the
batteries in the portable media player.
• Control the portable media player in
the same manner when used with
headphones, as the auxiliary input jack
does not provide control (such as Play
or Pause) over the attached portable
media player.
354
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
PHONE
A
B
C
D
E
F
E161968
PhoneA
Quick DialB
PhonebookC
HistoryD
MessagingE
SettingsF
Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. Once you pair your
phone, you can access many options using
the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your
cellular phone’s functionality.
At a minimum, most cellular phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call
• Ending a call
• Using privacy mode
• Dialing a number
• Redialing
• Call waiting notification
• Caller ID.
355
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your device’s manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
Pairing Your Phone for the First Time
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
hand-held device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving
The first thing you must do to use the
phone features of SYNC is to pair your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone with
SYNC. This allows you to use your phone
in a hands-free manner.
Note: Put the transmission in position P.
Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Touch Add Phone in the upper left
corner of the touchscreen. Find SYNC
appears on the screen, and instructs
you to begin the pairing process from
your device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
and that your cellular phone is in the
proper mode. See your device’s
manual if necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the
next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your device's
manual and visit the website.
Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Put the transmission in position P.
Turn on your vehicle ignition and the radio.
1. Press the Phone corner of the
touchscreen > Settings > BT Devices
> Add Device.
2. Make sure that Bluetooth is set to On
and that your cellular phone is in the
proper mode. See your device’s
manual if necessary.
Note: Select SYNC, and a six-digit PIN
appears on your device.
356
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
3. If prompted to enter a PIN on your
device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN
displayed on the touchscreen. Skip the
next step.
4. When prompted on your phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cellular phone.
5. The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.
SYNC may prompt you with more phone
options. For more information on your
phone's capability, see your device's
manual and visit the website.
Making Calls
E142599
Press the voice button on your
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say, "Call <name>" or
say "Dial", then the desired number.
E142632
To end the call or exit phone
mode, press this phone button.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Call information appears in the
display if it is available.
Accept the call by pressing
Accept on the touchscreen or
by pressing this phone button
on your steering wheel controls.
E142632
Reject the call by pressing
Reject on the touchscreen or by
pressing this phone button on
your steering wheel controls.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC
logs it as a missed call.
Phone Menu Options
Press the top left corner on your
touchscreen to select from the following
options:
Phone
Touch this button to access the on-screen
numerical pad to enter a number and
place a call. During an active call, you can
also choose to:
• Mute the call
• Put the call on hold
• Turn on the privacy feature
• Join two calls
• End the call.
Quick Dial
Set up favorite contacts from you
phonebook or history folder.
Phonebook
Touch this button to access and call any
contacts in your previously downloaded
phone book. The system places the entries
in alphabetical categories summarized at
the top of the screen.
To turn on contact picture settings, if your
device supports this feature, press Phone
> Settings > Manage Phonebook >
Download photos from Phonebook > On.
357
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
History
After you connect your Bluetooth-enabled
phone to SYNC, you can access any
previously dialed, received or missed calls.
You can also choose to save these to your
Favorites or to Quick Dial.
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
If your phone does not support
downloading call history using Bluetooth,
SYNC keeps track of calls made with the
SYNC system.
Messaging
Send text messages using your
touchscreen. See Text messaging later in
this section.
Settings
Touch this button to access various phone
settings, such turning Bluetooth on and
off, managing your phonebook and more.
See Phone settings later in this section.
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds
over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: SYNC does not download read text
messages from your phone.
You can send and receive text messages
using Bluetooth, read them aloud and
translate text messaging acronyms, such
as LOL.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Select Messaging.
3. Choose from the following:
• Listen (speaker icon)
• Dial
• Send Text
• View
• Delete.
Composing a Text Message
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature.
It is unavailable when your vehicle is
traveling at speeds over 3 mph (5 km/h).
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are
phone-dependent features.
1. Touch the top left corner of the display
to access the Phone menu.
2. Touch Messaging > Send Text.
3. Enter a phone number or choose from
your phonebook.
4. You can select from the following
options:
• Send, which sends the message as it
is.
• Edit Text, which allows you to
customize the pre-defined message
or create a message on your own.
You can then preview the message, verify
the recipient as well as update the
message list.
358
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Text message options
I’ll call you back in a few minutes.
I just left, I’ll be there soon.
Can you give me a call?
I’m on my way.
I’m running a few minutes late.
I’m ahead of schedule, so I’ll be there
early.
I’m outside.
I’ll call you when I get there.
OK
Yes
No
Thanks
Stuck in traffic.
Call me later.
LOL
Receiving a Text Message
Note: If you select View and your vehicle
is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h), the
system offers to read the message to you
instead of allowing you to view it while
driving.
When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if
supported by your phone. You can press:
• View to view the text message.
• Listen for SYNC to read the message
to you.
• Dial to call the contact.
• Ignore to exit the screen.
Phone Settings
Press Phone > Settings.
Bluetooth Devices
Touch this tab to connect, disconnect, add
or delete a device, as well as save it as a
favorite.
Bluetooth
Touch this tab to turn Bluetooth off or on.
Do Not Disturb
Touch this tab if you want all calls to go
directly to your voice mail and not ring in
the vehicle. When this feature is on, text
message notifications do not ring inside
the cabin either.
911 Assist
Turn on or turn off the 911 Assist feature.
See Information (page 365).
Phone Ringer
Select the ring tone you want to hear when
you receive a call. Choose from possible
system ring tones, your currently paired
phone’s ring tone, a beep, text-to-speech
or a silent notification.
359
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Text Message Notification
Select a text message notification, if
supported by your phone. Choose from
possible system alert tones, text-to-speech
or silent.
Internet Data Connection
If your phone is compatible, use this
screen to adjust your internet data
connection. Select to make your
connection profile with the personal area
network or to turn off your connection. You
can also choose to adjust your settings or
have the system always connect, never
connect when roaming or query on
connect. Press ? for more information.
Manage Phonebook
Touch this button to access features such
as automatic phonebook download,
re-download your phonebook, add
contacts from your phone as well as delete
or upload your phonebook.
Roaming Warning
Touch this button to have the system alert
you when your phone is in roaming mode.
Phone Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
"PHONE"
"Call"
"Call <name>"
"Call <name> at home"
"Call <name> at work"
"Call <name> on cell"
"Call <name> on other"
"Call voicemail"
"Dial"
"Do not disturb off"
"Do not disturb on"
"Forward text messages"
"Go to hands free"
*
"Hold call off"
*
"Hold on"
*
"Join calls"
*
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Messages"
**
"Mute call"
*
"Pair phone"
"Privacy on"
*
"Read text message"
360
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"PHONE"
"Reply to text messages"
"Turn ringer off"
"Turn ringer on"
"Unmute call"
*
"Help"
*
This command is only available during an
active call.
**
If you say "Messages", see the following
"Messages" chart for additional
commands.
"MESSAGES"
"Call"
"Forward text messages"
"Listen to text message <#>"
"Listen to text messages"
"Reply to text messages"
"Help"
ELECTRIC VEHICLE
INFORMATION
E161716
Your system has special electric
vehicle screens, which display
power flow and charge settings.
To access these screens, press
the EV Info button.
E163044
A
PowerA
361
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Power
A
G
F
D
E
B
C
H
J
L K
I
E163015
M
Motor-to-wheel flow shows the direction of power flow between the wheels
and the electric motor.
A
Electric Motor represents the hybrid electric motor. The higher the motor
power is, the larger the circle around this node. Any time the vehicle is ready
to be driven, the motor node illuminates.
B
Battery-to-motor flow
1
shows the direction of power flow between the
high-voltage battery and the electric motor. Flow toward the motor indicates
the battery is providing power to accelerate the vehicle (discharging the battery).
Flow toward the battery indicates the electric motor is providing power to the
battery (charging the battery).
C
Other
2
includes all power usage from the low voltage accessories such as the
climate control fan, headlights and heated seats. The higher the power usage
is from these accessories, the larger the circle around the node. This node
illuminates anytime the vehicle is on since there is always some low level power
in use.
D
Climate
2,3
includes the power usage from the high-voltage climate control
components such as the electric A/C compressor. The higher the power usage
is from these components, the larger the circle around this node.
E
362
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
High voltage battery power represents your high-voltage battery. A circle
illuminates around the node when the high-voltage battery is receiving power
from regenerative braking or engine charging. The higher the power going
into the high-voltage battery, the larger the circle around this node.
F
Fuel represents the fuel tank in the vehicle.G
Fuel-to-engine flow shows flow from the fuel tank to the engine when the
engine is on and using fuel (there are some cases where the engine is on, but
not using any fuel). When the engine is on, but not using fuel, the engine node
is active, but the fuel flow path is off. An example of this is when your foot is
off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle is traveling at a high speed.
H
Engine On due to provides you with the reason(s) the gasoline engine is on.
When the gasoline engine is off, this display does not appear. Engine On due
to reasons displayed by the system are in a chart following this list.
I
Motor-to-engine flow shows the direction of power flow between the engine
and the electric motor. The direction indicates if the engine is providing power
to the high-voltage electrical system, or if the high-voltage electrical system is
providing power to control or start the engine.
J
Engine power represents the gasoline engine. It illuminates only when the
gasoline engine is on. The higher the engine power is, the larger the circle
around this node.
K
Engine-to-wheels flow shows the direction of the power flow between the
engine and the wheels.
L
Drive power represents the power going to the wheels. The higher the wheel
power is, the larger the circle around this node. When the engine is off, drive
power is shown in blue. When the engine is on, drive power is shown in grey.
M
1
The battery-to-motor flow includes battery
power the vehicle is using for acceleration.
It does not include energy the vehicle is
using for accessories (such as air
conditioning, headlights and radio). This
screen displays accessories and climate
usage separately.
2
Accessories indicates electrical power
demands from your vehicle’s accessory
systems. Accessories use power but do
not contribute to making the vehicle move.
The power flow displays power usage from
the climate control system and other
accessories separately.
3
The climate control system may determine
A/C is necessary even when you turn it off.
In this case, you may see some climate
power when the A/C is off.
363
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Engine On due to
The engine is on to warm-up. The vehicle
returns to electric mode when the engine
is warm. This reason may reappear during
a drive or after shutting the vehicle down
for a short period. This is normal operation.
Engine Cold
The engine is on because of the heater
setting. Reduce or turn off the heater
setting to return to electric mode.
Heater Setting
The engine is on because the vehicle
speed exceeds the level for electric mode
operation. Reduce the speed to return to
electric mode.
High Speed
The engine is on when you apply pressure
to the accelerator pedal or when you turn
the speed control on. Reduce pressure on
the accelerator pedal or turn off the speed
control to return to full electric mode.
Acceleration
The engine is on because the vehicle is in
neutral gear. Shift out of neutral gear to
return to electric mode.
Neutral Gear
The engine is on because the vehicle is in
low gear. Shift out of low gear to return to
electric mode.
Low Gear
The engine is on to charge the high-voltage
battery. The vehicle returns to electric
mode once the battery is charged.
Battery Charging
The engine is on to provide increased
powertrain braking when you turn on the
grade assist feature. Turn off the grade
assist feature to return to electric mode.
Grade Assist
The engine is on to optimize vehicle oper-
ation. The vehicle returns to electric mode
when possible.
Normal Operation
364
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Status
This indicates which mode is active within
the vehicle system.
Hybrid Drive
The electric motor and gasoline engine
are powering vehicle.
Charging HV Battery
The hybrid system is storing power in the
high-voltage battery.
Idle
The vehicle is either at rest, or sharing very
little power between the electric system
parts.
Idle with Charging
The high-voltage battery is receiving
power in order to recharge.
Electric Drive
The vehicle is driving in electric mode (the
power is coming from the electric motor).
The gasoline engine is off in this mode.
INFORMATION
A
B
C
D
E
E161889
SYNC ServicesA
Sirius Travel LinkB
AlertsC
CalendarD
SYNC ApplicationsE
365
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Under the Information menu, you can
access features such as:
• SYNC Services
• Sirius Travel Link
• Alerts
• Calendar
• SYNC Applications
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, press the
corner of the touchscreen with the green
tab.
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United
States Only)
Note: SYNC Services requires activation
before use. Visit www.SYNCMyRide.com
to register and check your eligibility for
complimentary services. Standard phone
and message rates may apply.
Subscription may be required. You must
also have the active SYNC Services
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone paired
and connected to the system in order to
connect to, and use, SYNC Services. See
Phone (page 355).
Note: This feature does not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Make
sure your cellular phone is not blocking
caller ID before using SYNC Services.
Note: The driver is ultimately responsible
for the safe operation of the vehicle, and
therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe
to follow the suggested directions. Any
navigation features provided are only an
aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Do not
follow the route suggestions if doing so
would result in an unsafe or illegal
maneuver, if you would be placed in an
unsafe situation, or if you would be
directed into an area that you consider
unsafe. Maps used by this system may be
inaccurate because of errors, changes in
roads, traffic conditions or driving
conditions.
Note: When you connect, the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect your vehicle's current
location, travel direction and speed to help
provide you with the directions, traffic
reports, or business searches you request.
Further, to provide the services you
request, for continuous improvement, the
service may collect and record call details
and voice communications. For more
information, see SYNC Services Terms
and Conditions at www.SYNCMyRide.com.
If you do not want Ford or its service
providers to collect your vehicle travel
information or other information identified
in the Terms and Conditions, do not
subscribe or use the service.
366
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
SYNC Services uses advanced vehicle
sensors, integrated GPS technology and
comprehensive map and traffic data, to
give you personalized traffic reports,
precise turn-by-turn directions, business
search, news, sports, weather and more.
For a complete list of services, or to learn
more, please visit www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Connecting to SYNC Services Using
Voice Commands
E142599
1. Press the voice button.
2. When prompted, say "Services". This
initiates an outgoing call to SYNC
Services using your paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled cellular
phone.
3. Once you connect to the service,
follow the voice prompts to request
the desired service, such as "Traffic"
or "Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
4. Say, "Services" to return to the
Services main menu or for help, say,
"Help".
Connecting to SYNC Services Using the
Touchscreen
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, press the
Information button.
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation, press the green tab on your
touchscreen.
1. Select Connect to Services to initiate
an outgoing call to SYNC Services
using your phone.
2. Once connected, follow the voice
prompts to request your desired
Service, such as "Traffic" or
"Directions". You can also say, "What
are my choices?" to receive a list of
available services from which to
choose.
3. Say, "Services" to return to the
Services main menu or for help, say,
"Help".
Receiving Turn-by-Turn Directions
1. When connected to SYNC Services,
say "Directions" or "Business search".
To find the closest business or type of
business to your current location, just
say "Business search" and then
"Search near me". If you need further
assistance in finding a location you can
say "Operator" at any time within a
Directions or Business search to speak
with a live operator. The system may
prompt you to speak with an operator
when it has difficulty matching your
voice request. The live operator can
assist you by searching for businesses
by name or by category, residential
addresses by street address or by
name or specific street intersections.
Operator Assist is a feature of your
SYNC Services subscription. For more
information on Operator Assist, visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com/support.
2. Follow the voice prompts to select your
Destination. After the route download
is finished, the phone call automatically
ends.
367
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
If your vehicle is not equipped with
Navigation:
• Turn-by-turn directions appear in the
information display, in the status bar
of your touchscreen system and on the
SYNC Services screen. You also
receive driving instructions from
audible prompts.
• When on an active route, you can
select Route Summary or Route
Status using the touchscreen controls
or voice commands to view the Route
Summary Turn List or the Route
Status ETA. You can also turn voice
guidance on or off, cancel the route or
update the route.
If you miss a turn, SYNC automatically asks
if you want the route updated. Just say,
"Yes" when prompted and the system
delivers a new route to your vehicle.
If your vehicle is equipped with Navigation,
SYNC Services downloads your requested
destination to the navigation system. The
navigation system then calculates the
route and provides driving instructions.
See Navigation (page 379).
Disconnecting from SYNC Services
1. Press and hold the hang-up phone
button on the steering wheel.
2. Say "Good-bye" from the SYNC
Services main menu.
SYNC Services quick tips
You can personalize your Services feature to provide
quicker access to your most used or favorite information.
You can save address points, such as work or home. You
can also save favorite information like sports teams, such
as Detroit Lions, or a news category. You can learn more
about personalization by logging onto
www.SYNCMyRide.com.
Personalizing
Press the voice button at any time (while connected to
SYNC Services) to interrupt a voice prompt or an audio
clip (such as a sports report) and say your voice command.
Push to interrupt
Your subscription is associated with your Bluetooth-
enabled cellular phone number, not your VIN (Vehicle
Identification Number). You can pair and connect your
phone to any vehicle equipped with SYNC Services and
continue enjoying your personalized services.
Portable
368
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
SYNC Services Voice Commands
E142599
When a route has been
downloaded (non-navigation
systems), press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When prompted,
say any of the following commands:
"SERVICES"
"Cancel route"
"Navigation voice off"
"Navigation voice on"
"Next turn"
"Route status"
"Route summary"
"Services"
"Update route"
"Help"
Sirius Travel Link (If Equipped)
WARNING
Driving while distracted can result in
loss of vehicle control, crash and
injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the
safe operation of your vehicle. We
recommend against the use of any
handheld device while driving and
encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you
are aware of all applicable local laws that
may affect the use of electronic devices
while driving.
Note: In order to use Sirius Travel Link,
your vehicle must be equipped with
navigation and your navigation SD card
must be in the SD card slot.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic# and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by Sirius Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is
responsible for any errors or inaccuracies
in the Sirius Travel Link services or its use
in vehicles.
369
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
When you subscribe to Sirius Travel Link,
it can help you locate the best gas prices,
find movie listings, get current traffic alerts,
view the current weather map, get
accurate ski conditions and see scores to
current sports games.
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the
corner of the touchscreen with the green
tab.
Traffic On Route and Traffic Nearby
Touch these buttons to identify traffic
incidents on your route, nearby your
vehicle’s current location or near any of
your favorite places, if programmed.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view fuel prices at
stations close to your vehicle’ s location or
on an active navigation route.
Movie Listings
Touch this button to view nearby movie
theaters and their show times, if available.
Weather
Touch this button to view the nearby
weather, current weather, or the five day
forecast for the chosen area. Select Map
to see the weather map, which can show
storms, radar information, charts and
winds. Select Area to select from a listing
of weather locations.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view scores and
schedules from a variety of sports. You
can also save up to 10 favorite teams for
easier access. The score automatically
refreshes when a game is in progress.
Ski Conditions
Touch this button to view ski conditions
for a specific area.
Sirius Travel Link Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"5-day weather forecast"
"Fuel prices"
"Movie listings"
"Sports headlines"
*
"Sports schedules"
*
370
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"SIRIUS TRAVEL LINK"
"Sports scores"
*
"Traffic"
"Weather"
"Weather map"
"Help"
*
If you say "Sports headlines", "Sports schedules" or "Sports scores", you can then say
any of the commands in the following chart.
Sports-related Commands
*
"Baseball"
"College basketball"
"College football"
"Golf"
"MLS"
"My teams"
"NBA"
"NFL"
"NHL"
"WNBA"
"Help"
*
If you want to hear headlines, schedules or scores from a particular sport, or your favorite
team(s), say the sport (or team), then "headlines", "schedules" or "scores".
371
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Additional sports-related voice commands
"Motor sports schedule""Baseball headlines"
"My team headlines""Baseball schedule"
"My teams schedule""Baseball scores"
"My teams scores""College basketball headlines"
"NBA headlines""College basketball schedule"
"NBA schedule""College basketball scores"
"NBA scores""College football headlines"
"NFL headlines""College football schedule"
"NFL schedule""College football scores"
"NFL scores""Golf headlines"
"NHL headlines""Golf leaderboard"
"NHL schedule""Golf schedule"
"NHL scores""MLS headlines"
"WNBA headlines""MLS schedule"
"WNBA schedule""MLS scores"
"WNBA scores""Motor sports headlines"
"Help""Motor sports order"
Alerts
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the
corner of the touchscreen with the green
tab.
Press Alerts, and then choose from any of
the following services:
• View the complete message
• Delete the message
• Delete All messages
This screen displays any system messages
(such as an SD card fault).
372
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Note: The system alerts you to any
messages by turning the information icon
yellow. After you read or delete the
messages, the icon returns to white.
Calendar
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the
corner of the touchscreen with the green
tab.
Press Calendar. You can view the current
calendar by day, week or month.
911 Assist (If Equipped)
WARNINGS
Unless the 911 Assist setting is set
on before a crash, the system will
not dial for help, which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
Do not wait for 911 Assist to make an
emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time, which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.
Always place your phone in a secure
location in your vehicle so it does
not become a projectile or damaged in a
crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone,
which could prevent 911 Assist from
working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must
be set on prior to the incident.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user turns 911 Assist on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones.
If 911 Assist is turned off, either a voice
message plays or a display message (or
icon) comes on (or both) when your vehicle
is started after a previously paired phone
connects.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excludes
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired
and connected Bluetooth-enabled phone.
You can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 39). Important information regarding
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 225).
Important information regarding the fuel
pump shut-off is in this chapter.
373
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Setting 911 Assist On
E142608
If your vehicle is equipped with
Navigation, touch the i
(Information) button to access
these features. If your vehicle is not
equipped with Navigation, touch the
corner of the touchscreen with the green
tab.
Touch Apps > 911 Assist, then select On.
E142607
You can also access 911 Assist
by:
• Pressing the Settings icon > Settings
> Phone > 911 Assist, or
• Pressing the Settings icon > Help > 911
Assist.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
prior to the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network
coverage, battery power and signal
strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the United States,
Canada or in a territory in which 911 is
the emergency number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (which
would trigger 911 Assist); however, SYNC
tries to contact emergency services if 911
Assist triggers. If a connected phone
sustains damage or loses connection to
SYNC, SYNC searches for, and tries to
connect to, any available previously paired
phone and tries to make the call to 911.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
374
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you turn on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not turn the feature on.
Vehicle Health Report (If Equipped)
WARNING
Always follow scheduled
maintenance instructions, regularly
inspect your vehicle, and seek repair for
any damage or problem you suspect.
Vehicle Health Report supplements, but
cannot replace, normal maintenance and
vehicle inspection. Vehicle Health Report
only monitors certain systems
electronically monitored by your vehicle
and will not monitor or report the status of
any other system, (such as brake lining
wear). Failure to perform scheduled
maintenance and regularly inspect your
vehicle may result in vehicle damage and
serious injury.
Note: This feature is only available in the
United States.
Note: Your Vehicle Health Report feature
requires activation prior to use. Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com to register. There
is no fee or subscription associated with
Vehicle Health Report, but you must
register to use this feature.
Note: This feature may not function
properly if you have enabled caller ID
blocking on your cellular phone. Before
running a report, review the Vehicle
Health Report Privacy Notice.
Note: In order to allow a break-in period
for your vehicle, you may not be able to
create a Vehicle Health Report until your
vehicle odometer has reached 200 miles.
Note: Cellular phone and SMS charges
may apply when making a report.
Register for Vehicle Health Report and set
your report preferences at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. After registering,
you can request a Vehicle Health Report
(inside your vehicle). Return to your
account at www.SYNCMyRide.com to view
your report. You can also choose for SYNC
to remind you automatically to run reports
at specific mileage intervals. Cellular
phone airtime usage may apply when
reporting.
The system allows you to check your
vehicle’s overall health in the form of a
diagnostic report card. The Vehicle Health
Report contains valuable information, such
as:
• Vehicle diagnostic information
• Scheduled maintenance
• Open recalls and Field Service Actions
• Items noted during vehicle inspections
by your authorized dealer that still
need servicing.
375
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Making a Report
E142608
If you want to run a report by
using the touchscreen, touch
Apps > Vehicle Health Report.
E142599
To run a report by voice
command, press the voice
button on the steering wheel
and, when prompted, say "Vehicle health
report".
Vehicle Health Report Privacy Notice
When you create a Vehicle Health Report,
Ford Motor Company may collect your
cellular phone number (to process your
report request) and diagnostic information
about your vehicle. Certain versions or
updates to Vehicle Health Report may also
collect more vehicle information. Ford may
use your vehicle information it collects for
any purpose. If you do not want to disclose
your cellular phone number or vehicle
information, do not run the feature or set
up your Vehicle Health Report profile at
www.SYNCMyRide.com. See
www.SYNCMyRide.com (Vehicle Health
Report Terms and Conditions, and Privacy
Statement) for more information.
CLIMATE
Press the lower right corner on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from the screen shown
here.
E148839
376
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Power: Touch to switch the system off and on. Outside air cannot enter your
vehicle when you switch off the system.
A
Passenger settings: Touch DUAL to switch on the passenger temperature
control. Touch the + and - to adjust the temperature. Touch the heated seat
icon to control the heated seat (if equipped). Touch the cooled seat icon to
control the cooled seat (if equipped). See Seats (page 129).
B
Fan speed: Touch + or - to increase or decrease the volume of air circulated
in your vehicle.
C
Recirculated air: Touch the button to switch between outside air and
recirculated air. When you select recirculated air, the button illuminates and
the air currently in the passenger compartment recirculates. This may reduce
the time needed to cool the interior (when used with A/C) and may reduce
unwanted odors from entering your vehicle. Recirculated air may turn off
automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A/C to reduce the possibility of
fogging.
D
MAX A/C: Touch to switch on. The system distributes recirculated air through
the instrument panel air vents, air conditioning automatically turns on and fan
speed adjusts to the highest speed. This re-cooling of the interior is more
economical and efficient than normal A/C.
E
A/C: Touch to turn air conditioning on or off. To improve air conditioning when
starting your vehicle, drive with the windows slightly open for two to three
minutes. Use A/C with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and
efficiency.
F
AUTO: Touch to turn on fully automatic operation. Select the desired
temperature using the temperature control. The system automatically adjusts
fan speed, air distribution, A/C operation, and outside or recirculated air, to
heat or cool the vehicle to maintain the selected temperature.
G
Rear defroster: Touch to turn the rear window defroster and heated mirrors
(if equipped).
H
377
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Manual airflow distribution controls:Floor/Defrost: Distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents,
and provides outside air to reduce window fogging. Panel: Distributes air
through the instrument panel vents. Panel/Floor: Distributes air through the
instrument panel vents, demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the demister vents, floor vents and rear seat floor
vents. Defrost: Touch to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice. Touch again
to return to the previous airflow selection. When switched on, defrost distributes
outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents to reduce
window fogging.
I
Driver settings: Depending on your vehicle and option package, you may have
the following features: Touch the + and - to adjust the temperature. Touch the
heated seat icon to control the heated seat (if equipped). Touch the cooled
seat icon to control the cooled seat (if equipped). See Seats (page 129). Touch
MyTemp to select your previously pre-set temperature setpoint. Touch and
hold MyTemp to store a new pre-set for temperature setpoint. Touch the heated
steering wheel icon (if equipped) to warm the steering wheel.
J
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with a
wood-trimmed steering wheel, it does not
heat between the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock
positions.
Climate Control Voice Commands
E142599
Press the voice button on the
steering wheel controls. When
prompted, say any of the
following commands:
Climate control commands
"Climate automatic"
"Climate my temperature"
"Climate off"
"Climate on"
Climate control commands
"Climate temperature <15.5-29.5>
degrees"
"Climate temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Help"
There are additional climate control
commands but in order to access them,
you have to say "Climate" first. When the
system is ready to listen, you may say any
of the following commands:
"CLIMATE"
"A/C off"
"A/C on"
"Automatic"
"Defrost off"
378
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"CLIMATE"
"Defrost on"
"Dual off"
"Floor on"
"Fan decrease"
"Fan increase"
"MAX A/C off"
"MAX A/C on"
"My temp"
"Off"
"On"
"Panel floor on"
"Panel on"
"Rear defrost off"
"Rear defrost on"
"Recirc off"
"Recirc on"
"Temperature"
*
"Temperature <15.5-29.5> degrees"
"Temperature <60-85> degrees"
"Temperature decrease"
"Temperature high"
"Temperature increase"
"Temperature low"
"CLIMATE"
"Windshield floor on"
"Help"
*
If you say "Temperature", you can then
say any of the commands in the following
chart.
"TEMPERATURE"
"<15.5-29.5> degrees"
"<60-85> degrees"
"High"
"Low"
"Help"
NAVIGATION (IF EQUIPPED)
Note: The navigation SD card must be in
the SD card slot to operate the navigation
system. If you need a replacement SD
card, see an authorized dealer.
Note: The SD card slot is spring-loaded.
To remove the SD card, just push the card
in and release it. Do not attempt to pull
the card out to remove it; this could cause
damage.
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.
To set a destination, press the green
corner of your touchscreen, then the Dest
button when it appears. See Setting a
destination later in this chapter.
379
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
To view the navigation map and your
vehicle's current location, touch the green
bar in the upper right hand corner of the
touchscreen, or, press Dest, then Map.
See Map mode later in this chapter.
Setting a Destination
Press the green corner of your
touchscreen, then the Dest button when
it appears. Choose any of the following:
Destination
My Home
Favorites
Previous Destinations
Point of Interest
Emergency
Street Address
Intersection
City Center
Map
Edit Route Cancel Route
1. Enter the necessary information into
the highlighted text fields (in any
order). For address destination entry,
the Go! button appears once you enter
all the necessary information. Pressing
the Go! button makes the address
location appear on the map. If you
choose Previous Destination, the last
20 destinations you have selected
appear.
2. Select Set as Dest to make this your
destination. You can also choose to
set this as a waypoint (have the system
route to this point on the way to your
current destination) or save it as a
favorite. The system considers any
Avoid Areas selections in its route
calculation.
3. Choose from up to three different
types of routes, and then select Start
Route.
• Fastest: Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.
• Shortest: Uses the shortest distance
possible.
• Eco Route: Uses the most fuel-efficient
route.
You can cancel the route or have the
system demo the route for you. Select
Route Prefs to set route preferences like
avoiding freeways, tollroads, ferries and
car trains as well as to use or not use
high-occupancy vehicle lanes.
(High-occupancy vehicle lanes are also
known as carpool or diamond lanes.
People who ride in buses, vanpools or
carpools use these lanes.)
Note: If your vehicle is on a recognized
road and you do not press the Start Route
button, the system defaults to the Fastest
Route option and begins guidance.
During route guidance, you can press the
talking bubble icon that appears in the
upper right navigation corner (green bar)
if you want the system to repeat route
guidance information. When the system
repeats the last guidance instruction, it
updates the distance to the next guidance
instruction, since it detects when the
vehicle is moving.
380
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Point of Interest (POI) Categories
Main categories
Food/Drink & Dining
Travel & Transportation
Financial
Emergency
Community
Health & Medicine
Automotive
Shopping
Entertainment & Arts
Recreation & Sports
Government
Domestic Services
Subcategories
Restaurant
Golf
Parking
Home & Garden
Personal Care Services
Auto Dealership
Govt Office
Public Transit
Education
To expand these listings, press the + in
front of the listing.
The system also allows you to sort
alphabetically, by distance or by cityseekr
listings (if available).
cityseekr
Note: cityseekr point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 912
cities (881 in the United States, 20 in
Canada and 11 in Mexico).
E142634
cityseekr, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.
When you have selected a point of
interest, the location and information
appear, such as address and phone
number. If cityseekr lists the point of
interest, more information is available,
such as a brief description, check-in and
checkout times or restaurant hours.
Press More Information for a longer
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price as well as the
website. This screen displays the point of
interest icon such as:
E143884
Hotel
381
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
E142636
Coffeehouse
E142637
Food & Drink
E142638
Nightlife
E142639
Attraction
E142640
This icon appears when your
selection exists in multiple
categories within the system.
When you are viewing more information
for hotels, cityseekr also tells you if the
hotel has certain services and facilities
using icons, such as:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-fi.
For restaurants, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseekr can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address.
Setting Your Navigation Preferences
Select settings for the system to take into
account when planning your route.
E142607
Press the Settings icon >
Settings > Navigation.
Map Preferences
Breadcrumbs
Display your vehicle’ s previously traveled
route with white dots. Turn this feature ON
or OFF.
Turn List Format
Have the system display your turn list Top
to Bottom or Bottom to Top.
Parking POI Notification
Set the automatic parking point of interest
notification. Turn this feature ON or OFF.
When parking point of interest notification
is on, the icons display on the map when
you get close to your destination. This may
not be very useful in dense areas, and may
clutter the map when other points of
interest display.
382
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Route Preferences
Preferred Route
Choose to have the system display the
Shortest, Fastest or most Ecological route
first. If you set Always Use Preferred
Route to Yes, the system uses the
selected route type to calculate only one
route to the desired destination.
Always Use Preferred Route
Bypass route selection in destination
programming. The system only calculates
one route based on preferred route
setting.
Eco Time Penalty
Select a low, medium or high cost for the
calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Avoid
These features allow you to choose to
have the system avoid freeways, toll roads,
ferries and car trains when planning your
route. Turn these features ON or OFF.
Use HOV Lanes
Have the system use high-occupancy
vehicle lanes, if available, when planning
your route.
Navigation Preferences
Guidance Prompts
Have the system use Voice & Tones or
Tone Only on your programmed route.
Auto - Fill State/Province
Have the system automatically fill in the
state and province based on the
information already entered into the
system. Turn this feature ON or OFF.
Traffic Preferences
Avoid Traffic Problems
Choose how you want the system to
handle traffic problems along your route.
• Automatic: Have the system reroute
you to avoid traffic incidents that
develop and impact the current route.
The system does not provide a traffic
alert notification.
• Manual: Have the system always
provide a traffic alert notification for
traffic incidents along the planned
route. You have a choice to accept or
ignore the notification before making
the route deviation.
Traffic Alert Notification
Have the system display traffic alert
notifications.
Other traffic alert features allows you to
turn on certain, or all, traffic icons on the
map such as road work, incident, accidents
and closed roads. Scroll down to view all
the different types of alerts. Turn these
features ON or OFF.
Avoid Areas
Choose areas which you want the system
to avoid when calculating a route for you.
383
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Press Add to program an entry. Once you
make a selection, the system tries to avoid
the area(s) if possible for all routes. To
delete a selection, choose the listing on
the screen. When the screen changes to
Avoid Areas Edit, you can press Delete
at the bottom right of the screen.
Map Mode
Press the green bar in the upper right area
of the touchscreen to view map mode.
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of both 2D city maps as well as
3D landmarks (when available).
2D city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use and land
elements and detailed railway
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe. These maps also
contain features, such as town blocks,
building footprints, and railways.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourist value. The 3D
landmarks appear in 3D map mode only.
Coverage varies, and improves with
updated map releases.
E162051
Change the appearance of the map
display by repeatedly pressing the arrow
button in the upper left corner of the
screen. It toggles between three different
map modes: Heading up, North up, and
3D.
E142642
Heading up (2D map) always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map scales up to
2.5 miles (4 kilometers). The system
remembers this setting for larger map
scales, but shows the map in North up
only. If the scale returns below this level,
the system restores Heading up.
E142643
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E142644
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
This viewing angle can be
adjusted and the map can be
rotated 180 degrees by touching the map
twice, and then dragging your finger along
the shaded bar with arrows at the bottom
of the map.
View switches between full map, street
list and exit view in route guidance.
384
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Menu displays a pop-up box that allows
direct access to navigation settings,
View/Edit Route, SIRIUS Travel Link,
Guidance Mute and Cancel Route.
E146188
Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Auto Zoom
Press the green bar to access map mode,
then select the + or - zoom button to bring
up the zoom level and Auto buttons on the
touchscreen. When you press Auto, Auto
Zoom turns on and Auto displays in the
bottom left corner of the screen in the map
scale. The map zoom level then
synchronizes with vehicle speed. The
slower your vehicle is traveling, the farther
in the map zooms in; the faster your
vehicle is traveling, the farther the map
zooms out. To turn the feature off, just
press the + or - button again.
In 3D mode, rotate the map view by
swiping your finger across the shaded bar
with the arrows.
Map Icons
E142646
Vehicle mark shows the current
location of your vehicle. It stays
in the center of the map display,
except when in scroll mode.
E142647
Scroll cursor allows you to scroll
the map; the fixed icon is in the
center of the screen. The map
position closest to the cursor is in a
window on the top center part of the
screen.
E142648
Address book entry default
icon(s) indicates the location on
the map of an address book entry.
This is the default symbol shown after the
entry has been stored to the Address Book
by any method other than the map. You
can select from any of the 22 icons
available. You can use each icon more
than once.
E142649
Home indicates the location on
the map currently stored as the
home position. You can only save
one address from the Address
Book as your Home entry. You cannot
change this icon.
E142650
POI (Point Of Interest) icons
indicate locations of any point of
interest categories you choose to
display on the map. You can choose to
display three point of interest categories
on the map at one time.
E142651
Starting point indicates the
starting point of a planned route.
E142652
Waypoint indicates the location of
a waypoint on the map. The
number inside the circle is
different for each waypoint and
represents the position of the waypoint in
the route list.
E142653
Destination symbol indicates the
ending point of a planned route.
E142654
Next maneuver point indicates
the location of the next turn on the
planned route.
385
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
E142655
No GPS symbol indicates that
insufficient GPS satellite signals
are available for accurate map
positioning. This icon may display
under normal operation in an area with
poor GPS access.
Quick-touch Buttons
When in map mode, touch anywhere on
the map display to access the following
options:
Set as Dest
Touch this button to select a scrolled
location on the map as your destination.
You may scroll the map by pressing your
index finger on the map display. When you
reach the desired location, simply let go
and then touch Set as Dest.
Set as Waypoint
Touch this button to set the current
location as a waypoint.
Save to Favorites
Touch this button to save the current
location to your favorites.
POI Icons
Touch this button to select icons to display
on the map. You can select up to three
icons to display on the map at the same
time. Turn these ON or OFF.
Cancel Route
Touch this button to cancel the active
route.
View/Edit Route
Access these features when a route is
active:
• View Route
• Edit Destination/Waypoints
• Edit Turn List
• Detour
• Edit Route Preferences
• Edit Traffic Preferences
• Cancel Route.
Nokia is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
Nokia by going to
http://mapreporter.navteq.com. Nokia
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-800-NAVMAPS (in
Mexico, call 01-800-557-5539) or going to
www.navigation.com/ford. You need to
specify the make and model of your
vehicle to determine if there is an update
available.
Navigation Voice Commands
E142599
When in navigation mode, press
the voice button on the steering
wheel controls. After the tone,
say any of the following commands:
386
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
Navigation system voice commands
"Cancel next waypoint"
1
"Cancel route"
1
"Destination"
2
"Destination <nametag>"
"Destination <POI category>"
"Destination favorites"
"Destination home"
"Destination intersection"
"Destination nearest <POI category>"
"Destination nearest POI"
"Destination play nametags"
"Destination POI"
"Destination POI category"
"Destination previous destination"
"Destination street address"
"Detour"
1
"Navigation"
3
"Navigation voice volume decrease"
"Navigation voice volume increase"
"Repeat instruction"
1
"Show 3D"
"Show heading up"
Navigation system voice commands
"Show map"
"Show north up"
"Show route"
1
"Show turn list"
1
"Voice guidance off"
"Voice guidance on"
"Where am I?"
"Zoom in"
"Zoom out"
"Help"
1
These commands are only available when
a navigation route is active.
2
If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the following
"Destination" chart.
3
If you say "Navigation", you can then say
any command in the following "Navigation"
chart.
"DESTINATION"
"<nametag>"
"<POI category>"
"Favorites"
"Home"
"Intersection"
"Nearest <POI category>"
387
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
"DESTINATION"
"Nearest POI"
"Play nametags"
"POI category"
"Previous destination"
"Street address"
"Help"
"NAVIGATION"
"Destination"
*
"Zoom city"
"Zoom country"
"Zoom minimum"
"Zoom maximum"
"Zoom province"
"Zoom state"
"Zoom street"
"Zoom to <distance>"
"Help"
*
If you say "Destination", you can then say
any command in the "Destination" chart.
One-shot Destination Street Address
When you say either "Navigation
destination street address" or "Destination
street address", the system asks you to
say the full address. The system displays
an example on-screen. You can then
speak the address naturally, such as "One
two three four Main Street, Anytown".
388
MKZ (CC9)
MyLincoln Touch™
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact an authorized dealer or visit our
online store at Accessories.Lincoln.com
(United States only).
Lincoln Custom Accessories are available
for your vehicle through an authorized
Lincoln dealer. Lincoln Motor Company
will repair or replace any properly
authorized dealer-installed Lincoln Custom
Accessories found to be defective in
factory-supplied materials or workmanship
during the warranty period, as well as any
component damaged by the defective
accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
vehicle through the warranty that provides
the greatest benefit:
• 12 months or 12000 miles (20000
kilometers) (whichever occurs first).
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.
Exterior style
• Hood deflectors
• Side-window deflectors
• Wheels
• Bumper protectors
Interior style
• All-weather floor mats
• Rear seat entertainment*
• Premium carpeted floor mats
Lifestyle
• Ash cup (smoker's packages)
• Cargo area protector
• Cargo net
• Cargo organizer
• Roof racks and carriers*
Peace of mind
• Car cover*
• Wheel locks
• Bumper mounted parking sensor*
• Locking fuel plug for capless fuel
system
*The accessory manufacturer designs,
develops and therefore warrants Lincoln
Licensed Accessories, and does not
design or test these accessories to Lincoln
Motor Company engineering
requirements. Contact an authorized
Lincoln dealer for the manufacturer's
limited warranty details and request a copy
of the Lincoln Licensed Accessories
product limited warranty from the
accessory manufacturer.
389
MKZ (CC9)
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Consult an
authorized dealer for specific weight
information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulate the use of mobile
communications systems that are
equipped with radio transmitters, for
example, two-way radios, telephones
and theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did
not design them specifically for
automotive use.
• To avoid interference with other
vehicle functions, for example anti-lock
brake systems, do not locate amateur
radio antennas in the area of the driver
side hood.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer
add any non-Lincoln custom electrical
or electronic accessories or
components to your vehicle, you may
adversely affect battery performance
and durability. In addition, you may
also adversely affect the performance
of other electrical systems in the
vehicle.
390
MKZ (CC9)
Accessories
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
SYNC® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
• You have acquired a device ("DEVICE")
that includes software licensed by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY") from an
affiliate of Microsoft Corporation ("MS")
. Those installed software products of
MS origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("MS
SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The MS SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY. The additional
software and systems of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY origin, as well as
associated media, printed materials,
and "online" or electronic
documentation ("FORD SOFTWARE")
are protected by international
intellectual property laws and treaties.
The FORD SOFTWARE is licensed, not
sold. All rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE and/or FORD
SOFTWARE may interface with and/or
communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by third party
software and service suppliers. The
additional software and services of
third party origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation ("THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The MS SOFTWARE, FORD
SOFTWARE and THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE hereinafter collectively
and individually will be referred to as
"SOFTWARE".
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICE OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICE, WILL
CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT TO
THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF ANY
PREVIOUS CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICE and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.
391
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an
inherently statistical process and that
recognition errors are inherent in the
process. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
or disassemble nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation.
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICE and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs,
you are licensed to use only one (1)
copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICE, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or MS may terminate this EULA if you
fail to comply with the terms and
conditions of this EULA.
• Security Updates/Digital Rights
Management: Content owners use the
WMDRM technology included in your
DEVICE to protect their intellectual
property, included copyrighted
content. Portions of the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE use WMDRM software
to access WMDRM-protected content.
If the WMDRM software fails to protect
the content, content owners may ask
Microsoft to revoke the SOFTWARE's
ability to use WMDRM to play or copy
protected content. This action does
not affect unprotected content. When
your DEVICE downloads licenses for
protected content, you agree that
Microsoft may include a revocation list
with the licenses. Content owners may
require you to upgrade the SOFTWARE
on your DEVICE to access their
content. If you decline an upgrade, you
will not be able to access content that
requires the upgrade.
392
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
• Consent to Use of Data: You agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may collect and use technical
information gathered in any manner as
part of product support services
related to the SOFTWARE or related
services. MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and services suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may use this information solely to
improve their products or to provide
customized services or technologies
to you. MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and systems suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may disclose this information to others,
but not in a form that personally
identifies you.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that MS, Microsoft Corporation, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICE.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components").
If FORD MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms are
provided along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this EULA
shall apply.
393
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
If MS, Microsoft Corporation, their affiliates
and/or their designated agent make
available Supplemental Components, and
no other EULA terms are provided, then
the terms of this EULA shall apply, except
that the MS, Microsoft Corporation or
affiliate entity providing the Supplemental
Component(s) shall be the licensor of the
Supplemental Component(s).
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, their affiliates and/or their
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
• Links to Third Party Sites: The MS
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites
through the use of the SOFTWARE.
The third party sites are not under the
control of MS, Microsoft Corporation,
their affiliates and/or their designated
agent. Neither MS nor Microsoft
Corporation nor their affiliates nor their
designated agent are responsible for
(i) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
MS, Microsoft Corporation, their
affiliates and/or their designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICE operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and assumes any risk associated with
the use of the DEVICE.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If
the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICE on media such as a ROM chip, CD
ROM disk(s) or via web download or other
means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
394
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICE as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and
to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by MS, Microsoft
Corporation, FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
or their affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you
no rights to use such content. All rights not
specifically granted under this EULA are
reserved by MS, Microsoft Corporation,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service providers, their
affiliates and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy
of such electronic documentation.
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments. For additional
information, see
http://www.microsoft.com/exporting/.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, MS, Microsoft
Corporation, third party software or service
providers, their affiliates or suppliers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support
for the SOFTWARE is not provided by MS,
its parent corporation Microsoft
Corporation, or their affiliates or
subsidiaries. For product support, please
refer to FORD MOTOR COMPANY
instructions provided in the documentation
for the DEVICE. Should you have any
questions concerning this EULA, or if you
desire to contact FORD MOTOR
COMPANY for any other reason, please
refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICE.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
MS, MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND
THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
395
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT SHALL MS,
MICROSOFT CORPORATION AND/OR
THEIR AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR ANY
AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF U.S. TWO
HUNDRED FIFTY DOLLARS (U.S.
$250.00).
• THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES OTHER
THAN THOSE THAT MAY EXPRESSLY
BE PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
Adobe
Contains Adobe® [Flash® Player] or [AIR®]
technology by Adobe Systems
Incorporated. This [Licensee Product]
contains [Adobe® Flash® Player] [Adobe®
AIR®] software under license from Adobe
Systems Incorporated, Copyright
©1995-2009 Adobe Macromedia Software
LLC. All rights reserved. Adobe, Flash and
AIR are trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
End User Notice
Microsoft® Windows® Mobile for
Automotive Important Safety Information
This system Ford SYNC™ contains software
that is licensed to Manufacturer FORD
MOTOR COMPANY by an affiliate of
Microsoft Corporation pursuant to a
license agreement. Any removal,
reproduction, reverse engineering or other
unauthorized use of the software from this
system in violation of the license
agreement is strictly prohibited and may
subject you to legal action.
Read and follow instructions: Before
using your Windows Automotive- based
system, read and follow all instructions and
safety information provided in this end
user manual ("User's Guide"). Not following
precautions found in this User's Guide can
lead to an accident or other serious
consequences.
Keep User's Guide in vehicle: When kept
in the vehicle, the User's Guide will be a
ready reference for you and other users
unfamiliar with the Windows
Automotive-based system. Please make
certain that before using the system for
the first time, all persons have access to
the User's Guide and read its instructions
and safety information carefully.
WARNING
Operating certain parts of this
system while driving can distract
your attention away from the road, and
possibly cause an accident or other
serious consequences. Do not change
system settings or enter data non-verbally
(using your hands) while driving. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations. This is
important since while setting up or
changing some functions you might be
required to distract your attention away
from the road and remove your hands from
the wheel.
396
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
General Operation
Voice Command Control: Functions within
the Windows Automotive-based system
may be accomplished using only voice
commands. Using voice commands while
driving allows you to operate the system
without removing your hands from the
wheel.
Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a prolonged
view of the screen while you are driving.
Pull over in a safe and legal manner before
attempting to access a function of the
system requiring prolonged attention. Even
occasional short scans to the screen may
be hazardous if your attention has been
diverted away from your driving task at a
critical time.
Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic and
emergency signals while driving. Driving
while unable to hear these sounds could
cause an accident.
Use of Speech Recognition Functions:
Speech recognition software is inherently
a statistical process which is subject to
errors. It is your responsibility to monitor
any speech recognition functions included
in the system and address any errors.
Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can seriously
distract your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious consequences.
Stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner
before attempting these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions based
on your observations of local conditions
and existing traffic regulations. Any such
feature is not a substitute for your personal
judgment. Any route suggestions made
by this system should never replace any
local traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in an
unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you would
be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you
would be directed into an area that you
consider unsafe. The driver is ultimately
responsible for the safe operation of the
vehicle and therefore, must evaluate
whether it is safe to follow the suggested
directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used by
this system may be inaccurate because of
changes in roads, traffic controls or driving
conditions. Always use good judgment
and common sense when following the
suggested routes.
397
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the system
to route you to emergency services. Ask
local authorities or an emergency services
operator for these locations. Not all
emergency services such as police, fire
stations, hospitals and clinics are likely to
be contained in the map database for such
navigation features.
TeleNav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the Telenav
Software. Your use of the Telenav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the Telenav Software.
These terms and conditions represent the
agreement (“Agreement”) between you
and Telenav, Inc. (“Telenav”) with respect
to the Telenav Software (including
upgrades, modifications, or additions
thereto) (collectively “Telenav Software”).
All references herein to “you” and “your”
means you, your employees, agents, and
contractors, and any other entity on whose
behalf you accept these terms and
conditions, all of whom shall also be bound
by this Agreement. Additionally, all of your
account information, as well as other
payment and personal information
provided by you to Telenav (directly or
through the use of the Telenav Software,
is subject to Telenav’s privacy policy
located at http://www.telenav.com.
Telenav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the Telenav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the Telenav Software: (a) observe
all traffic laws and otherwise drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the Telenav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions; (c)
do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the Telenav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked; (d)
do not use the Telenav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
Telenav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).
398
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
You agree to indemnify and hold Telenav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the Telenav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the
Telenav Software, to provide Telenav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform Telenav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.
3. Software License
Subject to your compliance with the terms
of this Agreement, Telenav hereby grants
to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
Telenav Software license), without the right
to sublicense, to use the Telenav Software
(in object code form only) in order to
access and use the Telenav Software. This
license shall terminate upon any
termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the Telenav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes, and
not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
You agree not to do any of the following:
(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the Telenav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or structure
of the Telenav Software without the prior
express written consent of Telenav; (c)
remove from the Telenav Software, or
alter, any of Telenav’s or its suppliers’
trademarks, trade names, logos, patent or
copyright notices, or other notices or
markings; (d) distribute, sublicense or
otherwise transfer the Telenav Software
to others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the Telenav
Software; or (e) use the Telenav Software
in any manner that (i) infringes the
intellectual property or proprietary rights,
rights of publicity or privacy or other rights
of any party, (ii) violates any law, statute,
ordinance or regulation, including but not
limited to laws and regulations related to
spamming, privacy, consumer and child
protection, obscenity or defamation, or (iii)
is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and
(f) lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
Telenav Software without advanced
written permission of Telenav.
4. Disclaimers
To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will Telenav,
its licensors and suppliers, or agents or
employees of any of the foregoing, be
liable for any decision made or action
taken by you or anyone else in reliance
399
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
on the information provided by the
Telenav Software. Telenav also does not
warrant the accuracy of the map or other
data used for the Telenav Software. Such
data may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising out
of your use of the Telenav Software. For
example but without limitation, you agree
not to rely on the Telenav Software for
critical navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others is
dependent on the accuracy of navigation,
as the maps or functionality of the Telenav
Software are not intended to support such
high risk applications, especially in more
remote geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE. Certain jurisdictions do not
permit the disclaimer of certain warranties,
so this limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES (INCLUDING IN
EACH CASE, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
DAMAGES FOR THE INABILITY TO USE
THE EQUIPMENT OR ACCESS DATA,
LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF BUSINESS,
LOSS OF PROFITS, BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE) ARISING
OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO
USE THE TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY
REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV’S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW
THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS
OR EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO
YOU.
400
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to this
Agreement or the Telenav Software shall
be settled by independent arbitration
involving a neutral arbitrator and
administered by the American Arbitration
Association in the County of Santa Clara,
California. The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and the
judgment upon the award rendered by the
arbitrator may be entered by any court
having jurisdiction. Note that there is no
judge or jury in an arbitration proceeding
and the decision of the arbitrator shall be
binding upon both parties. You expressly
agree to waive your right to a jury trial.
This Agreement and performance
hereunder will be governed by and
construed in accordance with the laws of
the State of California, without giving effect
to its conflict of laws provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both Telenav and you agree to submit to
the exclusive jurisdiction of the courts of
the County of Santa Clara, California. The
United Nations Convention on Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods shall
not apply.
7. Assignment
You may not resell, assign, or transfer this
Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the Telenav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
Telenav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment or
transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to Telenav, in which case
you and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the Telenav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing, Telenav
may assign this Agreement to any other
party at any time without notice, provided
the assignee remains bound by this
Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between Telenav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, Telenav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
Telenav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which
are not expressly granted in this
Agreement are intended to, or shall be,
granted or conferred by implication,
statute, inducement, estoppel or
otherwise, and Telenav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
401
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
8.3
By using the Telenav Software, you
consent to receive from Telenav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
Telenav Software (collectively, “Notices”)
electronically. Telenav may provide such
Notices by posting them on Telenav’s
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the Telenav Software.
8.4
Telenav’s or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party’s right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this
Agreement, the words “include” and
“including,” and variations thereof, will not
be deemed to be terms of limitation, but
rather will be deemed to be followed by
the words “without limitation”.
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors:
End User License Agreement For
Distribution By HERE For North
America/APAC
The content provided (“Data”) is licensed,
not sold. By opening this package, or
installing, copying, or otherwise using the
Data, you agree to be bound by the terms
of this agreement. If you do not agree to
the terms of this agreement, you are not
permitted to install, copy, use, resell or
transfer the Data. If you wish to reject the
terms of this agreement, and have not
402
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
installed, copied, or used the Data, you
must contact your retailer or HERE North
America, LLC (as defined below) within
thirty (30) days of purchase for a refund of
your purchase price. To contact HERE,
please visit www.here.com.
The Data is provided for your personal,
internal use only and may not be resold.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject
to the following terms (this “End User
License Agreement”) and conditions which
are agreed to by you, on the one hand,
and HERE and its licensors (including their
licensors and suppliers) on the other hand.
For purposes of these terms, “HERE” shall
mean (a) HERE North America, LLC with
respect to Data for the Americas and/or
the Asia Pacific region and (b) HERE
Europe B.V. for Data for Europe, the
Middle East and/or Africa.
The Data includes certain information and
related content provided under license to
HERE from third parties and is subject to
the applicable supplier terms and
copyright notices set forth at the following
URL:
http://corporate.navteq.com/supplier_terms.html.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS
License Limitations on Use:
You agree that your license to use this
Data is limited to and conditioned on use
for solely personal, noncommercial
purposes, and not for service bureau,
timesharing or other similar purposes.
Except as otherwise set forth herein, you
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
License Limitations on Transfer:
Your limited license does not allow transfer
or resale of the Data, except on the
condition that you may transfer the Data
and all accompanying materials on a
permanent basis if: (a) you retain no copies
of the Data; (b) the recipient agrees to the
terms of this End-User License Agreement;
and (c) you transfer the Data in the exact
same form as you purchased it by
physically transferring the original media
(e.g., the CD-ROM or DVD you purchased),
all original packaging, all Manuals and
other documentation. Specifically,
Multi-disc sets may only be transferred or
sold as a complete set as provided to you
and not as a subset thereof.
Additional License Limitations:
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by HERE in a separate
written agreement, and without limiting
the preceding paragraph, your license is
conditioned on use of the Data as
prescribed in this agreement, and you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
403
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with, or in communication with, including
without limitation, cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital -assistants or PDAs.
Note: This Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circum-stances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic Data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty:
This Data is provided to you “as is”, and
you agree to use it at your own risk. HERE
and its licensors (and their licensors and
suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or
results to be obtained from this Data, or
that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error ¬free.
Disclaimer of Warranty:
HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, OF QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.
Disclaimer of Liability:
HERE AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING
THEIR LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS)
SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU IN
RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE
OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM
THE USE OR POSSESSION OF THIS DATA;
OR FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS DATA, ANY
DEFECT IN THIS DATA, OR THE BREACH
OF THESE TERMS OR CONDITIONS,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION IN CONTRACT
OR TORT OR BASED ON A WARRANTY,
EVEN IF HERE OR ITS LICENSORS HAVE
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. Some States, Territories
and Countries do not allow certain liability
exclusions or damages limitations, so to
that extent the above may not apply to
you.
Export Control:
You agree not to export from anywhere
any part of the Data or any direct product
thereof except in compliance with, and
with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered
by the Office of Foreign Assets Control of
the U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent
404
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
that any such export laws, rules or
regulations prohibit HERE from complying
with any of its obligations hereunder to
deliver or distribute Data, such failure shall
be excused and shall not constitute a
breach of this Agreement.
Entire Agreement:
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between HERE (and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the
subject matter hereof, and supersedes in
their entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.
Severability:
You and HERE agree that if any portion of
this agreement is found illegal or
unenforceable, that portion shall be
severed and the remainder of the
Agreement shall be given full force and
effect.
Severability:
You and HERE agree that if any portion of
this agreement is found illegal or
unenforceable, that portion shall be
severed and the remainder of the
Agreement shall be given full force and
effect.
Governing Law:
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the State of Illinois
(for Data for the Americas and/or the Asia
Pacific region) or The Netherlands (for
Data for Europe, the Middle East and
Africa), without giving effect to (i) its
conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. For any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data (“Claims”),
you agree to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of (a) the State of Illinois for
Claims related to Data for the Americas
and/or the Asia Pacific region provided to
you hereunder, and (b) The Netherlands
for Data for Europe, the Middle East and/or
Africa provided to you hereunder.
Government End Users:
If the Data is being acquired by or on
behalf of the United States government or
any other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the
United States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with this End¬ User License
Agreement, and each copy of Data
delivered or otherwise furnished shall be
marked and embedded as appropriate
with the following “Notice of Use”, and be
treated in accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
NAME:
HERE
CONTRACTOR
(MANUFACTURER/SUPPLIER)
ADDRESS:
425 West Randolph Street, Chicago, IL
60606.
405
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101
and is subject to the End User License
Agreement under
which this Data was provided.
© 1987-2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright© 2000-2007
Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright
© 2000-2007 Gracenote. This product
and service may practice one or more of
the following U.S. Patents #5,987,525,
#6,061,680, #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6.240,459,
#6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device.
This device may contain content belonging
to Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect
to Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote.
You agree that you will use the content
from Gracenote ("Gracenote Content") ,
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers for your own
personal, non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or
transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote
Data (except in a Tag associated with a
music file) to any third party. YOU AGREE
NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE
CONTENT, GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
406
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote,
respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see
the web page at www.gracenote.com for
the Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH
ITEM OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA
TYPES THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE
TO PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS
FREE TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE
SERVICES AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE
DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER.
© Gracenote 2007.
FCC ID: KMHSYNCG2
IC: 1422A-SYNCG2
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
407
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
WARNING
Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
408
MKZ (CC9)
Appendices
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A
FORD EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)
More than 32 million Ford and Lincoln
owners have discovered the powerful
protection of Ford Extended Service Plan.
It is the only extended service plan backed
by Ford Motor Company, and provides
peace of mind protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage.
Ford ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself
One service bill – the cost of parts and
labor – can easily exceed the price of your
Ford Extended Service Plan. With Ford
ESP, you minimize your risk for
unexpected repair bills and rising repair
costs.
Up to 500+ Covered Vehicle
Components
There are four Extended Service Plans
with different levels of coverage. Ask your
authorized dealer for details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
500 covered components, this plan is
so complete that we generally only
discuss what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Ford Extended Service Plan is honored by
all authorized Ford and Lincoln dealers in
the U.S. and Canada. It is the only
extended service plan authorized and
backed by Ford Motor Company.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service anywhere you
go
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using Genuine Ford and
Lincoln parts
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
You take advantage of replacement
transportation if your vehicle is at your
authorized dealer for same day covered
repairs.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for
covered repairs, you are eligible for rental
car coverage, including Bumper to Bumper
warranty repairs, or Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car
• Destination assistance for taxi, shuttle,
rental car coverage and emergency
transportation
409
MKZ (CC9)
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Extended Service Plan coverage expires,
you can transfer any remaining coverage
to the new owner. Whenever you sell your
vehicle, prospective buyers may have a
higher degree of confidence that vehicle
was properly maintained with Ford ESP,
thereby improving resale value.
Avoid the Rising Cost of Properly
Maintaining Your Vehicle!
Ford Extended Service Plan also offers a
Premium Maintenance Plan that covers all
scheduled maintenance, and select items
that routinely wear out.
The coverage is prepaid, so you never
have to worry about affording your vehicle
maintenance. It covers regular checkups,
routine inspections, preventive care and
replacement of select items that require
periodic attention for normal wear:
• Windshield Wiper Blades
• Spark Plugs (except in California)
• The Clutch Disc
• Brake Pads and Linings
• Shock Absorbers
• Belts and Hoses
• Diesel Exhaust Fluid Replenishment
Contact your selling authorized Ford or
Lincoln dealership today so they can
customize a Ford Extended Service Plan
that fits your driving lifestyle and budget.
Interest Free Finance Options Available
Take advantage of our interest free
installment payment plan. Just a 10% down
payment will provide you with an
affordable, no interest, no fee payment
program.
To learn more, call our Ford ESP
specialists at 800-367-3377. Don’t forget
to ask about our interest free payment
program, allowing you all the security and
benefits Ford ESP has to offer while paying
over time. You are pre-approved with no
credit checks, no hassles!
Complete the information below and mail
to:
Ford ESP
P.O. Box 8072
Royal Oak, MI 48068-0039
Name (PLEASE PRINT)
APT.#ADDRESS
ZIPSTATECITY
410
MKZ (CC9)
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
Name (PLEASE PRINT)
E-MAIL
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Extended
Service Plan. Ford Extended Service Plan
is the only service contract backed by Ford
Motor Company of Canada, Limited.
Depending on the plan you purchase, Ford
Extended Service Plan provides benefits
such as:
• Rental reimbursement
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items
• Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires
• Roadside Assistance benefits
There are several Ford Extended Service
Plans available in various time, distance
and deductible combinations. Each plan
is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental.
When you purchase Ford Extended
Service Plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada and the United States, provided
by a network of participating authorized
Ford Motor Company dealers. The Lincoln
Maintenance Protection Plan is honored
at authorized Lincoln dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada and the United States are not
eligible for Ford Extended Service Plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change.
For more information, visit your local Ford
of Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find
the Ford Extended Service Plan that is
right for you.
411
MKZ (CC9)
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major
repair expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your
cost of owning your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 302).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
12-month or 12000-mile (20000
kilometers) parts and labor limited
warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts
they may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
412
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
information display, which indicates the
proper oil change interval. This interval
may be up to one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers).
When ENGINE OIL CHANGE DUE or OIL
CHANGE REQUIRED appears in the
information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 miles
(800 kilometers) of the ENGINE OIL
CHANGE DUE or OIL CHANGE
REQUIRED message appearing. Make
sure you reset the oil monitoring system
after each oil change. See Engine Oil
Check (page 254).
If your information display resets
prematurely, becomes inoperative or the
vehicle battery becomes discharged or
disconnected, the oil monitoring system
resets to 100% oil life. You should change
your engine oil one year or 10000 miles
(16000 kilometers) from the previous oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10000
miles (16000 kilometers) between oil
change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals
or additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.
413
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert,
such as the factory-trained technicians at
your dealership, should inspect discolored
fluids that also show signs of overheating
or foreign material contamination
immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils
and fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
Check every month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Check every six months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
414
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
Check every six months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.
Multi-point inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and A/C hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or
damage
Exhaust system
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires for wear and proper pressure
**
Fluid levels
*
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
*
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
**
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
415
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.
SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.
Extensive idling or low-speed driving for long distances, as in heavy commercial use (such
as delivery, taxi, patrol car or livery)
Change engine oil and filter every 12 months or 10000
miles (16000 km). The oil monitoring system displays a
message in the information display. Perform services listed
in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60000 miles (96000
km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
416
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Change engine oil and filter.Every 5000 miles (8000 km)
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Exceptions
There are some exceptions to your Normal
Scheduled Maintenance:
California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot climate oil change intervals: Vehicles
operating in the Middle East, North Africa,
Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified for
Gasoline Engines (Certification mark) oil
of SM or SN quality, the normal oil change
interval is 5000 miles (8000 kilometers).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3000 miles (4800 kilometers).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and
cabin air filter.
NORMAL SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Normal scheduled maintenance
1, 2
Change engine oil and filter.
3
Every 12 months or 10000
miles (16000 km). The oil
monitoring system displays
a message in the informa-
tion display.
Rotate tires, inspect tire wear and measure tread depth.
Inspect automatic transmission fluid level. Consult dealer
for requirements.
417
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
Normal scheduled maintenance
1, 2
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, brake linings,
hoses and parking brake.
Inspect engine cooling system and motor/electronics
cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect half-shaft boots.
Inspect steering linkage, ball joints, suspension and tie-
rod ends.
Inspect wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10000 miles (16000 kilometers) between service intervals.
2
Perform multi-point inspection (recommended).
3
Reset the oil monitoring system after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil
Check (page 254).
Other maintenance items
*
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20000 miles (32000
km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30000 miles (48000
km)
Change engine coolant and motor/electronics coolant.
**
At 100000 miles (160000
km)
418
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
Other maintenance items
*
Replace spark plugs.Every 100000 miles
(160000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 150000 miles
(240000 km)
*
Perform these maintenance items within 3000 miles (4800 kilometers) of the last engine
oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
**
Initial replacement at six years or 100000 miles (160000 kilometers), then every three
years or 50000 miles (80000 kilometers).
419
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
420
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
421
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
422
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
423
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
424
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
425
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
426
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
427
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
428
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
429
MKZ (CC9)
Scheduled Maintenance
430
MKZ (CC9)
A
A/C
See: Climate Control......................................124
About This Manual........................................7
Protecting the Environment.............................7
ABS
See: Brakes......................................................174
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes...........................................................175
Accessories...............................................389
Exterior style...................................................389
Interior style....................................................389
Lifestyle............................................................389
Peace of mind................................................389
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation.........................................12
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control..........192
Active Park Assist.....................................184
Automatic Steering into Parking
Space............................................................185
Deactivating the Park Assist Feature........186
Troubleshooting the System.......................186
Using Active Park Assist...............................184
Adaptive Headlamps.................................80
Adjusting the Headlamps......................263
Horizontal Aim Adjustment.........................264
Vertical Aim Adjustment..............................263
Adjusting the Steering Wheel.................70
Power Tilt and Telescope Steering
Column...........................................................70
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps.............................80
Airbag Disposal...........................................47
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control......................................124
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm......................................68
Anti-Theft Alarm..........................................68
Arming the Alarm.............................................68
Disarming the Alarm.......................................68
Appendices................................................391
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........95
Headlamps On Warning Chime...................95
Key in Ignition Warning Chime.....................95
Keyless Warning Alert.....................................95
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..............96
Audio Control...............................................71
Seek, Next or Previous....................................71
Audio System............................................309
General Information......................................309
Audio unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD...............................................310
Autolamps.....................................................77
Automatic Climate Control.....................124
Automatic High Beam Control................79
Activating the System.....................................80
Manually Overriding the System.................80
Automatic Transmission..........................170
Brake-Shift Interlock Override.....................172
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..............................................................173
Push Button Shift Transmission..................170
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check.......................................................259
Autowipers...................................................74
Auxiliary Power Points.............................144
110 Volt AC Power Point................................144
12 Volt DC Power Point.................................144
Locations...........................................................144
B
Blind Spot Information System.............205
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS®) with
Cross Traffic Alert.....................................205
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood.......252
Booster Seats..............................................24
Types of Booster Seats..................................25
431
MKZ (CC9)
Index
Brake Fluid Check...................................260
Brakes..........................................................174
General Information.......................................174
Breaking-In................................................223
Bulb Specification Chart........................265
C
Cabin Air Filter...........................................126
California Proposition 65............................11
Capacities and Specifications..............302
Technical Specifications..............................306
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior..........................268
Center Console.........................................146
Changing a Bulb......................................264
Lamp Assembly Condensation..................264
Replacing Bulbs.............................................265
Changing a Fuse......................................249
Fuses................................................................249
Changing the 12V Battery.....................260
Changing the Engine Air Filter.............267
............................................................................267
Changing the Wiper Blades..................262
Checking MyKey System Status.............55
Checking the Wiper Blades..................262
Child Restraint and Safety Belt
Maintenance..............................................37
Child Safety...................................................14
General Information..........................................14
Child Safety Locks.....................................28
Left-Hand Side..................................................28
Right-Hand Side...............................................28
Child Seat Positioning...............................26
Cleaning Leather Seats..........................272
Cleaning Products...................................268
Cleaning the Alloy Wheels....................272
Cleaning the Engine...............................269
Cleaning the Exterior..............................268
Cleaning Plastic Exterior Parts...................269
Exterior Chrome............................................269
Stripes or Graphics (if equipped)...............268
Underbody......................................................269
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens........................271
Cleaning the Interior...............................270
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades......................................................270
Clearing All MyKeys...................................54
Climate........................................................376
Climate Control Voice Commands............378
Climate Control..........................................124
Collision, Damage or Fire Event..........229
Guidance for Ford Motor Company Electric
and Hybrid-Electric Vehicles Equipped
With High Voltage Batteries...................229
Collision Warning System.......................210
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION........................210
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check.......................255
Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator.....................................................46
Creating a MyKey.......................................54
Programming/Changing Configurable
Settings..........................................................54
Cruise Control.............................................72
Principle of Operation....................................191
Type 1..................................................................72
Type 2.................................................................72
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control.............................191
Customer Assistance..............................232
D
Data Recording..............................................9
Event Data Recording......................................10
Service Data Recording....................................9
Daytime Running Lamps...........................79
Direction Indicators.....................................81
432
MKZ (CC9)
Index
Drive Control..............................................212
LINCOLN DRIVE CONTROL........................212
Driver Alert.................................................199
Using Driver Alert...........................................199
Driver and Passenger Airbags................40
Children and Airbags.......................................41
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment....................................................40
Driver Knee Airbag....................................45
Driving Aids................................................199
Driving Hints..............................................223
Driving Through Water...........................223
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.......................79
E
Economical Driving..................................223
Electric Parking Brake..............................175
Applying the electric parking brake..........175
Applying the electric parking brake when
the vehicle is moving................................176
Battery With No Charge................................177
Releasing the electric parking brake.........176
Electric Vehicle Information...................361
Power................................................................362
Emission Control System........................164
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................165
Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)
Testing..........................................................165
End User License Agreement...............391
SYNC® End User License Agreement
(EULA)...........................................................391
Engine Block Heater................................150
Using the Engine Block Heater...................151
Engine Coolant Check...........................255
Adding Coolant..............................................256
Adding Engine Coolant................................257
Adding Inverter System Controller
Coolant........................................................257
Checking the Engine Coolant....................255
Checking the Inverter System Controller
Coolant........................................................255
Engine Coolant and Inverter System
Controller Coolant....................................255
Recycled Engine Coolant............................258
Severe Climates.............................................258
What You Should Know About Fail-Safe
Cooling........................................................258
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System....................67
Engine Oil Check.....................................254
Adding Engine Oil.........................................254
Engine Oil Dipstick..................................254
Engine Specifications.............................302
Entertainment............................................334
A/V Inputs........................................................353
AM/FM Radio..................................................336
Bluetooth Audio.............................................353
Browsing Device Content............................334
CD......................................................................347
SD Card Slot and USB Port.........................348
Sirius® Satellite Radio (If Activated)..........342
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information...............................352
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..........................175
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording..........................................9
Export Unique Options..............................13
433
MKZ (CC9)
Index
Exterior Mirrors............................................84
Auto-Dimming Feature...................................85
Blind Spot Monitor...........................................86
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors............................85
Heated Exterior Mirrors..................................85
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors.......................85
Memory Mirrors................................................85
Power Exterior Mirrors....................................84
Signal Indicator Mirrors..................................85
F
Fastening the Safety Belts.......................30
Rear Inflatable Safety Belt.............................33
Restraint of Pregnant Women........................31
Safety Belt Extension Assembly...................34
Safety Belt Locking Modes.............................31
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Temporary Mobility Kit........................276
Floor Mats..................................................224
Fog Lamps - Front
See: Front Fog Lamps....................................80
Ford Extended Service Plan (ESP)......409
SERVICE PLANS (CANADA ONLY)..............411
SERVICE PLANS (U.S. Only)........................409
Front Fog Lamps........................................80
Front Passenger Sensing System...........41
Fuel and Refueling...................................158
Fuel Consumption....................................163
Calculating Fuel Economy...........................163
Filling the Tank................................................163
Fuel Filter...................................................260
Fuel Quality................................................159
Choosing the Right Fuel...............................159
Octane Recommendations..........................159
Fuel Shutoff...............................................226
Fuses...........................................................239
Fuse Specification Chart........................239
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel......246
Power Distribution Box................................239
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener........139
Gauges..........................................................89
Common Displays............................................90
Left Information Display.................................89
Right Information Display..............................90
General Information on Radio
Frequencies..............................................48
Intelligent Access.............................................48
General Maintenance Information........412
Multi-point Inspection....................................415
Owner Checks and Services.......................414
Protecting Your Investment..........................413
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................412
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?..................................................412
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.....................................................235
Getting the Services You Need............232
Away From Home..........................................232
Global Opening and Closing...................84
Closing the Windows......................................84
Opening the Windows....................................84
H
Hazard Warning Flashers......................226
Headlamp Exit Delay.................................78
Head Restraints.........................................129
Adjusting the Head Restraint......................130
Tilting Head Restraints ..................................131
Heated Seats.............................................135
Rear Heated Seats.........................................136
Heated Steering Wheel.............................73
Heated Windows and Mirrors................126
Heated Exterior Mirror..................................126
Heated Rear Window....................................126
Heating
See: Climate Control......................................124
434
MKZ (CC9)
Index
HEV
See: Hybrid Electric Vehicle........................152
High Voltage Battery Cut-Off
Switch........................................................169
High Voltage Battery................................167
General Information.......................................167
Hill Start Assist...........................................177
Using Hill Start Assist.....................................178
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate......................................................125
Cooling the Interior Quickly.........................126
General Hints...................................................125
Heating the Interior Quickly........................126
Recommended Settings for Cooling ........126
Recommended Settings for Heating.........126
Side Window Defogging in Cold
Weather........................................................126
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.......................................................175
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood.......252
Hybrid Electric Vehicle............................152
.............................................................................152
I
In California (U.S. Only)...........................233
Information Display Control.....................72
Cluster Display Control Features.................72
Information Displays..................................97
General Information.........................................97
Information................................................365
911 Assist..........................................................373
Alerts.................................................................372
Calendar...........................................................373
Sirius Travel Link............................................369
SYNC Services (If Equipped, United States
Only).............................................................366
Vehicle Health Report...................................375
Information Messages.............................109
Active Park.......................................................109
Adaptive Cruise Control...............................109
AdvanceTrac™...................................................110
Airbag.................................................................110
Alarm..................................................................110
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................111
Battery and Charging System (12 volt)........111
Battery and Charging System (High
Voltage)...........................................................111
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.................................................112
Collision Warning System..............................112
Doors and Locks..............................................113
Driver Alert........................................................113
Fuel......................................................................113
Hill Start Assist..................................................114
Keys and Intelligent Access..........................114
Lane Keeping System.....................................115
Maintenance.....................................................116
MyKey.................................................................117
Park Aid..............................................................118
Park Brake.........................................................118
Power Steering.................................................119
Remote Start.....................................................119
Seats...................................................................119
Starting System ..............................................120
Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............120
Traction Control...............................................121
Transmission.....................................................121
Installing Child Seats..................................16
Child Seats..........................................................16
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.......................16
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).........................................21
Using Tether Straps.........................................23
Instrument Cluster......................................89
Instrument Lighting Dimmer....................78
Interior Lamps..............................................81
Front Interior Lamp..........................................82
Rear Interior Lamp...........................................82
435
MKZ (CC9)
Index
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release.......................................................65
Interior Mirror...............................................86
Auto-Dimming Mirror......................................86
Introduction....................................................7
J
Jump-Starting the Vehicle.....................226
Connecting the Jumper Cables.................227
Jump Starting.................................................228
Preparing Your Vehicle.................................227
Removing the Jumper Cables....................228
K
Keyless Entry...............................................63
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD..........................................................63
Keyless Starting.........................................147
Ignition Modes.................................................147
Keys and Remote Controls......................48
L
Lane Keeping System.............................200
Switching the System On and Off..............201
Lighting Control...........................................77
Headlamp Flasher............................................77
High Beams........................................................77
Lighting..........................................................77
Lincoln Credit................................................11
Load Carrying............................................214
Load Limit....................................................214
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer............................................................214
Locking and Unlocking.............................58
Activating Intelligent Access .......................59
Autolock Feature.............................................60
Auto Relock.......................................................60
Battery Saver......................................................61
Illuminated Entry................................................61
Illuminated Exit..................................................61
Luggage Compartment...................................61
Power Decklid (If Equipped)..........................62
Power Door Locks...........................................58
Remote Control................................................58
Smart Unlocks .................................................59
Locks.............................................................58
M
Maintenance..............................................251
General Information.......................................251
Media Hub...................................................311
Memory Function......................................133
Easy Entry and Exit Function.......................134
Linking a Pre-Set Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key..........134
Saving a Pre-Set Position.............................134
Message Center
See: Information Displays..............................97
Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors............126
See: Windows and Mirrors.............................83
Mobile Communications Equipment......13
Moonroof......................................................87
Bounce-Back.....................................................87
Opening and Closing the Moonroof...........87
Retractable Panoramic Roof..........................88
Venting the Moonroof.....................................87
Motorcraft Parts........................................303
MyKey Troubleshooting............................55
MyKey™..........................................................53
Principle of Operation.....................................53
MyLincoln Touch™......................................313
General Information.......................................313
436
MKZ (CC9)
Index
N
Navigation..................................................379
cityseekr............................................................381
Map Mode.......................................................384
Navigation Map Updates.............................386
Navigation Voice Commands.....................386
Point of Interest (POI) Categories...............381
Quick-touch Buttons.....................................386
Setting a Destination....................................380
Setting Your Navigation Preferences.......382
Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........417
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset...................254
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check.................................254
Opening and Closing the Hood...........252
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.................................................237
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual........237
Overhead Console...................................146
P
Parking Aid.................................................182
Front Sensing System...................................183
Rear Sensing System.....................................182
Parking Aids...............................................182
Passive Anti-Theft System........................67
SecuriLock.........................................................67
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System....................67
Perchlorate.....................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................38
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..............................................................38
Phone..........................................................355
Making Calls....................................................357
Pairing Subsequent Phones.......................356
Pairing Your Phone for the First
Time..............................................................356
Phone Menu Options....................................357
Phone Settings...............................................359
Phone Voice Commands.............................360
Receiving Calls...............................................357
Text Messaging..............................................358
Post-Crash Alert System.........................231
Spinout Detection...........................................231
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking.........................58
Power Seats................................................131
Multi-Contour Front Seats With Active
Motion (If Equipped)..................................132
Power Lumbar.................................................132
Power Steering Fluid Check.................260
Power Windows..........................................83
Accessory Delay...............................................84
Bounce-Back.....................................................83
One-Touch Down.............................................83
One-Touch Up...................................................83
Window Lock.....................................................83
R
Rear Seat Armrest.....................................137
Armrest pass-through....................................137
Rear Seats...................................................135
Rear View Camera....................................188
Using the Rear View Camera System.......188
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera................................188
Refueling......................................................161
Easy Fuel™ Capless Fuel System.................161
437
MKZ (CC9)
Index
Remote Control...........................................48
Car Finder..........................................................50
Intelligent Access Key.....................................48
Remote Start.....................................................50
Replacing the Battery.....................................49
Sounding a Panic Alarm.................................50
Remote Start...............................................127
Automatic Settings.........................................127
Heated and Cooled Devices.......................128
Last Settings.....................................................127
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.............272
Replacement Parts
Recommendation.....................................12
Collision Repairs................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs............................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts....................12
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control........................................................52
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only).........................................................238
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)..........................................................237
Roadside Assistance...............................225
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Getting Roadside
Assistance..................................................225
Vehicles Sold In Canada : Using Roadside
Assistance..................................................226
Vehicles Sold In the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance................................225
Vehicles Sold In the United States : Using
Roadside Assistance................................225
Roadside Emergencies..........................225
Running-In
See: Breaking-In............................................223
Running Out of Fuel.................................159
Refilling With a Portable Fuel
Container.....................................................160
S
Safety Belt Height Adjustment................34
Safety Belt Minder......................................35
Belt-Minder®......................................................35
Safety Belts..................................................29
Principle of Operation.....................................29
Safety Belt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..........................................................35
Conditions of operation.................................35
Safety Precautions....................................158
Scheduled Maintenance Record.........420
Scheduled Maintenance.........................412
Seats............................................................129
Security.........................................................67
Settings.......................................................323
Clock.................................................................323
Display..............................................................324
Settings............................................................326
Sound...............................................................325
Vehicle..............................................................325
Side Airbags.................................................43
Side Curtain Airbags..................................45
Sitting in the Correct Position................129
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains.............................296
Special Notices............................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty......................12
Special Instructions..........................................12
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance............................................416
Exceptions........................................................417
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.........................................191
Stability Control.........................................180
Principle of Operation...................................180
Starting a Gasoline Engine.....................148
Automatic Shutdown.....................................149
Fast Restart......................................................149
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes.............150
Important Ventilating Information..............150
Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is
Moving..........................................................150
Switching Off the Vehicle When It Is
Stationary.....................................................149
438
MKZ (CC9)
Index
Starting and Stopping the Engine.........147
General Information.......................................147
Steering......................................................209
Electric Power Steering...............................209
Steering Wheel...........................................70
Storage Compartments...........................146
Sunroof
See: Moonroof..................................................87
Sun Shades..................................................86
Sun Visors....................................................86
Illuminated Vanity Mirror................................86
Supplementary Restraints System.........39
Principle of Operation.....................................39
Symbols Glossary..........................................7
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications..........302
Temporary Mobility Kit............................276
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air...................................278
General Information......................................277
Second Stage: Checking Tire
Pressure......................................................280
Tips for Use of the Kit...................................277
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed..........................................................280
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured.......278
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only).....................234
Tire Care....................................................282
Glossary of Tire Terminology.....................284
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading........................................................282
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.......................................................285
Temperature A B C........................................283
Traction AA A B C..........................................283
Treadwear........................................................283
Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Temporary Mobility Kit........................276
Tire Pressure Monitoring System........296
Changing Tires with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System....................................297
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ..................................298
Tire Repair Kit
See: Temporary Mobility Kit........................276
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.................................276
Towing a Trailer.........................................221
Towing the Vehicle on Four
Wheels.....................................................222
Emergency Towing.......................................222
Recreational Towing.....................................222
Towing.........................................................221
Traction Control.........................................179
Principle of Operation...................................179
Transmission Code Designation..........305
Transmission...............................................170
Transmission
See: Transmission...........................................170
Transporting the Vehicle.........................221
U
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L
Hybrid......................................................252
Unique Driving Characteristics.............152
Universal Garage Door Opener............139
HomeLink Wireless Control System..........139
439
MKZ (CC9)
Index
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............192
Blocked Sensor...............................................197
Changing the Set Speed..............................195
Detection Issues.............................................196
Disengaging the System..............................195
ECO Cruise Control.......................................198
Following a Vehicle........................................193
Hilly Condition Usage...................................196
Low Speed Automatic Cancellation..........196
Overriding the System..................................195
Resuming the Set Speed..............................196
Setting a Speed..............................................193
Setting the Gap Distance.............................194
Switching the System Off.............................196
Switching the System On.............................192
Switching to Normal Cruise Control..........198
System Not Available....................................197
Using Cruise Control.................................191
ECO Cruise Control.......................................192
Switching Cruise Control Off.......................192
Switching Cruise Control On........................191
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems......................................................55
Using Snow Chains.................................296
Using Stability Control..............................181
AdvanceTrac® ..................................................181
Using Traction Control.............................179
Switching the System Off Using a
Switch............................................................179
Switching the System Off Using the
Information Display Controls...................179
System Indicator Lights and
Messages.....................................................179
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only).......................235
V
Vehicle Care..............................................268
General Information......................................268
Vehicle Certification Label....................305
Vehicle Identification Number..............304
Vehicle Storage........................................273
Battery..............................................................274
Body..................................................................273
Brakes...............................................................274
Cooling system...............................................274
Engine...............................................................274
Fuel system.....................................................274
General.............................................................273
Miscellaneous.................................................274
Removing Vehicle From Storage...............274
Tires...................................................................274
Ventilated Seats.........................................137
Heated and ventilated seat air filter
replacement (if equipped)........................137
Ventilation
See: Climate Control......................................124
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number..........304
Voice Control...............................................72
440
MKZ (CC9)
Index
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators................91
Adaptive Cruise Control.................................92
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................92
Battery................................................................92
Blind Spot Monitor...........................................92
Brake System....................................................92
Cruise Control...................................................92
Direction Indicator...........................................92
Door Ajar............................................................92
Electric Park Brake..........................................93
Engine Oil...........................................................93
Engine or Motor Coolant
Temperature.................................................93
Fasten Safety Belt............................................93
Front Airbag.......................................................93
Grade Assist......................................................93
Heads Up Display............................................93
High Beam.........................................................93
Hood Ajar...........................................................93
Lane Keeping Aid.............................................93
Low Fuel Level..................................................93
Low Tire Pressure Warning...........................94
Low Washer Fluid.............................................94
Parking Lamps..................................................94
Powertrain Fault...............................................94
Ready to Drive..................................................94
Service Engine Soon.......................................94
Stability Control................................................95
Stability Control Off.........................................95
Stop Safely.........................................................95
Trunk Ajar...........................................................95
Washer Fluid Check................................260
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..........................268
See: Wipers and Washers..............................74
Waxing........................................................269
Wheels and Tires.....................................276
Technical Specifications...............................301
Windows and Mirrors................................83
Windshield Washers..................................75
Windshield Wipers......................................74
Intermittent Wipe..............................................74
Speed Dependent Wipers.............................74
Wipers and Washers..................................74
441
MKZ (CC9)
Index
442
MKZ (CC9)
